Many hyperlinks are disabled.
Use anonymous login
to enable hyperlinks.
Overview
| Comment: | Rev bump |
|---|---|
| Timelines: | family | ancestors | descendants | both | trunk |
| Files: | files | file ages | folders |
| SHA1: | b1cd9f708623260ea276b4898b1a3531ceb05acd |
| User & Date: | kevin 2018-04-23 02:05:08 |
Context
|
2018-04-26
| ||
| 03:20 | Fix errors in softwareupdate package check-in: f97787a0ac user: kevin tags: trunk | |
|
2018-04-23
| ||
| 02:05 | Rev bump check-in: b1cd9f7086 user: kevin tags: trunk | |
|
2017-12-09
| ||
| 05:27 | Further tweak of services api check-in: 9950b08b34 user: kevin tags: trunk | |
Changes
Changes to libs/machelp/help.txt.
140 140 * The "rman" tool for man page formatting. Website and license: [http://polyglotman.sourceforge.net/]. 141 141 * The "aem" package for custom Apple Event handling. Website and license: [http://fossil.codebykevin.com]. 142 142 143 143 144 144 ------------------- 145 145 title: Manpower Version History 146 146 alias: Version History 147 + 148 +'''6.7 (April 20, 2018):''' 149 + * Migrate to new source code server. 150 + * Minor bug fixes. 147 151 148 152 '''6.6 (December 1, 2017):''' 149 153 * UI enhancements. 150 154 151 155 '''6.5 (May 1, 2017):''' 152 156 * Improved scrolling performance, security support on macOS. 153 157 ................................................................................ 241 245 242 246 ------------------- 243 247 title: License 244 248 alias: License 245 249 246 250 '''The MIT License (MIT)''' 247 251 248 -Manpower source code: [http://fossil.codebykevin.com/fossil.cgi/manpower/] 252 +Manpower source code: [https://www.codebykevin.com/fossil.cgi/manpower/] 249 253 250 -Copyright (c) 2017 WordTech Communications LLC 254 +Copyright (c) 2018 WordTech Communications LLC 251 255 252 256 Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: 253 257 254 258 The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. 255 259 256 260 THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Changes to libs/manpower/manpower-main.tcl.
1 1 # Manpower: Man page browser and viewer 2 2 3 -#Copyright (C) 2017 WordTech Communications LLC 3 +#Copyright (C) 2018 WordTech Communications LLC 4 4 5 5 #MIT license 6 6 7 7 #let's get started 8 8 9 9 package require Img 10 10 package require BWidget ................................................................................ 1241 1241 global appversion 1242 1242 global datadir 1243 1243 global rmanpath 1244 1244 global cachedir 1245 1245 global searchterm 1246 1246 global mynode 1247 1247 1248 - appname::setAppName Manpower 6.6 1248 + appname::setAppName Manpower 6.7 1249 1249 1250 1250 1251 1251 set rmanpath [file join [file dirname [info script]] rman] 1252 1252 1253 1253 1254 1254 #check for app support directory 1255 1255 set appdir [file join $::env(HOME) "Library" "Application Support" "Manpower"] ................................................................................ 1363 1363 singleManPage 1364 1364 } 1365 1365 1366 1366 1367 1367 #custom "about" dialog 1368 1368 proc aboutWindow {} { 1369 1369 1370 - tk_messageBox -parent . -icon info -title "About Manpower" -message "Manpower: Man Page Viewer" -detail "Version 6.6\n(c)2017 WordTech Communications LLC" 1370 + tk_messageBox -parent . -icon info -title "About Manpower" -message "Manpower: Man Page Viewer" -detail "Version 6.7\n(c)2018 WordTech Communications LLC" 1371 1371 1372 1372 } 1373 1373 1374 1374 #raise window if closed--dock click 1375 1375 proc ::tk::mac::ReopenApplication {} { 1376 1376 1377 1377 if { [wm state .] == "withdrawn"} {
Changes to libs/softwareupdate/softwareupdate.tcl.
61 61 variable currentversion 62 62 variable versionnumber 63 63 64 64 set appname $app 65 65 66 66 softwareupdate::checkingForUpdates 67 67 68 - set versionurl https://www.codebykevin.com/$appname-version.tcl 68 + set versionurl [string tolower https://www.codebykevin.com/$appname-version.tcl] 69 69 http::config -useragent "$appname Update Check" 70 70 71 71 if [catch {http::geturl $versionurl} msg] { 72 - puts "error: $msg" 72 + if {[tk windowingsystem] ne "win32"} { puts "error: $msg"} 73 73 tk_messageBox -icon warning -title "Unable to Connect to Server" -message "Unable to Connect to Server" -detail "Unable to connect to www.codebykevin.com to check for updates. Please make sure you are connected to the Internet." -parent . 74 74 catch {destroy .updateprogress} 75 75 return 76 76 } 77 77 78 78 set versionnumber [string trim [http::data [http::geturl $versionurl]]] 79 79 if [expr $currentversion < $versionnumber] { ................................................................................ 130 130 131 131 catch {destroy .updateprogress} 132 132 133 133 catch {destroy .update} 134 134 135 135 variable appname 136 136 137 - set changeurl https://www.codebykevin.com/$appname-changes.tcl 137 + set changeurl [string tolower https://www.codebykevin.com/$appname-changes.tcl] 138 138 139 139 if [catch {http::geturl $changeurl} msg] { 140 - puts "error: $msg" 140 + if {[tk windowingsystem] ne "win32"} { puts "error: $msg"} 141 141 tk_messageBox -icon warning -title "Unable to Connect to Server" -message "Unable to Connect to Server" -detail "Unable to connect to www.codebykevin.com to check for updates. Please make sure you are connected to the Internet." -parent . 142 142 catch {destroy .updateprogress} 143 143 return 144 144 } 145 145 146 146 147 147 set changelist [http::data [http::geturl $changeurl]]
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/CHANGES.txt.
1 -What is new in Tablelist 5.16? 2 ------------------------------- 3 - 4 -1. Added the "-autofinishediting" configuration option, relevant for 5 - interactive cell editing via a combobox or menubutton widget (thanks 6 - to Alexandru Dadalau for his proposal). 7 - 8 -2. On Windows Vista, 7, 8, and 10, the sort arrows are now shown 9 - horizontally centered in the header labels and attached to their top 10 - edges. 11 - 12 -3. Added the arrow style "photo7x4" as well as its automatically scaled 13 - versions "photo9x5", "photo11x6", and "photo15x8", used as defaults 14 - on Windows Vista, 7, and 8. 15 - 16 -4. Added the tree style "mint2", suiting version 18 of the Linux Mint 17 - distribution. 18 - 19 -5. Support for fully qualified edit window names of the form "::ttk::*" 20 - (thanks to Adrian Medrano Calvo for his proposal). 21 - 22 -6. Worked around a text widget issue introduced in Tk 8.6.6 (thanks to 23 - Peter Spjuth, Harald Oehlmann, and Rene Zaumseil for their valuable 24 - input). 25 - 26 -7. Improvements related to the "move" and "movecolumn" subcommands as 27 - well as to the management of the images used in sort arrows (thanks 28 - to Adrian Medrano Calvo and Torsten Berg for their proposals). 29 - 30 -8 Drastically increased the speed of the "collapse" and "collapseall" 31 - subcommands with the "-fully" option (thanks to Ulrich Seidl for 32 - reporting the pure performance of "collapseall -fully"). 33 - 34 -9. Adapted the implementation of the "delete" subcommand to the changed 35 - text widget behavior in Tk 8.6.5 (thanks to Ulrich Seidl for his bug 36 - report). 37 - 38 -10. Fixed a bug related to the "curcellselection" subcommand (thanks to 39 - Juge for his bug report). 40 - 41 -What was new in Tablelist 5.15? 42 -------------------------------- 43 - 44 -1. Support for Windows 10, including the new tree style "win10", whose 45 - size is automatically adapted to the display's scaling level. 46 - 47 -2. Added the arrow styles "flatAngle11x6" and "flatAngle15x8", needed 48 - for automatic scaling of the default arrow style "flatAngle7x4" on 49 - Windows 10. 50 - 51 -3. The variable "tablelist::scalingpct", used by Tablelist when adapting 52 - the sizes of several tree styles to the display's DPI scaling level, 53 - is now documented in Tablelist Programmer's Guide. 54 - 55 -4. Worked around a text widget bug introduced in Tk 8.5.18 and 8.6.4 56 - (fixed for the next Tk versions). 57 - 58 -5. Fixed a bug that prevented the subcommands "see end", "see last", and 59 - "yview moveto 1" from working as expected if the tablelist widget 60 - contains multi-line cells or large images (thanks to Harald Oehlmann 61 - for his bug report and to Francois Vogel for discussions on this 62 - subject). 63 - 64 -What was new in Tablelist 5.14? 65 -------------------------------- 66 - 67 -1. Added the "-colorizecommand" configuration option, enabling you to 68 - change the colors of arbitrary character regions within the cells of 69 - the currently visible tablelist rows (thanks to Peter Spjuth for his 70 - proposal). 71 - 72 -2. The "curcellselection" and "curselection" subcommands now accept an 73 - optional argument with the possible values "-all", "-nonhidden", and 74 - "-viewable" (thanks to Will Duquette for his proposal). 75 - 76 -3. Added the tree styles "plain1", ..., "plain4", "bicolor1", ..., 77 - "bicolor4", and "classic1", ..., "classic4", suitable for use with 78 - large fonts and images (needed on high-resolution displays). In 79 - addition, the sizes used by the tree styles "vistaAero", 80 - "vistaClassic", "win7Aero", and "win7Classic" are now automatically 81 - adapted to the display's scaling level (thanks to Harald Oehlmann for 82 - his proposal). 83 - 84 -4. On Windows Vista and later, automatic scaling is now performed for 85 - the default arrow style, too. This made is necessary to add the 86 - arrow styles "flat11x6" and "flat15x8". 87 - 88 -5 Added the arrow style "flat8x4" and the tree style "ubuntu2", suiting 89 - version 15.04 of the Ubuntu Linux distribution. Similarly, added the 90 - tree style "yuyo", inspired by the GTK+ theme Yuyo on Ubuntu MATE. 91 - 92 -6. Changed the default arrow color "" and arrow style "sunken10x9" to 93 - "black" and "flat7x5" on the windowing system "x11" and for the tile 94 - themes "alt", "clam", "default", "kroc", "sriv", "srivlg", and "step" 95 - (POTENTIAL INCOMPATIBILITY!). 96 - 97 -7. In case of "-selecttype cell", the row containing the active cell is 98 - now displayed with raised relief (thanks to Holger Jakobs for his 99 - proposal). 100 - 101 -8. Guarded against invocations of the "update" command from within 102 - binding scripts associated with the <<TablelistSelect>> virtual 103 - event (thanks to Martyn Smith for his bug report and discussions on 104 - this topic). 105 - 106 -9. Worked around some unexpected events in certain X11 environments, 107 - which prevented Tablelist 5.13 from starting the interactive cell 108 - editing in such environments (thanks to Toni Giorgino for his bug 109 - report and helping me to reproduce this problem). 110 - 111 -What was new in Tablelist 5.13? 112 -------------------------------- 113 - 114 -1. Added support for Mac OS X 10.10 (Yosemite) (thanks to Kevin Walzer 115 - for his proposal). 116 - 117 -2. Renamed the four arrow styles having the shape of an angle from 118 - "flat7x5", ..., "flat10x6" to "flatAngle7x5", ..., "flatAngle10x6" 119 - (POTENTIAL INCOMPATIBILITY!); added the arrow styles "flat7x5", 120 - "flat9x6", "flatAngle7x4" (which is now the default on Yosemite), 121 - "flatAngle9x5", and "flatAngle10x7". 122 - 123 -3. Added the tree style "mate", inspired by a few GTK+ themes of the 124 - MATE desktop. 125 - 126 -4. Added the "-showeditcursor" configuration option, used to let the 127 - cursor take on the shape of a pencil whenever a mouse click would 128 - start an editing session (thanks to Rene Zaumseil and Cesare 129 - Bavazzano for their proposals). 130 - 131 -5. New column configuration option "-changetitlesnipside", which allows 132 - you to override the alignment-specific default snip side for the 133 - column's title (thanks to John Vella for his proposal). 134 - 135 -6. Support for the word "last" as row, column, cell, or child index, 136 - indicating the last row/column/cell of the tablelist or the last 137 - child of a given parent node (remember that the meaning of "end" as a 138 - row, column, or child index is subcommand-specific). 139 - 140 -7. The description of the "imagelabelpath" subcommand in the reference 141 - manual now contains an example showing how to define bindings for the 142 - embedded images. 143 - 144 -8. Eliminated the endless loop generated by the "yview" subcommand when 145 - synchronizing two or more tablelist widgets (thanks to Paul Obermeier 146 - for his bug report). 147 - 148 -What was new in Tablelist 5.12.1? 149 ---------------------------------- 150 - 151 -This is a bugfix-only release. The corrected files in the "scripts" 152 -directory are "tablelistEdit.tcl" and "tablelistUtil.tcl". 153 - 154 -1. Appended the missing 4th argument to the two invocations of the 155 - procedure "tablelist::moveOrActivate" in the file 156 - "tablelistEdit.tcl" (thanks to Patrick Fradin and Ralf Fassel for 157 - their bug reports). 158 - 159 -2. Fixed a typo in the file "tablelistUtil.tcl" (Thanks to Patrick 160 - Fradin for reporting this bug). 161 - 162 -What was new in Tablelist 5.12? 163 -------------------------------- 164 - 165 -1. Added the "-customdragsource" configuration option, used to indicate 166 - whether the tablelist widget is a drag source for some drag & drop 167 - implementation other than TkDND and the drag & drop framework 168 - included in BWidget. 169 - 170 -2. Improvements and extensions in the default binding scripts. Besides 171 - providing full compatibility with the Tk listbox, they now perform an 172 - automatic drag-friendly handling of the selection and of pointer 173 - movements with mouse button 1 down if the "-customdragsource" option 174 - was set to true or the tablelist's body was registered as a TkDND or 175 - BWidget drag source (thanks to Will Duquette for his proposal). The 176 - same holds true for the local drag & drop via the "move" subcommand. 177 - 178 -3. Added the "hidetargetmark", "showtargetmark", "targetmarkpath", and 179 - "targetmarkpos" subcommands, for enhanced drop target support (thanks 180 - to Trevor Williams for his proposal). 181 - 182 -4. Added a "Drag & Drop Support" section to the reference manual, with 183 - examples demonstrating the use of the new subcommands mentioned 184 - above in a tablelist widget registered as a TkDND or BWidget drop 185 - target. 186 - 187 -5. The visibility of the horizontal separator placed just below the last 188 - tablelist row if the value of the "-showseparators" option is true 189 - and that of the "-fullseparators" option is false, can now be 190 - controlled with the aid of the new "-showhorizseparator" 191 - configuration option (thanks to Martyn Smith for his proposal). 192 - 193 -6. New values "flat5x3" and "flat5x4" for the "-arrowstyle" 194 - configuration option, suiting current versions of the Ubuntu Linux 195 - distribution. 196 - 197 -7. Adapted the look & feel of the tree styles "adwaita", "ubuntu", and 198 - "mint" to current versions of the GTK+ 3 theme Adwaita and of the 199 - Linux distributions Ubuntu Linux and Linux Mint, respectively. 200 - 201 -8. Fixed a long-standing bug related to horizontal scrolling in an empty 202 - tablelist widget with positve "-titlecolumns" value (thanks to Ulrich 203 - Seidl for his bug report). 204 - 205 -What was new in Tablelist 5.11? 206 -------------------------------- 207 - 208 -1. Added the "findrowname" and "findcolumnname" subcommands (thanks to 209 - Adrian Medrano Calvo for his proposal and discussions on this 210 - subject). 211 - 212 -2. Collapsing a row no longer leads to renumbering the lines for the 213 - purpose of updating a column configured to display the line numbers 214 - (thanks to Will Duquette for his proposal). 215 - 216 -3. For improved appearance, if the value of the "-showseparators" option 217 - is true and that of the "-fullseparators" option is false, then a 218 - horizontal separator is now placed just below the last tablelist row 219 - (thanks to Allan Silverstein for his proposal). 220 - 221 -4. Worked around a peculiarity of Tk on Windows, which caused problems 222 - when resizing the tablelist window in the presence of embedded images 223 - or multi-line elements (thanks to Will Duquette for his bug report). 224 - 225 -5. Added the missing actualization of the active and anchor row indices 226 - after moving an item to a different position (thanks to Will Duquette 227 - for his bug report). 228 - 229 -6. Fixed two bugs in Tablelist_tile, related to header labels with 230 - embedded images (thanks to Ulrich Seidl for his bug reports). 231 - 232 -7. Numerous further improvements in the code and documentation. 233 - 234 -What was new in Tablelist 5.10? 235 -------------------------------- 236 - 237 -1. Added the "-acceptdropcommand" configuration option, used to control 238 - whether the local drag & drop may move a specified item just before 239 - a given row (thanks to Nagu and Georgios Petasis for discussions on 240 - this subject). 241 - 242 -2. Added the "-instanttoggle" configuration option, related to the cell 243 - editing with the aid of a Tk or tile checkbutton (thanks to Rich 244 - Wellner for his proposal and discussions on this topic). 245 - 246 -3. Added the "-tight" configuration option, used to eliminate the 247 - one-pixel additional space left below each tablelist row for Tk 248 - listbox compatibility (thanks to Koen Breugelmans for his proposal 249 - and discussions on this subject). 250 - 251 -4. Added the "isviewable" and "viewablerowcount" subcommands (thanks to 252 - Nagu for proposing the latter). 253 - 254 -5. Improvements related to the value of the "-data" option for the 255 - virtual events <<TablelistColumnMoved>> and <<TablelistRowMoved>> 256 - (thanks to Georgios Petasis for discussions on this topic). 257 - 258 -6. The item deletion has become significantly faster, especially in 259 - tablelists used as tree widgets and in the presence of embedded 260 - images and/or multi-line elements (thanks to Rob Ratcliff and Rene 261 - Zaumseil for requesting this performance improvement). 262 - 263 -7. Guarded against column deletions from within non-default binding 264 - scripts for the header labels (thanks to Ulrich Seidl for his 265 - input). 266 - 267 -8. Restored the support for Tcl/Tk versions earlier than 8.3, by 268 - cleaning up the use of elided text in the underlying text widget. 269 - Similarly, restored the support for Tcl/Tk 8.0, by cleaning up the 270 - use of "regsub" and that of the <MouseWheel> event (thanks to Joerg 271 - Mueck for reporting the first two issues). 272 - 273 -9. Improved the package loading mechanism (thanks to Paul Obermeier for 274 - his bug report). 275 - 276 -10. Guarded against potential item insertions or deletions from within 277 - the command specified as the value of the "-editendcommand" option 278 - (thanks to Julian H J Loaring for his bug report). 279 - 280 -11. Guarded against deletion of embedded images or windows from within 281 - the command specified as the value of the "-tooltipaddcommand" 282 - option (thanks to Jan Kandziora for his bug report). 283 - 284 -12. Fixed a bug related to column deletion if the "-selecttype" option 285 - has the value "cell" (thanks to Ulrich Seidl for his bug report). 286 - 287 -13. Several further code improvements and minor bug fixes. 288 - 289 -What was new in Tablelist 5.9? 290 ------------------------------- 291 - 292 -1. Added the "-valign" column and cell configuration option, for 293 - controlling the vertical alignment of embedded images and windows 294 - (thanks to Trevor Williams for his proposal). 295 - 296 -2. The "-stripebackground" and "-stripeforeground" options can now be 297 - specified at column level, too (thanks to Christian Gollwitzer for 298 - his proposal). 299 - 300 -3. Improvements related to the Windows 7 platform. 301 - 302 -4. Worked around a text widget bug in Tk versions 8.5 and later, related 303 - to getting the index of the last line in the window if some of the 304 - lines are elided (thanks to Bernhard Wallner for his bug report). 305 - 306 -5. Corrected a typo in the implementation of the "rowconfigure" 307 - subcommand, introduced in the last Tablelist version (thanks to Jerzy 308 - Witkowski for reporting this bug). 309 - 310 -6. Fixed a bug related to resetting the "-(select)background" and 311 - "-(select)foreground options at column, row, and cell levels, 312 - introduced in the previous Tablelist version (thanks to Christian 313 - Gollwitzer for his bug report). 314 - 315 -7. Several further improvements in the code, demo scripts, and 316 - documentation. 317 - 318 -What was new in Tablelist 5.8? 319 ------------------------------- 320 - 321 -1. Support for interactive cell editing with the aid of the ctext 322 - widget (thanks to Sait Dogru for his proposal). 323 - 324 -2. Added the "canceledediting" subcommand (thanks to Martyn Smith for 325 - his proposal). 326 - 327 -3. The "selection" and "cellselection" subcommands have become by 328 - orders of magnitude faster (thanks to Jean-Francois Beaud for his 329 - input that motivated me to speed up these subcommands). 330 - 331 -4. The "-(select)background" and "-(select)foreground options at 332 - column, row, and cell levels now impose by far less performance 333 - penalty than in earlier Tablelist versions. 334 - 335 -5. The keyboard traversal during interactive cell editing is now aware 336 - of changes like appending a new row, performed by the procedure 337 - specified as the value of the "-editendcommand" configuration option 338 - (thanks to Andreas Leitgeb for his proposal). 339 - 340 -6. For Tk versions 8.5 or later, most virtual events are now generated 341 - with the "-data" option set to a suitable event-specific value 342 - (thanks to Christian Gollwitzer, Andreas Leitgeb, and Nagu for their 343 - proposals). 344 - 345 -7. Improvements related to the selection mode "extended". 346 - 347 -8. Worked around a peculiarity of Tk on Windows, related to deleting an 348 - embedded window while resizing a text widget interactively (thanks 349 - to Harald Oehlmann for his bug report and discussions on this 350 - topic). 351 - 352 -9. Eliminated a regression introduced in Tablelist version 5.6, related 353 - to vertical scrolling under Tk 8.5 or later in the presence of 354 - embedded images or windows (thanks to Patrick Fradin for reporting 355 - this bug). 356 - 357 -10. Fixed a screen refresh problem introduced in Tablelist version 5.6, 358 - related to wrapped multiline elements (thanks to Rob for his bug 359 - report). 360 - 361 -11. Further code improvements (thanks to Harald Oehlmann for his 362 - valuable contribution). 363 - 364 -12. Added a "Virtual Events" section to the reference manual (thanks to 365 - Andreas Leitgeb for his proposal). 366 - 367 -What was new in Tablelist 5.7? 368 ------------------------------- 369 - 370 -1. Added the "cellbbox" subcommand. 371 - 372 -2. Added the "editinfo" subcommand (thanks to Trevor Williams for his 373 - proposal). 374 - 375 -3. Adapted the tree styles "ubuntu" and "mint" to the latest Ubuntu 376 - Linux and Linux Mint releases. 377 - 378 -4. Minor change related to the ttk::combobox widget used as edit window 379 - (thanks to Julian H J Loaring for his input). 380 - 381 -5. Improved the multi-platform support by increased use of virtual 382 - events. 383 - 384 -6. Worked around a bug in some earlier Tk versions, related to 385 - checkbuttons without indicator (thanks to Allan Silverstein for his 386 - input). 387 - 388 -7. Restored the support for Tcl/Tk versions earlier than 8.4, which has 389 - been broken since the previous Tablelist release, due to the use of 390 - the "namespace exists" command, introduced in Tcl 8.4 (thanks to 391 - Ralf Fassel for drawing my attention to this issue). 392 - 393 -8. Fixed a copy & paste bug related to embedded windows, introduced in 394 - the previous Tablelist version (thanks to Heng Li and David Hanks 395 - for their bug reports). 396 - 397 -9. Fixed a long-standing bug related to the "cancelediting" subcommand 398 - and the "-forceeditendcommand" option (thanks to Julian H J Loaring 399 - for his bug report). 400 - 401 -10. Fixed a long-standing minor bug that caused the "-labelbg" column 402 - configuration option to be accepted by Tablelist_tile, contrary to 403 - the option of the same name at widget level (thanks to Bernhard 404 - Wallner for his bug report). 405 - 406 -11. Several further improvements in the code and demo scripts (thanks to 407 - Patrick Fradin for his valuable contribution and to Marianne Baumann 408 - for her input related to the "-showlabels" option). 409 - 410 -What was new in Tablelist 5.6? 411 ------------------------------- 412 - 413 -1. Added the tree styles "adwaita", "mint", and "ubuntu", inspired by a 414 - few GTK+ 3 themes on popular Linux distributions. 415 - 416 -2. Added the "-windowupdate" cell configuration option (thanks to 417 - Trevor Williams for his valuable contribution). 418 - 419 -3. The item insertion and sorting have become significantly faster, 420 - especially when using static-width columns. 421 - 422 -4. Embedded windows are now hidden during interactive cell editing 423 - (thanks to Trevor Williams for discussions on this subject). 424 - 425 -5. Extended the support for the "tileqt" theme to work on KDE 4, too. 426 - 427 -6. Improvements in the documentation (thanks to Glenn Herteg for his 428 - proposal). 429 - 430 -7. Guarded against the case that a tablelist widget is deleted and its 431 - name is reused for a widget of a different class (thanks to Roger 432 - Niva for his valuable input). 433 - 434 -8. Guarded against scripts that start by destroying all children of the 435 - root window (thanks to Helmut Giese and Gerhard Kraus for drawing my 436 - attention to this case). 437 - 438 -9. Fixed two bugs related to the "move" subcommand, introduced in 439 - Tablelist version 5.2 (thanks to "DrS" and Trevor Williams for their 440 - bug reports). 441 - 442 -10. Several further improvements and minor bug fixes. 443 - 444 -What was new in Tablelist 5.5? 445 ------------------------------- 446 - 447 -1. Hidden tablelist elements are no longer excluded from the selection 448 - (thanks to Martyn Smith for his proposal). (They are, however, 449 - ignored when exporting the selection.) 450 - 451 -2. Added the "cornerpath" and "cornerlabelpath" subcommands. The first 452 - one makes it quite easy to respect the native Mac OS X look & feel, 453 - where the vertical scrollbar appears placed under the header (thanks 454 - to Torsten Berg for a related page on the Wiki, which provided me the 455 - idea for these subcommands). The "cornerpath" subcommand is now used 456 - in all demo scrips that contain vertical scrollbars. 457 - 458 -3. Added support for the appearance-related changes introduced in Mac 459 - OS X 10.7 (Lion). 460 - 461 -4. On Mac OS X Aqua, the default values of the "-move(column)cursor" 462 - and "-resizecursor" options are now native cursors. Besides 463 - improving the look & feel of tablelist widgets on the Mac, this 464 - change also works around the problem that on Mac OS X 10.7, Tk 465 - versions 8.5 and 8.6 can only use native and native-mapped cursors. 466 - 467 -5. Removed the "-labelbackground" option from Tablelist_tile, because 468 - current versions of the tile engine no longer support setting the 469 - background color for the header labels (and even with earlier tile 470 - versions, some themes ignored any attempt to change the background 471 - color of the header labels). 472 - 473 -6. Adapted the code to some changes in current tile versions, to make 474 - sure that in disabled state the tile-based column labels will appear 475 - in the theme-specific disabled foreground color, as it was the case 476 - with earlier tile versions (thanks to "tombert" for his related 477 - posting on comp.lang.tcl). 478 - 479 -7. Improved a few binding scripts (thanks to Ulrich Seidl for his bug 480 - report and testing). 481 - 482 -8. Fixed a bug related to embedded windows in a tablelist used as a 483 - tree widget (again, thanks to Ulrich Seidl for his bug report and 484 - testing). 485 - 486 -9. Several further improvements in the code, demo scripts, and 487 - documentation. 488 - 489 -What was new in Tablelist 5.4? 490 ------------------------------- 491 - 492 -1. Added the "-populatecommand" configuration option, used by the 493 - "searchcolumn" subcommand to insert child items on demand before 494 - checking whether they contain the specified pattern. 495 - 496 -2. Added the "-autoscan" configuration option, which can be used to 497 - deactivate the automatic scrolling triggered by leaving the 498 - tablelist window with mouse button 1 down, in order to avoid any 499 - conflicts with drag & drop via tkdnd (thanks to Patrick Fradin for 500 - his valuable contribution). 501 - 502 -3. New "isexpanded" subcommand. 503 - 504 -4. New value "flat9x6" for the "-arrowstyle" configuration option. 505 - 506 -5. Adapted the tree style "oxygen2" to the look of current KDE 4 507 - versions. 508 - 509 -6. Worked around some peculiarities of Tk on Mac OS X Aqua (thanks to 510 - Torsten Berg for her problem report and discussions on this topic). 511 - 512 -7. Improved the check for PNG support in Tk (thanks to Ian Gay for his 513 - posting on the Wiki related to this subject). 514 - 515 -8. Fixed a bug related to the tree style "aqua", introduced in 516 - Tablelist version 5.3 (thanks to Julian H J Loaring for his bug 517 - report). 518 - 519 -9. Numerous further improvements in the code and documentation. 520 - 521 -What was new in Tablelist 5.3.1? 522 --------------------------------- 523 - 524 -This release contains just one bug-fix and an enhancement: 525 - 526 -1. Fixed a bug related to the "-hide" row configuration option, 527 - introduced in the previous Tablelist version (thanks to Ralf Fassel 528 - and Michal Sosnowski for their bug reports). 529 - 530 -2. Extended the support for the native "Aqua-blue" background for the 531 - header label of the sort column (which in the previous Tablelist 532 - release was restricted to Tk versions 8.6 and above) to the Cocoa- 533 - based Tk patch levels 8.5.9 and above (thanks to Kevin Walzer for 534 - discussions on this topic and to Paul Obermeier for enabling me to 535 - access the ActiveTcl 8.5.8 distribution for the Mac). 536 - 537 -What was new in Tablelist 5.3? 538 ------------------------------- 539 - 540 -1. The interactive row move operation (i.e., local drag & drop) now 541 - supports moving an item outside its parent and dropping it under 542 - another item as a child (thanks to Dr. Detlef Groth for his 543 - proposal, thorough testing, and discussions on this topic). 544 - 545 -2. Added the "-acceptchildcommand" configuration option, related to the 546 - local drag & drop. 547 - 548 -3. New "searchcolumn" subcommand, supporting a rich set of options 549 - (thanks to Matthew Callaghan, Adrian Davis, and Jeff Godfrey for 550 - their proposals). 551 - 552 -4. New "getformatted", "getformattedcolumns", and "getformattedcells" 553 - subcommands. 554 - 555 -5. Support for interactive cell editing with the aid of the Tk core and 556 - tile menubutton widgets (thanks to Georgios Petasis for his 557 - proposal). 558 - 559 -6. Support for the row indices "top" and "bottom" (thanks to Julian H J 560 - Loaring and Paul Obermeier for their proposals). Likewise, support 561 - for the column indices "left" and "right". 562 - 563 -7. New value "photo7x7" for the "-arrowstyle" configuration option, 564 - needed for the "aqua" theme. 565 - 566 -8. Adapted the appearance of tablelist widgets on the Macintosh to 567 - current versions of OS X Aqua. 568 - 569 -9. Numerous further improvements and minor bug fixes. 570 - 571 -What was new in Tablelist 5.2? 572 ------------------------------- 573 - 574 -1. Added the "-fullseparators" configuration option (thanks to Kevin 575 - Partin, Martyn Smith, and Harald Oehlmann for their proposals). 576 - 577 -2. Added the tree styles "ambiance", "dust", "dustSand", "newWave", 578 - "plastik", and "radiance". 579 - 580 -3. The implementation of the "collapse(all)" and "expand(all)" 581 - subcommands no longer makes use of the "-hide" row configuration 582 - option, hence you are now free to set the latter (via 583 - "rowconfigure", "configrowlist", "configrows", or "togglerowhide"), 584 - regardless of whether the tablelist widget displays a tree 585 - hierarchy or just a plain list. 586 - 587 -4. The "move" subcommand now supports moving an item outside its 588 - parent. 589 - 590 -5. Deleting the whole content of a tablelist widget has become 591 - significantly faster (thanks to Harold Campbell for his input). 592 - 593 -6. Worked around a peculiarity of the text widget related to tag 594 - handling when deleting a range of lines from its end (thanks to 595 - Batox for his bug report). 596 - 597 -7. Minor improvements and bug-fixes in the binding scripts (thanks to 598 - Bernhard Wallner, Batox, and Roger Niva for their bug reports). 599 - 600 -8. Fixed a bug related to the "-selecttype cell" configuration option, 601 - (re)introduced in Tablelist version 5.0 (thanks to Harold Campbell 602 - and Dietmar Mueller for their bug reports). 603 - 604 -9. Fixed a bug related to row hiding via "configrowlist" or 605 - "configrows", introduced in Tablelist version 5.0 (thanks to Michal 606 - Sosnowski for his bug report). 607 - 608 -10. Fixed a long-standing bug related to tooltip support (thanks to 609 - Trevor Williams for his bug report). 610 - 611 -11. Several further improvements and minor bug fixes. 612 - 613 -What was new in Tablelist 5.1? 614 ------------------------------- 615 - 616 -This is a bugfix-only release. The corrected files in the "scripts" 617 -directory are "tablelistBind.tcl", "tablelistSort.tcl", 618 -"tablelistUtil.tcl", and "tablelistWidget.tcl". 619 - 620 -1. Fixed a bug related to item deletion, introduced in the previous 621 - Tablelist version (thanks to Aric Bills and Roger Niva for their bug 622 - reports). 623 - 624 -2. Fixed a bug related to multi-column sorting, introduced in the 625 - previous Tablelist version (thanks to Albrecht Mucha for his bug 626 - report). 627 - 628 -3. Fixed a long-standing bug related to column deletion (thanks to 629 - Liang Sian Yin for his bug report). 630 - 631 -4. Fixed a few further minor bugs and typos, introduced in the previous 632 - Tablelist version (thanks to Patrick Fradin, Roger Niva, Harald 633 - Oehlmann, and Peter Spjuth for their bug reports). 634 - 635 -What was new in Tablelist 5.0? 636 ------------------------------- 637 - 638 -1. A tablelist widget is now not only a multi-column listbox, but also 639 - a multi-column tree widget (thanks to Sebastien Barre, Tillmann 640 - Basien, Jos Decoster, Dr. Detlef Groth, Kai Morich, Georgios 641 - Petasis, and Kevin Walzer for their proposals, as well as to Paul 642 - Obermeier for testing the preliminary version). This is achieved 643 - with the aid of the new configuration options "-collapsecommand", 644 - "-expandcommand", "-treecolumn", and "-treestyle", along with the 645 - new subcommands "childcount", "childindex", "childkeys", "collapse", 646 - "collapseall", "depth", "descendantcount", "expand", "expandall", 647 - "expandedkeys", "insertchild(ren)", "insertchildlist", "noderow", 648 - "parentkey", and "toplevelkey". 649 - 650 -2. Added the "-editselectedonly" configuration option, related to 651 - starting the interactive cell editing with mouse button 1 (thanks to 652 - Julian H J Loaring for discussions on this topic). 653 - 654 -3. New values "flat6x4", "flat9x7", and "flat10x6" for the 655 - "-arrowstyle" configuration option. 656 - 657 -4. New value "asciinocase" for the "-sortmode" column configuration 658 - option. 659 - 660 -5. New subcommands "applysorting", "getfullkeys", and "refreshsorting". 661 - 662 -6. Two new demo scripts (and their tile-based counterparts) 663 - illustrating the use of a tablelist as multi-column tree widget. 664 - 665 -7. The subcommands "insert", "insertlist", "insertchild(ren)", and 666 - "insertchildlist" now return the list of full keys corresponding to 667 - the items just inserted. 668 - 669 -8. Fixed a long-standing bug related to the "-labelfont" option (thanks 670 - to Jacek Jendrysik for his bug report). 671 - 672 -9. Fixed a bug related to the "-text" column configuration option 673 - (thanks to Paul Obermeier for his bug report). 674 - 675 -10. Fixed a long-standing bug related to embedded windows in right- 676 - aligned columns (thanks to Jerzy Witkowski for his bug report). 677 - 678 -11. Numerous further improvements in the code and documentation. 679 - 680 -What was new in Tablelist 4.12? 681 -------------------------------- 682 - 683 -1. Added the "labeltag" subcommand and the helper command "tablelist:: 684 - getTablelistColumn", designed to be used in non-default binding 685 - scripts for the header labels. 686 - 687 -2. Support for interactive cell editing with the aid of the tile 688 - spinbox widget. The demo script "tileWidgets.tcl" now uses this 689 - widget when available. 690 - 691 -3. Support for interactive cell editing with the aid of the new mentry 692 - widget for IPv6 addresses. 693 - 694 -4. Improved the support for Windows Vista and added explicit support 695 - for the "vista" theme. 696 - 697 -5. Updated the support for the themes "plastik" and "keramik"; added 698 - support for the "keramik_alt" theme. 699 - 700 -6. Support for the native "Aqua-blue" background, set for the header 701 - label of the sort column (thanks to Kevin Walzer for his proposal 702 - and valuable contribution). For technical reasons, this feature is 703 - only supported for Mac-Tk versions using Cocoa. 704 - 705 -7. Further improvements in the support for Mac OS X Aqua (thanks to 706 - Daniel Steffen and Kevin Walzer for their valuable feedback). 707 - 708 -8. Improvements in the binding scripts related to interactive cell 709 - editing (thanks to Hadas Porat for discussions on this subject). 710 - 711 -9. The binding for the <Double-Button-1> event in the resize area of a 712 - column header now works as expected for large lists, too. 713 - 714 -10. Eliminated a minor regression related to interactive cell editing, 715 - introduced in the previous Tablelist version (thanks to Kai Morich 716 - for his valuable input). 717 - 718 -11. Fixed a small bug related to interactive cell editing with the aid 719 - of a text widget (thanks to Bryan Oakley for his bug report and 720 - valuable suggestion). 721 - 722 -12. Fixed a long-standing bug related to the "-listvariable" option in 723 - disabled state (thanks to Ralf Fassel for his bug report). 724 - 725 -13. Added a version-related hint to the "How to use it?" section of the 726 - Tablelist Programmer's Guide. 727 - 728 -What was new in Tablelist 4.11? 729 -------------------------------- 730 - 731 -1. Added the "-columntitles" configuration option, which is mainly a 732 - simplified form of the "-columns" option (thanks to Roy Terry for 733 - his proposal). 734 - 735 -2. Added the virtual events <<TablelistColHiddenStateChanged>> and 736 - <<TablelistRowHiddenStateChanged>>, generated after toggling the 737 - hidden state of a column or row, respectively (thanks to Jeff 738 - Godfrey for his proposal). 739 - 740 -3. Besides with <Button-3>, the optimal column width can now be set 741 - with <Double-Button-1> in the resize area of the column's header. 742 - Similarly, the effect of <Shift-Button-3> can also be achieved with 743 - <Shift-Double-Button-1> in the column label's resize area. 744 - 745 -4. Support for Windows Vista (thanks to Jeremy Cowgar for his input). 746 - 747 -5. The recommended package name is now "tablelist" rather than 748 - "Tablelist", for compatibility with the ActiveTcl distribution; the 749 - demo scripts have been changed accordingly. 750 - 751 -6. Made sure that the "-tooltipdelcommand" configuration option won't 752 - affect other widgets (thanks to Jeff Godfrey for drawing my 753 - attention to this issue). 754 - 755 -7. Fixed a long-standing nasty bug related to the "yview" subcommand 756 - (thanks to Nestor Patino for his bug report and very helpful example 757 - script). 758 - 759 -8. Fixed two bugs related to the "-listvariable" configuration option 760 - (again, thanks to Nestor Patino for his valuable input). 761 - 762 -9. Fixed a bug related to the item deletion when using Tcl/Tk 8.5 763 - (thanks to Jos Decoster and Sven Wuytack for their valuable 764 - contribution to finding and fixing this bug). 765 - 766 -10. Fixed a bug related to the "-windowdestroy" cell configuration 767 - option, introduced in Tablelist 4.9 (thanks to Sebastien Barre for 768 - his bug report). 769 - 770 -What was new in Tablelist 4.10? 771 -------------------------------- 772 - 773 -1. Support for individual binding scripts controlling the interactive 774 - cell editing, with the aid of the new "editwintag" subcommand 775 - (thanks to Oscar Fuentes for his valuable input). 776 - 777 -2. Complemented the "attrib" subcommand with the new subcommands 778 - "hasattrib" and "unsetattrib". 779 - 780 -3. Support for column-, row-, and cell-specific attributes, with the 781 - aid of the new subcommands "columnattrib", "hascolumnattrib", 782 - "unsetcolumnattrib", "rowattrib", "hasrowattrib", "unsetrowattrib", 783 - "cellattrib", "hascellattrib", and "unsetcellattrib". 784 - 785 -4. Support for interactive cell editing with the aid of the new mentry 786 - widget of type "DateTime", introduced in version 3.2 of the Mentry 787 - package (thanks to Florian Murr for his proposal). 788 - 789 -5. Made sure that the default bindings are set up immediately when 790 - loading the package, prior to creating any tablelist widget (thanks 791 - to Schelte Bron for his proposal and discussions on this topic). 792 - 793 -6. Re-established the support for tile widgets as edit windows in non- 794 - tile-based tablelist widgets (again, thanks to Schelte Bron for 795 - reporting that this was broken in the last few Tablelist versions). 796 - 797 -7. Adapted the handling of the tile checkbutton as edit window in the 798 - "xpnative" theme to some changes made in tile 0.8 (thanks to Jeff 799 - Godfrey for his bug report). 800 - 801 -8. Guarded against potential widget deletion from within user-defined 802 - binding scripts or "update (idletasks)" (thanks to Schelte Bron and 803 - Jan Kandziora for their bug reports). 804 - 805 -9. Updated the (very rarely needed) distribution file "repair.tcl" to 806 - work with current Tablelist versions (thanks to Robert Stollf for 807 - his bug report). 808 - 809 -10. Corrected the description of the "-height" option in the reference 810 - manual (thanks to Glenn Herteg for his bug report concerning the 811 - case "-height 0"). 812 - 813 -11. Improved the color handling in the "disabled" state (thanks to Rolf 814 - Ade for his bug report and discussions on this topic). 815 - 816 -12. Made the handling of elided text more robust (thanks to Jos Decoster 817 - for his bug report and valuable contribution). 818 - 819 -13. Several further improvements and minor bug fixes (thanks to Albrecht 820 - Mucha for his valuable input). 821 - 822 -What was new in Tablelist 4.9? 823 ------------------------------- 824 - 825 -1. Added the "-wrap" column configuration option, which makes it 826 - possible to display long texts in word-wrapped multi-line rather 827 - than snipped form (thanks to Alexander Schoepe and Anant Adke for 828 - their proposals). Also, added support for interactive cell editing 829 - with a word- or char-wrapped text widget when using Tk 8.5 (thanks 830 - to Juberi Rajib for discussions on this topic). 831 - 832 -2. Support for dynamic-width embedded windows, with the aid of the new 833 - "-stretchwindow" cell configuration option (thanks to Kurt Kurczyk, 834 - Bryan Oakley, and Rasmus Debitsch for their proposals). The demo 835 - script "embeddedWindows.tcl" and its tile-based counterpart now make 836 - use of this option. 837 - 838 -3. New "formatinfo" subcommand, returning information about the cell 839 - whose content is being formatted by a command specified as the value 840 - of the "-formatcommand" column configuration option (thanks to Goran 841 - Ivankovic and Sebastien Barre for their proposals). 842 - 843 -4. Changed the default value of the "-activestyle" configuration option 844 - from "underline" to "frame" and that of the "-setfocus" option from 845 - 0 to 1, making them conform to similar changes in Tk 8.5 related to 846 - the listbox widget. 847 - 848 -5. Improved the appearance of the header labels for the "aqua" theme 849 - (thanks to Torsten Berg for discussing this topic on the Wiki). 850 - 851 -6. Eliminated the potential invocation of the "unknown" command from 852 - within the Tablelist code (thanks to Roger Niva for discussions on 853 - this topic). 854 - 855 -7. When starting the interactive cell editing with the aid of a 856 - combobox widget, the list associated with the latter is only dropped 857 - down if the combobox is read-only (thanks to Bryan Oakley for his 858 - proposal). 859 - 860 -8. The "setThemeDefaults" command no longer throws an error if the 861 - current theme is not explicitly supported by Tablelist. Instead, it 862 - uses the options set by the current theme and falls back to the 863 - "default" one for the rest (thanks to Schelte Bron for his valuable 864 - contribution). 865 - 866 -9. Improved the tablelist widget's appearance when the header labels 867 - are not shown (thanks to Mark Garvey for his input). 868 - 869 -10. Fixed two bugs related to the optimized item insertion (thanks to 870 - Harold Campbell and Bryan Oakley for their bug reports). 871 - 872 -11. Fixed a bug related to the "-showlinenumbers" column configuration 873 - option (thanks to Martin Lemburg for his bug report). 874 - 875 -12. Several further improvements and minor bug fixes. 876 - 877 -What was new in Tablelist 4.8? 878 ------------------------------- 879 - 880 -This release fixes a few nasty bugs related to the optimized item 881 -insertion, introduced in the previous Tablelist version (thanks to 882 -Harold Campbell, Roger Niva, and Joerg Klingseisen for their bug 883 -reports). 884 - 885 -What was new in Tablelist 4.7? 886 ------------------------------- 887 - 888 -1. Significant performance improvements related to the "insert", 889 - "rowconfigure", "sort", "sortbycolumn", and "sortbycolumnlist" 890 - subcommands (thanks to Harold Campbell for his valuable 891 - contribution to speeding up the item insertion). The extent of the 892 - speed-up depends on the configuration options present at column, 893 - row, and cell levels. 894 - 895 -2. Support for cell- and column label-specific balloon help, with the 896 - aid of the new configuration options "-tooltipaddcommand" and 897 - "-tooltipdelcommand". 898 - 899 -3. New subcommands "iselemsnipped" and "istitlesnipped", which make it 900 - very easy to display the full cell texts and column titles as 901 - tooltips for cells and header labels with snipped contents. 902 - 903 -4. New subcommands "configcolumnlist", "configcolumns", 904 - "configrowlist", "configrows", "configcelllist", and "configcells", 905 - which allow you to configure several columns/rows/cells with a 906 - single command invocation (thanks to Harold Campbell, Jeff Godfrey, 907 - and Paul Obermeier for their proposals). 908 - 909 -5. Worked around some performance problems regarding the "switch" 910 - command in Tcl 8.5a6/8.5b1 and ActiveTcl 8.4.14. 911 - 912 -6. Made sure that ActiveState's "style::as" package won't break the 913 - mousewheel bindings (thanks to Michael Schlenker for drawing my 914 - attention to this problem). 915 - 916 -7. Improved the focus handling when resizing a column interactively 917 - (thanks to Jorge Enderr for his bug report). 918 - 919 -8. Corrected a typo in the adaptation of vertical scrolling to the 920 - text widget changes made in Tk 8.5 (thanks to Julian M Noble for 921 - his posting on the Wiki related to this subject). 922 - 923 -9. Fixed a bug related to hidden rows when having "-selecttype cell", 924 - introduced in Tablelist version 4.3 (thanks to Harold Campbell for 925 - his bug report and discussions on this subject). 926 - 927 -10. Fixed a bug in the "cellconfigure" subcommand, introduced in the 928 - previous Tablelist release (thanks to Roy Terry for reporting this 929 - problem on the Wiki). 930 - 931 -11. Fixed a bug in the "-changesnipside" option (thanks to Kai Morich 932 - for his bug report). 933 - 934 -12. Numerous further improvements in the code and documentation. 935 - 936 -What was new in Tablelist 4.6? 937 ------------------------------- 938 - 939 -1. Tablelist_tile now supports tile 0.8 and Tk 8.5a6/8.5b1 (where tile 940 - is integrated in the core). The new commands "tablelist::setTheme", 941 - "tablelist::getCurrentTheme", and "tablelist::getThemes" enable you 942 - to set and get the current theme and to query the available ones, 943 - without having to worry about the incompatibilities between the 944 - various tile versions. 945 - 946 -2. New column configuration option "-changesnipside", which allows you 947 - to override the alignment-specific default snip side (thanks to 948 - Georgios Petasis for his proposal). 949 - 950 -3. New "columnwidth" subcommand, with the options "-requested", 951 - "-stretched", and "-total" (thanks to Matthew Callaghan, Richard 952 - Finstad, Lieven Forrez, and Tom Roeder for their proposals). 953 - 954 -4. Support for the new virtual event <<TablelistColumnResized>>, 955 - generated after resizing a column interactively (thanks to Kurt 956 - Kurczyk for his proposal). 957 - 958 -5. Visual improvement: Within an active row, the gap to the left or 959 - right of an embedded image or window no longer appears underlined 960 - (when the "-activestyle" option has its default value "underline"). 961 - 962 -6. Embedded images and windows are no longer hidden during interactive 963 - cell editing (except the editing with the aid of a Tk or tile 964 - checkbutton widget). 965 - 966 -7. Significantly improved the redraw and stretching behavior when 967 - resizing a column interactively. 968 - 969 -8. Eliminated some annoying visual effects caused by hidden columns 970 - when displaying the items of an already visible tablelist widget 971 - (thanks to Rolf Ade for discussions on this topic). 972 - 973 -9. Adapted the implementation of vertical scrolling to the text widget 974 - changes made in Tk 8.5 (thanks to Julian M Noble for his posting on 975 - the Wiki related to this subject). 976 - 977 -10. Fixed a bug related to hidden rows, introduced in Tablelist version 978 - 4.3 (thanks to Matthew Callaghan for his bug report). 979 - 980 -11. Eliminated the possible endless loop caused by some option database 981 - settings in the "seecell" subcommand (thanks to Erik Allaert and 982 - Mauro Comin for reporting this bug). 983 - 984 -12. Added a detailed performance-related hint to the description of the 985 - "-listvariable" configuration option. 986 - 987 -13. Numerous further improvements and minor bug fixes. 988 - 989 -What was new in Tablelist 4.5? 990 ------------------------------- 991 - 992 -1. Static-width columns are now displayed much faster than in earlier 993 - Tablelist releases. 994 - 995 -2. Quite significantly reduced the performance penalty imposed by 996 - various column, row, and cell configuration options when sorting, 997 - redisplaying, moving, or deleting tablelist items. 998 - 999 -3. Embedded images are now handled much more efficiently and are 1000 - displayed much faster than in earlier Tablelist versions. 1001 - 1002 -4. New column configuration option "-showlinenumbers" (thanks to Rolf 1003 - Schroedter and Sean Xu for their proposals and to Kathrin Klaes for 1004 - testing the implementation). 1005 - 1006 -5. Support for tile-based multi-entry widgets (introduced in Mentry 1007 - 3.0) used as edit windows. 1008 - 1009 -6. Significantly improved the handling of the <<ThemeChanged>> virtual 1010 - event. 1011 - 1012 -7. Defined more reasonable windowing system- and theme-specific default 1013 - values for the "-arrowdisabledcolor" option. 1014 - 1015 -8. Improved and simplified the package loading mechanism (thanks to 1016 - Andreas Kupries for his valuable contribution). 1017 - 1018 -9. Eliminated the "togglevisibility" subcommand, which was deprecated 1019 - in the previous Tablelist version in favor of "togglecolumnhide". 1020 - 1021 -10. Fixed a bug in the implementation of the "deletecolumns" subcommand, 1022 - introduced in the previous Tablelist release (thanks to Kai Morich, 1023 - Kurt Kurczyk, and Dave Leslie for their bug reports). 1024 - 1025 -11. Fixed two binding-related bugs (thanks to Mark Garvey and Kurt 1026 - Kurczyk for their bug reports). 1027 - 1028 -12. Fixed a bug related to the handling of the "tileqt" theme (thanks to 1029 - Andres Garcia for his bug report). 1030 - 1031 -13. Fixed a small but annoying bug related to the "-maxwidth" column 1032 - configuration option, introduced in the previous Tablelist version. 1033 - 1034 -14. Numerous further improvements and minor bug fixes (thanks to 1035 - Patrick Fradin and Georgios Petasis for their valuable feedback). 1036 - 1037 -What was new in Tablelist 4.4? 1038 ------------------------------- 1039 - 1040 -1. New row configuration option "-hide" (thanks to Jeff Godfrey, 1041 - Patrick Fradin. Hemang Lavana, and Martyn Smith for their 1042 - proposals, and especially to Harold Campbell for providing the 1043 - initial implementation and testing the final one.) For performance 1044 - reasons this option is implemented by using elided text in the 1045 - underlying text widget, and therefore it is not supported for Tk 1046 - versions earlier than 8.3. 1047 - 1048 -2. New subcommand "togglerowhide" for hiding/unhiding several rows at 1049 - a time (not supported for Tk versions earlier than 8.3). 1050 - 1051 -3. Renamed the "togglevisibility" subcommand to "togglecolumnhide". 1052 - The old name is still supported, but will be eliminated in the next 1053 - Tablelist release. 1054 - 1055 -4. New command "tablelist::setThemeDefaults", which can be used to 1056 - make sure that classical Tk widgets, e.g., text, will have a theme- 1057 - specific appearance, just like the tile widgets. The tile-based 1058 - demo scripts now make use of this command. 1059 - 1060 -5. When using the "tileqt" theme, the version number of TileQt must be 1061 - 0.3 or higher (thanks to Georgios Petasis for providing the new 1062 - "tileqt" features used in this Tablelist release). 1063 - 1064 -6. For Tk 8.3 or later, hidden columns are now handled by using elided 1065 - text, which results in very significant performance improvements 1066 - (thanks to Harold Campbell for his valuable contribution). 1067 - 1068 -7. Improved the handling of the "-listvariable" option in connection 1069 - with snit widgetadaptors (thanks to Rolf Ade for his bug-fix). 1070 - 1071 -8. Corrected a typo in the implementation of the "move" subcommand, 1072 - introduced in the previous release (thanks to Jerome Siot for his 1073 - bug report). 1074 - 1075 -9. Improved the handling of the virtual event <<ThemeChanged>> (thanks 1076 - to Wofgang Grosser for his bug report). 1077 - 1078 -10. Fixed a long-standing bug related to hidden columns (thanks to Dave 1079 - Leslie for his bug report). 1080 - 1081 -11. Worked around a peculiarity of the "place" command on Windows, 1082 - which caused refresh problems in column labels with images (thanks 1083 - to Sebastien Barre for his bug report). 1084 - 1085 -12. Numerous further improvements and minor bug fixes. 1086 - 1087 -What was new in Tablelist 4.3? 1088 ------------------------------- 1089 - 1090 -1. Support for multi-line cells: Newline characters now force line 1091 - breaks when displaying the items (thanks to Sebastien Barre, 1092 - Tillmann Basien, Cameron Laird, Kai Morich, and Vaclav Snajdr for 1093 - their proposals). In addition, interactive cell editing can now 1094 - take place with the aid of a text widget, too (this has caused a few 1095 - minor changes in the default key bindings for the edit window). 1096 - 1097 -2. Support for multi-column sorting with the aid of the new subcommands 1098 - "sortbycolumnlist", "sortcolumnlist", and "sortorderlist", as well 1099 - as of the new command "tablelist::addToSortColumns". The latter is 1100 - designed to be specified as the value of the new widget and column 1101 - configuration option "-labelcommand2", whose value is invoked on 1102 - <Shift-Button-1> events. Multi-column sorting is visualized by 1103 - means of multiple sort arrows, which are displayed together with the 1104 - corresponding sort ranks. (Thanks to Harold Campbell for proposing 1105 - most of these features, providing the initial implementation, and 1106 - testing the final one.) 1107 - 1108 -3. New configuration option "-setfocus", specifying whether mouse 1109 - button 1 should set the focus to the tablelist's body (thanks to 1110 - Tillmann Basien for discussions on this topic). 1111 - 1112 -4. Replaced the contents of the directory "images" with a script file 1113 - containing procedures that create the bitmap images from inline data 1114 - (thanks to Mats Bengtsson, Patrick Fradin, and Kai Morich for their 1115 - proposals). 1116 - 1117 -5. Fixed a bug related to the use of a tile entry within a non-tile- 1118 - based tablelist widget on Windows XP (thanks to Schelte Bron for his 1119 - bug report). 1120 - 1121 -6. The handling of <Command-Key> events during interactive cell editing 1122 - is now explicitly restricted to Mac OS Classic and Mac OS X Aqua, 1123 - because, strangely enough, on Windows these events are generated by 1124 - simple keypresses if Num Lock is active. 1125 - 1126 -7. Numerous further code improvements, minor bug-fixes, and support for 1127 - several recent changes in tile. 1128 - 1129 -8. Cleaned up the documentation, to make sure that the HTML files 1130 - generated for the ActiveTcl distribution with the tool HTML Tidy 1131 - will be syntactically identical to the original ones. 1132 - 1133 -What was new in Tablelist 4.2? 1134 ------------------------------- 1135 - 1136 -1. The resize area of the header labels now consists of a few pixels 1137 - on both sides of the right edge (thanks to Bryan Oakley for 1138 - suggesting this improvement). 1139 - 1140 -2. Made sure that the header labels have the right appearance in the 1141 - "aqua" theme when using tile version 0.6.4 or later (thanks to 1142 - Bryan Oakley for his bug report). 1143 - 1144 -3. Several further improvements related to Mac OS X Aqua (for example, 1145 - support for the "Command" key during keyboard navigation between 1146 - the editable cells). 1147 - 1148 -4. Fixed a very long-standing bug in the "containing" subcommand 1149 - (thanks to Mats Bengtsson, Schelte Bron, and Mark Garvey for their 1150 - bug reports). 1151 - 1152 -5. Fixed a bug related to the "xpnative" theme, introduced in the 1153 - previous release (thanks to Mark Garvey, Jeff Godfrey, and Uwe 1154 - Koloska for their bug reports). 1155 - 1156 -6. Fixed another very long-standing bug, related to insertion and 1157 - deletion of columns having images in their labels (thanks to 1158 - Sebastien Barre for his bug report). 1159 - 1160 -7. Fixed an old bug related to embedding images or windows into hidden 1161 - cells (again, thanks to Sebastien Barre for reporting this bug). 1162 - 1163 -8. The demo scripts now work independently of their location (this 1164 - small improvement reflects the fact that Tablelist is now included 1165 - in tklib, where the examples are in a location different from 1166 - "$tablelist::library/demos"). 1167 - 1168 -9. Adapted two tile-based demo scripts to the recently released tile 1169 - version 0.7. 1170 - 1171 -10. Several further improvements in the code and documentation (thanks 1172 - to Patrick Fradin for his valuable contribution). 1173 - 1174 -What was new in Tablelist 4.1? 1175 ------------------------------- 1176 - 1177 -1. Significantly extended the tile support in the Tablelist_tile 1178 - package: Header labels now look and behave like the column 1179 - headings of treeview widgets, and over a dozen configuration 1180 - options have theme-specific default values (thanks to Paul 1181 - Obermeier for his excellent "poImgview" application, which helped 1182 - me a lot during this work, as well as to Georgios Petasis for his 1183 - Qt-related hints). 1184 - 1185 -2. Header labels containing the mouse cursor are now set into active 1186 - state. Their appearance is controlled in the Tablelist package by 1187 - the new configuration options "-labelactivebackground" and 1188 - "-labelactiveforeground", while the Tablelist_tile package uses 1189 - theme-specific background and foreground colors for the active and 1190 - pressed states of the labels. 1191 - 1192 -3. New configuration option "-arrowstyle", specifying the flat or 1193 - sunken relief and the dimensions of the arrow indicating the 1194 - sorting order. This option has windowing system- and theme- 1195 - specific default values. 1196 - 1197 -4. New configuration option "-protecttitlecolumns", used to protect 1198 - the title column boundary from being crossed when moving a column 1199 - interactively (thanks to Schelte Bron for his proposal). 1200 - 1201 -5. New configuration option "-spacing", specifying additional space to 1202 - provide above and below each tablelist row (thanks to Sebastien 1203 - Barre for his proposal). 1204 - 1205 -6. New column configuration option "-stretchable", complementing the 1206 - global "-stretch" option (thanks to Sebastien Barre for his 1207 - proposal). 1208 - 1209 -7. New row configuration option "-name", whose value can also be used 1210 - as a row index and as the first component of a cell index (thanks 1211 - to John Kozura for his proposal). 1212 - 1213 -8. New cell configuration option "-windowdestroy", specifying a script 1214 - to be invoked when a window embedded into the cell is destroyed 1215 - (thanks to Sebastien Barre for his proposal). 1216 - 1217 -9. New "imagelabelpath" subcommand (thanks to Schelte Bron for his 1218 - proposal). 1219 - 1220 -10. Keyboard navigation during interactive cell editing now works on 1221 - Mac OS X Aqua, too. 1222 - 1223 -11. Restored the support for Tcl/Tk versions earlier than 8.3, by 1224 - cleaning up the handling of the "-titlecolumns" option (thanks to 1225 - Andreas Flach and Brian O'Hagan for their bug reports). 1226 - 1227 -12. Restored the support for Tcl/Tk versions earlier than 8.0.4, which 1228 - has been broken since release 3.5, due to the use of the 1229 - <MouseWheel> event, introduced in Tk 8.0.4 (thanks to Brian O'Hagan 1230 - for his valuable contribution). 1231 - 1232 -13. Worked around a peculiarity of the text widget's "dump -window" 1233 - command (thanks to Greg Reynolds for his bug-fix). 1234 - 1235 -14. Fixed a binding-related bug in "extended" selection mode (thanks to 1236 - David Mattinson for his bug-fix). 1237 - 1238 -15. Numerous further improvements and minor bug fixes (thanks to 1239 - Schelte Bron, Patrick Fradin, Silas Justiniano, and Uwe Koloska for 1240 - their bug reports and valuable contributions). 1241 - 1242 -What was new in Tablelist 4.0? 1243 ------------------------------- 1244 - 1245 -1. Support for the tile entry, combobox, and checkbutton widgets for 1246 - interactive cell editing (thanks to Miguel Bagnon, Andy Black, 1247 - Adrian Chan, and Mark Garvey for their proposals and to Mats 1248 - Bengtsson and Kevin Walzer for their support on the Macintosh). 1249 - See the new reference page "tablelistTile.html" for details. 1250 - 1251 -2. Support for tile-compatibility: By just specifying "package 1252 - require Tablelist_tile" instead of "package require Tablelist", the 1253 - tablelist widgets will have a modern theme-specific appearance 1254 - (again, thanks to the above-mentioned Tablelist users for their 1255 - suggestions and assistance). See the "How to use it?" and "More on 1256 - Tablelist_tile" sections of the tutorial "tablelist.html" for 1257 - details. 1258 - 1259 -3. New demo script "tileWidgets.tcl", illustrating the use of tile 1260 - widgets for interactive cell editing and of the Tablelist_tile 1261 - package. All the other demo scripts are now provided in both a 1262 - traditional and a tile-based version. See the "Tile-based demo 1263 - scripts" section of the tutorial "tablelist.html" for an example 1264 - and some screenshots. 1265 - 1266 -4. The Tk checkbutton used for interactive cell editing is now a 1267 - platform-specific checkbutton widget on Windows and the Macintosh 1268 - (thanks to Mats Bengtsson for his help related to the Macintosh 1269 - platform). 1270 - 1271 -5. The "-editwindow" option is now available at cell level, too 1272 - (thanks to Kenneth Green for his proposal). 1273 - 1274 -6. New subcommand "togglevisibility" for hiding/unhiding several 1275 - columns at a time (thanks to Stefan Finzel and Kai Morich for their 1276 - proposals). 1277 - 1278 -7. Support for the new virtual event <<TablelistSelectionLost>>, 1279 - generated when a tablelist widget having "-exportselection 1" loses 1280 - the selection (thanks to Aldo Buratti for his proposal). 1281 - 1282 -8. After sorting the items, the "most important" row is automatically 1283 - brought into view (thanks to Kai Morich for his valuable input). 1284 - 1285 -9. Worked around a peculiarity of Tk for Windows, related to mouse 1286 - events (thanks to Tore Morkemo and Mike Collins for their bug 1287 - reports). 1288 - 1289 -10. Worked around a problem related to the visibility of the up/down- 1290 - arrow on Mac OS X Aqua (thanks to Kevin Walzer for his bug report). 1291 - 1292 -11. Fixed a bug in the "seecell" subcommand, introduced in Tablelist 1293 - version 3.7 (thanks to Stefan Finzel for his bug report). 1294 - 1295 -12. Fixed a bug in the "rowconfigure" subcommand, introduced in the 1296 - previous Tablelist release (thanks to Tore Morkemo for his bug 1297 - report). 1298 - 1299 -13. Eliminated the memory leak caused by incomplete cleanup on deleting 1300 - rows with embedded windows (thanks to David Cockerell for his bug 1301 - report). 1302 - 1303 -14. Fixed a small timing-related bug in the "editcell" subcommand 1304 - (thanks to Kenneth Green for his bug report). 1305 - 1306 -15. Numerous further improvements and minor bug fixes (thanks to Greg 1307 - Reynolds for his valuable input). 1308 - 1309 -What was new in Tablelist 3.8? 1310 ------------------------------- 1311 - 1312 -1. New configuration option "-forceeditendcommand", controlling the 1313 - invocation of the script corresponding to the value of the 1314 - "-editendcommand" option (thanks to Nestor Patino for his proposal). 1315 - 1316 -2. New subcommands "getcells" and "windowpath" (thanks to Jeff Godfrey 1317 - and Mike Collins for their proposals). 1318 - 1319 -3. Support for the new virtual event <<TablelistCellRestored>>, 1320 - generated by the "cancelediting" subcommand. 1321 - 1322 -4. Significantly improved the performance of the "delete", 1323 - "deletecolumns", and "movecolumn" subcommands for tablelist widgets 1324 - having color or font options set at column, row, or cell level 1325 - (thanks to Michael Bahr for his valuable feedback). 1326 - 1327 -5. Improved the autoscrolling with the left mouse button in both the 1328 - body and the header of a tablelist widget having title columns. 1329 - 1330 -6. Fixed a bug related to the "-titlecolumns" option, introduced in the 1331 - previous Tablelist release (thanks to Alexander Schoepe for his bug 1332 - report). 1333 - 1334 -7. Fixed a typo in the implementation of the "seecell" subcommand, 1335 - introduced in the previous Tablelist release (thanks to Patrick 1336 - Fradin for his bug report). 1337 - 1338 -8. Improved the demo script "embeddedWindows.tcl" (thanks to Patrick 1339 - Fradin for his valuable input). 1340 - 1341 -9. Several further improvements and minor bug fixes. 1342 - 1343 -What was new in Tablelist 3.7? 1344 ------------------------------- 1345 - 1346 -1. New configuration option "-titlecolumns", specifying the number of 1347 - the non-scrollable columns at the left edge of the window (thanks to 1348 - Goran Ivankovic, Paul Kienzle, Hemang Lavana, and Takeshi Sakamoto 1349 - for their proposals). For technical reasons (the use of the 1350 - "-elide" option for a text widget tag), this option is not supported 1351 - for Tk versions earlier than 8.3. 1352 - 1353 -2. Extended the "separatorpath" and "separators" subcommands, to 1354 - support the new special separator, which is displayed to mark the 1355 - end of the title columns, independently of the value of the 1356 - "-showseparators" option. 1357 - 1358 -3. The "-stripebackground" and "-stripeforeground" options now have a 1359 - higher priority than the "-background" and "-foreground" column 1360 - configuration options, respectively (see the demo script 1361 - "styles.tcl", which has been extended to illustrate this change). 1362 - 1363 -4. Improved the handling of embedded images with transparent 1364 - background, complementing the changes made in the previous Tablelist 1365 - release (thanks to Kai Morich for his valuable contribution). 1366 - 1367 -5. Improved the implementation of the "seecell" subcommand for centered 1368 - and right-aligned columns. 1369 - 1370 -6. Fixed two bugs related to the "rowconfigure" subcommand, introduced 1371 - in Tablelist version 3.5 (thanks to Ted Branscomb and Roger Niva for 1372 - their bug reports). 1373 - 1374 -7. Fixed an old bug related to the "movecolumn" subcommand. 1375 - 1376 -8. Several further improvements and minor bug fixes. 1377 - 1378 -What was new in Tablelist 3.6? 1379 ------------------------------- 1380 - 1381 -1. Support for embedded windows, with the aid of the new cell 1382 - configuration option "-window" (thanks to Wolf Grossi, Glenn 1383 - Herteg, Takeshi Sakamoto, and Keesang Song for proposing this 1384 - option). 1385 - 1386 -2. New demo script "embeddedWindows.tcl" illustrating the use of 1387 - embedded windows in tablelist widgets; this is discussed in a new 1388 - section of the tutorial "tablelist.html". 1389 - 1390 -3. Significantly improved and optimized the handling of embedded 1391 - images. 1392 - 1393 -4. Simplified the support for user-defined binding scripts with the 1394 - aid of the new commands "tablelist::getTablelistPath" and 1395 - "tablelist::convEventFields", as well as of a new binding tag whose 1396 - name is returned by the new "bodytag" subcommand (which is now used 1397 - in the demo script "browse.tcl"). 1398 - 1399 -5. Support for the new virtual events <<TablelistRowMoved>>, 1400 - <<TablelistColumnMoved>>, <<TablelistColumnSorted>> and 1401 - <<TablelistCellUpdated>> (thanks to John Vidolich for his 1402 - proposal). In addition, the new virtual event <<TablelistSelect>> 1403 - can now be used instead of <<ListboxSelect>> (which is supported 1404 - for compatibility reasons). 1405 - 1406 -6. New subcommand "itemlistvar", for accessing the tablelist widget's 1407 - internal list (thanks to Patrick Fradin for his valuable input). 1408 - 1409 -7. Fixed a bug related to the "-listvariable" option, introduced in 1410 - the previous Tablelist release (thanks to Torsten Reincke for his 1411 - bug report). 1412 - 1413 -8. Fixed two bugs related to the "cellselection" subcommand (thanks to 1414 - John Vidolich for his bug report). 1415 - 1416 -9. Fixed a few typos and minor bugs in the default binding scripts 1417 - (thanks to Patrick Fradin, Tore Morkemo, and Torsten Reincke for 1418 - their bug reports). 1419 - 1420 -10. Numerous further improvements and minor bug fixes. 1421 - 1422 -What was new in Tablelist 3.5? 1423 ------------------------------- 1424 - 1425 -1. New configuration option "-selecttype" with the values "row" and 1426 - "cell", and new binding scripts supporting these two selection 1427 - types (thanks to Kevin Partin for his proposal and to Dietmar 1428 - Mueller for his valuable contribution). 1429 - 1430 -2. New subcommands "activatecell", "cellselection", and 1431 - "curcellselection", used in the binding scripts mentioned above. 1432 - 1433 -3. The words "active" and "anchor" are now recognized as valid column 1434 - and cell indices, too. 1435 - 1436 -4. New configuration options "-movablerows" and "-movecursor", and new 1437 - mouse bindings for moving a row interactively (thanks to Dan Rogahn 1438 - for his valuable contribution). 1439 - 1440 -5. The key sequences used for navigation between the editable cells 1441 - now also move the active item or element and change the 1442 - (cell)selection and the (cell)selection anchor in the body of the 1443 - tablelist widget. 1444 - 1445 -6. Improved the handling and appearance of the checkbutton widget when 1446 - used as edit window (thanks to Kevin Partin for reporting a problem 1447 - experienced when the tablelist is embedded into an Iwidgets 1448 - dialogshell). 1449 - 1450 -7. The "-listvariable" option now supports variable names returned by 1451 - the "itcl::scope" command, too (thanks to Nicolae Mihalache for his 1452 - bug report). 1453 - 1454 -8. Fixed a very long-standing bug related to horizontal scrolling when 1455 - using a non-default font (thanks to Brand Hilton for his bug report 1456 - and fix). 1457 - 1458 -9. Fixed another very long-standing bug, related to list variables 1459 - (thanks to Dr. Detlef Groth and John R. Smith for their bug 1460 - reports). 1461 - 1462 -10. Numerous further improvements and minor bug fixes (thanks to 1463 - Patrick Fradin for his valuable input). 1464 - 1465 -What was new in Tablelist 3.4? 1466 ------------------------------- 1467 - 1468 -1. New column configuration option "-editwindow", specifying the 1469 - widget type used for interactive cell editing in the respective 1470 - column (thanks to Damon Courtney, Patrick Fradin, and Keesang Song 1471 - for their proposals and to Mats Bengtsson and Benny Riefenstein for 1472 - their help related to the Macintosh platform). The edit window may 1473 - be a Tk core entry, spinbox, or checkbutton, or one of the 16 1474 - supported widgets from the packages BWidget, Iwidgets, combobox (by 1475 - Bryan Oakley), and Mentry. 1476 - 1477 -2. New subcommand "editwinpath". 1478 - 1479 -3. Three new demo scripts illustrating the use of the "-editwindow" 1480 - option; these are discussed in a new section of the tutorial 1481 - "tablelist.html". 1482 - 1483 -4. New column configuration option "-maxwidth" (thanks to Tore Morkemo 1484 - for his proposal). 1485 - 1486 -5. The <Shift-Button-3> event in a column label now restores the 1487 - column's last static width (thanks to Dietmar Mueller for his 1488 - valuable input). 1489 - 1490 -6. Changing a tablelist's font now updates the column widths 1491 - accordingly. 1492 - 1493 -7. Improved the handling of the "-setgrid" option. 1494 - 1495 -8. Improved the error handling related to the option database in the 1496 - general mega-widget utility module "mwutil.tcl". 1497 - 1498 -9. Fixed a minor bug in the "containingcolumn" subcommand (thanks to 1499 - David Mattinson for his bug report). 1500 - 1501 -10. Restored the support for Tcl/Tk versions earlier than 8.0.4, which 1502 - has been broken since release 3.0, due to the use of the 1503 - <MouseWheel> event, introduced in Tk 8.0.4. 1504 - 1505 -11. Further code improvements (thanks to Patrick Fradin for his 1506 - valuable input). 1507 - 1508 -12. Many improvements in the documentation, including a new Quick 1509 - Reference section (thanks to Dietmar Mueller for his valuable 1510 - contribution). 1511 - 1512 -What was new in Tablelist 3.3? 1513 ------------------------------- 1514 - 1515 -1. New column configuration option "-text" (thanks to Paul Kienzle for 1516 - his proposal). 1517 - 1518 -2. New subcommands "containing", "containingcolumn", "containingcell", 1519 - and "fillcolumn". 1520 - 1521 -3. New subcommands "deletecolumns", "insertcolumns", and 1522 - "insertcolumnlist" (thanks to Kevin Partin and Paul Kienzle for 1523 - their proposals). 1524 - 1525 -4. Renamed the subcommands "getcolumn" and "getkey" to "getcolumns" and 1526 - "getkeys", respectively. (This won't break any existing scripts, 1527 - because the old command names are abbreviations of the new ones.) 1528 - 1529 -5. Restored the support for Tcl/Tk versions earlier than 8.4, which was 1530 - broken in Tablelist 3.1 and 3.2, due to the use of the improved 1531 - syntax of the "place configure" command, introduced in Tk 8.4 1532 - (thanks to David Mattinson, Kurt Braganza, and Alexander Baath for 1533 - reporting this problem). 1534 - 1535 -6. Fixed a bug in the "editcell" subcommand, introduced in Tablelist 1536 - 3.1 (thanks to Damon Courtney for his bug report). 1537 - 1538 -7. Improved the demo script "config.tcl" (thanks to Mats Bengtsson for 1539 - his input). 1540 - 1541 -8. Restructured the code by moving several procedures from the 1542 - distribution file "tablelistWidget.tcl" into smaller, more 1543 - manageable modules. 1544 - 1545 -9. Numerous further improvements and minor bug fixes. 1546 - 1547 -What was new in Tablelist 3.2? 1548 ------------------------------- 1549 - 1550 -1. The key associated with a tablelist item can now be used as a row 1551 - index and as the first component of a cell index of the form 1552 - "row,col". 1553 - 1554 -2. The "delete", "get", "getcolumn", "getkey", "selection clear", and 1555 - "selection set" subcommands now also accept a list of indices as 1556 - single argument (thanks to Damon Courtney and Erik Leunissen for 1557 - their proposals). 1558 - 1559 -3. Made the interactive "movecolumn" operation more intuitive and 1560 - compatible with the behavior exhibited by similar actions in popular 1561 - applications on various platforms (thanks to Paul Kienzle for his 1562 - suggestion). For example, the target position of the column being 1563 - moved is now indicated by a temporary gap displayed in the 1564 - tablelist's header. 1565 - 1566 -4. New configuration option "-targetcolor", used to set the color of 1567 - the gap mentioned above. 1568 - 1569 -5. Fixed a bug related to the <MouseWheel> event, caused by a missing 1570 - close-bracket in the last release (thanks to Patrick Fradin for his 1571 - bug report). 1572 - 1573 -6. Fixed a bug that raised an error in the "movecolumn" command for an 1574 - empty tablelist widget (thanks to Paul Kienzle for his bug report). 1575 - 1576 -7. The workaround in the "xview" and "yview" subcommands for a Tk bug 1577 - under Mac OS X Aqua is now only activated for that windowing system, 1578 - since (as reported by Patrick Fradin) it caused problems on some 1579 - other systems. 1580 - 1581 -8. Further minor code improvements. 1582 - 1583 -What was new in Tablelist 3.1? 1584 ------------------------------- 1585 - 1586 -1. New configuration options "-movablecolumns" and 1587 - "-movecolumncursor". 1588 - 1589 -2. New column configuration option "-name", whose value can also be 1590 - used as a column index and as the second component of a cell index 1591 - of the form "row,col". 1592 - 1593 -3. New subcommands "move", "movecolumn", "getcolumn", "getkey", and 1594 - "finishediting" (thanks to Damon Courtney, Daniel Fehrenbach, Jeff 1595 - Godfrey, and Kevin Partin for their proposals). 1596 - 1597 -4. Extended the scope of the "cancelediting" subcommand. 1598 - 1599 -5. New mouse bindings for moving a column interactively. 1600 - 1601 -6. The autoscrolling, as described in the "DEFAULT BINDINGS" section 1602 - of the "listbox" manual entry, is now implemented for the header of 1603 - a tablelist widget, too. 1604 - 1605 -7. The interactive cell editing is now finished by any mouse click in 1606 - the tablelist's body, outside the cell just being edited (thanks to 1607 - Patrick Fradin and Jeff Godfrey for this suggestion). 1608 - 1609 -8. The value returned by the "selection includes" command no longer 1610 - depends on the tablelist's state. 1611 - 1612 -9. Worked around a bug in Tk 8.4.0 and 8.4.1 related to the "selection 1613 - handle" command, which caused crashes under KDE 3.0 (thanks to 1614 - Andres Garcia for reporting this and to Joe English for suggesting 1615 - the workaround and fixing the bug in Tk 8.4.2). 1616 - 1617 -10. Improved the support of Mac OS X Aqua and Mac OS Classic (thanks to 1618 - Mats Bengtsson, Raymond Calande, Techin Alex Kang, Bernhard 1619 - Spinnler, and especially to Benny Riefenstein for their valuable 1620 - contributions). 1621 - 1622 -11. Fixed a bug related to the invocation of the "cellconfigure" 1623 - subcommand from within a pre-edit callback (thanks to Dr. Johannes- 1624 - Heinrich Vogeler for his bug report). 1625 - 1626 -12. Several performance improvements (thanks to Patrick Fradin for his 1627 - valuable suggestions). 1628 - 1629 -13. Improved the platform-specific stuff in the demo scripts 1630 - "config.tcl" and "browse.tcl". 1631 - 1632 -14. Numerous further improvements in the code and documentation. 1633 - 1634 -What was new in Tablelist 3.0? 1635 ------------------------------- 1636 - 1637 -The main new feature provided by this release is the support for 1638 -interactive cell editing (thanks to Juri Shimon, Dr. Johannes-Heinrich 1639 -Vogeler, and Jeff Godfrey for their proposal). The first three items 1640 -below are related to this subject: 1641 - 1642 -1. New configuration options "-editstartcommand" and "-editendcommand". 1643 - 1644 -2. New column and cell configuration option "-editable". 1645 - 1646 -3. New subcommands "editcell", "entrypath", "cancelediting", and 1647 - "rejectinput". 1648 - 1649 -Further changes: 1650 - 1651 -4. New subcommands "seecolumn" and "seecell". 1652 - 1653 -5. Tabulator and newline characters are now retained in the internal 1654 - list, displayed as "\t" and "\n", and supported by interactive cell 1655 - editing (thanks to Jacek Jenrysik for his query concerning multi- 1656 - line items). 1657 - 1658 -6. The redisplay and sorting of tablelist items have become 1659 - dramatically faster (thanks to Matt Becker for his input that 1660 - determined me to optimize these operations, and also for his 1661 - testing). 1662 - 1663 -7. Further performance improvements (thanks to Patrick Fradin for his 1664 - valuable contribution). 1665 - 1666 -8. The option values displayed by the demo script "config.tcl" can now 1667 - be edited interactively. 1668 - 1669 -9. Minor improvements in the code and documentation. 1670 - 1671 -What was new in Tablelist 2.8? 1672 ------------------------------- 1673 - 1674 -1. The trailing or leading ellipsis ("...") used when displaying the 1675 - elements that don't fit into their cells can now be replaced with an 1676 - arbitrary string specified with the aid of the new "-snipstring" 1677 - configuration option (thanks to Tore Morkemo for his proposal). 1678 - 1679 -2. New value "none" for the "-activestyle" configuration option. 1680 - 1681 -3. When exporting the selection, the elements of the hidden columns are 1682 - now skipped and the contents of the visible cells are transformed 1683 - according to the value of the "-formatcommand" option for the 1684 - corresponding columns. 1685 - 1686 -4. Improved and simplified the focus control (thanks to Juri Shimon and 1687 - Gopal Reddy for their bug reports). 1688 - 1689 -5. Further minor code improvements. 1690 - 1691 -What was new in Tablelist 2.7? 1692 ------------------------------- 1693 - 1694 -1. Increased the speed of the "insert" and "insertlist" subcommands as 1695 - well as that of item insertions with the aid of the "-listvariable" 1696 - option by a factor of about 1.3. The "insert" subcommand is now 1697 - about 2.3 times faster than in version 2.4. Compared to version 1698 - 2.4, item insertion with the aid of the "-listvariable" option has 1699 - become more than 10 times faster. 1700 - 1701 -2. The number of pixels by which a column is stretched is now 1702 - proportional to its width in pixels. Based on this change, 1703 - significantly improved the stretching behavior after an interactive 1704 - column resize operation (thanks to Mats Bengtsson for his valuable 1705 - suggestions). 1706 - 1707 -3. Fixed a bug in the "-(label)font" and "-labelborderwidth" 1708 - configuration options, introduced in version 2.5 (thanks to Bastien 1709 - Chevreux for his bug report). 1710 - 1711 -4. Fixed a bug in the "columncget", "rowcget", and "cellcget" 1712 - subcommands, introduced in version 2.3 (again, thanks to Bastien 1713 - Chevreux for reporting this bug). 1714 - 1715 -5. Fixed a bug in the binding scripts for the binding tag 1716 - "TablelistBody" (thanks to Miguel Bagnon for his bug report). 1717 - 1718 -6. Applied a patch proposed by Jeff Adamczak that works around a bug in 1719 - the "lsort" command, present in Tcl versions 8.0 - 8.3.2. 1720 - 1721 -7. Applied a patch proposed (in a slightly different form) by Mats 1722 - Bengtsson that works around a bug in the "info script" command on 1723 - the Macintosh. 1724 - 1725 -8. Further minor code improvements. 1726 - 1727 -What was new in Tablelist 2.6? 1728 ------------------------------- 1729 - 1730 -The only change in this version is a bug-fix eliminating a rather nasty 1731 -bug in the "insert" and "insertlist" subcommands, introduced in the 1732 -previous release. Thanks to Mats Bengtsson for his bug report and to 1733 -Jeffrey Hobbs for suggesting me to bump the version number to 2.6. 1734 - 1735 -What was new in Tablelist 2.5? 1736 ------------------------------- 1737 - 1738 -1. Increased the speed of the "insert" subcommand by a factor of about 1739 - 1.8 and that of item insertions with the aid of the "-listvariable" 1740 - option by a factor of about 8. (These figures are based on speed 1741 - measurements made with two tablelist widgets: one having 1000 rows 1742 - and 10 columns and another one with 5000 rows and 20 columns.) 1743 - 1744 -2. The "delete", "sort", and "sortbycolumn" subcommands, as well as row 1745 - and cell updates with the aid of the "rowconfigure" and 1746 - "cellconfigure" operations have also become significantly faster. 1747 - 1748 -3. New "insertlist" subcommand. 1749 - 1750 -4. New "-stripeheight" configuration option (thanks to Gregory Samoluk 1751 - for his proposal). 1752 - 1753 -5. If no columns are to be stretched then the blank space following the 1754 - header labels is now filled with a dummy, insensitive label having 1755 - the same background, borderwidth, and relief as the "normal" header 1756 - labels. 1757 - 1758 -6. Fixed a bug concerning the placement of the arrow indicating the 1759 - sorting order (thanks to Robert Minichino for his bug report). 1760 - 1761 -7. Improved the handling of header labels with embedded images, to 1762 - eliminate some peculiarities experienced on Windows. 1763 - 1764 -8. Several further improvements and minor bug fixes. 1765 - 1766 -What was new in Tablelist 2.4? 1767 ------------------------------- 1768 - 1769 -1. New column configuration option "-formatcommand" (thanks to Jeff 1770 - Godfrey for his proposal). This option is now used in the demo 1771 - script "browse.tcl". 1772 - 1773 -2. New row configuration option "-selectable" (thanks to Tore Morkemo 1774 - for this proposal). 1775 - 1776 -3. Significantly improved the performance of the row and cell updates, 1777 - as well as of the "delete" subcommand (thanks to Emanuele Lupi for 1778 - her input that determined me to optimize these operations). 1779 - 1780 -4. The widget implementation is now fully compatible with the recent 1781 - changes made in Tk 8.4a4 (thanks to Patrick Fradin for his input). 1782 - 1783 -5. Pop-up menus as children of a tablelist widget cause no problem any 1784 - longer (thanks to Andres Garcia and Bastien Chevreux for reporting 1785 - this bug, introduced in the previous release). 1786 - 1787 -6. Fixed a bug caused by the delayed redisplay after changing the 1788 - number of columns (thanks to Tore Morkemo for his bug report). 1789 - 1790 -7. Minor improvements in the code and documentation. 1791 - 1792 -What was new in Tablelist 2.3? 1793 ------------------------------- 1794 - 1795 -1. New configuration option "-activestyle", enabling to surround the 1796 - active item with a frame instead of underlining it. 1797 - 1798 -2. The columns can now be separated with borders, by making use of the 1799 - new configuration option "-showseparators". 1800 - 1801 -3. A nice distinguishing effect for the rows can now be obtained with 1802 - the aid of the new configuration options "-stripebackground" and 1803 - "-stripeforeground". 1804 - 1805 -4. New tablelist widget subcommands "separatorpath" and "separators". 1806 - 1807 -5. Fixed a bug related to the column index if the header labels are 1808 - hidden (thanks to Emanuele Lupi for her bug report). 1809 - 1810 -6. New demo script "styles.tcl", showing several ways to improve the 1811 - appearance of a tablelist widget. 1812 - 1813 -7. The demo scripts "config.tcl" and "browse.tcl" now make use of the 1814 - new "-stripebackground" option. 1815 - 1816 -8. Numerous further improvements and minor bug fixes (thanks to Patrick 1817 - Fradin for his valuable input). 1818 - 1819 -What was new in Tablelist 2.2? 1820 ------------------------------- 1821 - 1822 -1. The "-font" configuration option can now be specified at column, 1823 - row, and cell level, too (this was proposed and partly implemented 1824 - by Patrick Fradin). The data will be aligned properly, no matter if 1825 - the fonts are of different sizes. 1826 - 1827 -2. Significantly improved the performance of the Tcl command associated 1828 - with a tablelist widget, especially that of the "delete", "sort", 1829 - and "sortbycolumn" subcommands for a large number (i.e., several 1830 - thousands) of items. 1831 - 1832 -3. Corrected the creation of the arrow indicating the sorting order, to 1833 - make sure that it works under all supported Tcl/Tk versions (thanks 1834 - to Juri Shimon and Andres Garcia for their bug reports). 1835 - 1836 -4. Several improvements in the demo scripts "config.tcl" and 1837 - "browse.tcl". Among others, the GUIs generated by these scripts now 1838 - have a better platform-specific look & feel (many thanks to Mats 1839 - Bengtsson for his valuable suggestions concerning the Macintosh 1840 - platform). 1841 - 1842 -5. Further minor improvements in the code. 1843 - 1844 -What was new in Tablelist 2.1? 1845 ------------------------------- 1846 - 1847 -1. The up- or down-arrow indicating the sorting order now has a 3-D 1848 - border, giving the arrow a sunken relief. 1849 - 1850 -2. Due to the new 3-D look of the arrow, the default values of the 1851 - "-arrowcolor" and "-arrowdisabledcolor" configuration options have 1852 - been changed to an empty string, indicating that the arrow will 1853 - inherit the background color of the label in which it is placed. 1854 - 1855 -3. Several improvements in the demo script "browse.tcl". 1856 - 1857 -4. Minor improvements in the code and documentation. 1858 - 1859 -5. The distribution file "tablelist2_1.zip" for Windows now includes 1860 - the "tablelist2.1" directory, hence it is no longer necessary to 1861 - create this folder before unpacking the distribution file (thanks to 1862 - Kevin Partin for this suggestion). 1863 - 1864 -What was new in Tablelist 2.0? 1865 ------------------------------- 1866 - 1867 -1. New cell configuration option "-image", used to set and retrieve 1868 - the image to be displayed (by itself or together with a text) in a 1869 - cell of a tablelist widget. 1870 - 1871 -2. New column configuration option "-labelimage" specifying the image 1872 - to be displayed (by itself or combined with a text) in a column 1873 - label. 1874 - 1875 -3. The alignment of a header label can now be defined to be different 1876 - from that of the elements contained in its column, by using the new 1877 - column configuration option "-labelalign". 1878 - 1879 -4. Renamed the column configuration option "-justify" to "-align", 1880 - because (at least in the case of the header labels) this actually 1881 - specifies not only the justification, but also the anchor point. 1882 - Hopefully, this POTENTIAL INCOMPATIBILITY will not break too many 1883 - existing applications, because the column alignments are usually 1884 - specified within the "-columns" global option. 1885 - 1886 -5. Fixed a bug that raised an error when some configuration options 1887 - were specified at widget creation time before the "-columns" option 1888 - (thanks to Bastien Chevreux for his bug report). 1889 - 1890 -6. Reverted the implementation of the focus control to that contained 1891 - in the pre-1.6 Tablelist releases, because its simplified version 1892 - from the last release failed to work as expected if a tablelist was 1893 - the only widget taking the focus during keyboard traversal (thanks 1894 - to Juri Shimon for his bug report). 1895 - 1896 -7. Fixed a bug that caused an erronous return value of the "labels" 1897 - subcommand if the arrow indicating the sorting order was displayed. 1898 - 1899 -8. Several performance improvements, kindly contributed by Patrick 1900 - Fradin. 1901 - 1902 -9. To improve the performance even further, the invocations of "info 1903 - exists" for array elements are no longer replaced with a call to a 1904 - helper procedure (introduced in Tablelist 1.2), because the Tcl bug 1905 - that made this necessary for Tcl versions 8.2, 8.3.0 - 8.3.2, and 1906 - 8.4a1 was fixed in Tcl 8.3.3 and 8.4a2. If for some reason you 1907 - cannot upgrade your Tcl/Tk version, then you should patch the file 1908 - "tablelistWidget.tcl" with the aid of the script "repair.tcl", as 1909 - described in the files "README.txt" and "tablelist.html". 1910 - 1911 -10. The demo script "browse.tcl" now inserts an image into the first 1912 - cell of each row of the tablelist widget. 1913 - 1914 -11. Numerous further improvements and minor bug fixes. 1915 - 1916 -What was new in Tablelist 1.6? 1917 ------------------------------- 1918 - 1919 -1. The value of the "-stretch" configuration option is now ignored if 1920 - the width of the tablelist widget was specified as zero or less. 1921 - This change was necessary in order to improve the behavior of 1922 - dynamic-width tablelist widgets with the "-setgrid" option set to 1923 - true. 1924 - 1925 -2. By pressing mouse button 1 over a header label, the label's relief 1926 - is now only changed to "sunken" if the value of the global or 1927 - column-specific "-labelcommand" option is nonempty. 1928 - 1929 -3. Several improvements concerning hidden columns (thanks to Juri 1930 - Shimon for his bug report). 1931 - 1932 -4. Made the focus control more straight-forward. 1933 - 1934 -5. Extended the "How to use it?" section of the tutorial 1935 - "tablelist.html". 1936 - 1937 -What was new in Tablelist 1.5? 1938 ------------------------------- 1939 - 1940 -This version contains mainly bug fixes and small improvements. Many 1941 -thanks to Andres Garcia, Bastien Chevreux, and Patrick Fradin for their 1942 -valuable contributions. 1943 - 1944 -1. Fixed a bug concerning the "-label*" configuration options. 1945 - 1946 -2. Fixed the erronous invocation of "getSubCmd" in the selection 1947 - handler "fetchSelection" (this bug was introduced in version 1.1). 1948 - 1949 -3. Elements that don't fit into their cells are now displayed with a 1950 - trailing or leading ellipsis ("..."), depending on the column 1951 - alignment. 1952 - 1953 -4. Several further improvements and minor bug fixes. 1954 - 1955 -What was new in Tablelist 1.4? 1956 ------------------------------- 1957 - 1958 -1. New "-stretch" configuration option specifying the columns that are 1959 - to be stretched in order to eliminate the blank space that might 1960 - appear at the right of the table. 1961 - 1962 -2. Improved the error handling in the "attrib", "configure", 1963 - "columnconfigure", "rowconfigure", and "cellconfigure" subcommands. 1964 - 1965 -3. Improved the demo scripts "browse.tcl" and "config.tcl". 1966 - 1967 -What was new in Tablelist 1.3? 1968 ------------------------------- 1969 - 1970 -1. The "sortbycolumn" subcommand now per default places an up- or 1971 - down-arrow indicating the sorting order into the respective column's 1972 - label. This can be enabled or disabled with the new "-showarrow" 1973 - configuration option, at both widget and column level. 1974 - 1975 -2. New configuration options "-arrowcolor", "-arrowdisabledcolor", and 1976 - "-incrarrowtype" to control the appearance of the arrow mentioned 1977 - above. 1978 - 1979 -3. New "resetsortinfo" subcommand, used to reset the information about 1980 - the sorting of the items. 1981 - 1982 -4. Improved the demo script "browse.tcl". 1983 - 1984 -5. Further improvements in the code and documentation. 1985 - 1986 -What was new in Tablelist 1.2? 1987 ------------------------------- 1988 - 1989 -1. Whereever possible, eliminated the invocations of "info exists" for 1990 - array elements. This works around a severe bug in Tcl versions 8.2 1991 - and 8.3 (fixed in 8.4a2), which causes excessive memory use when 1992 - calling "info exists" on a non-existent array element. Some serious 1993 - memory leaks in earlier Tablelist versions when run under Tcl/Tk 8.2 1994 - or 8.3 (reported by Henning Hanusa and Christian Burrini) could be 1995 - tracked down to this very annoying Tcl bug (which I was not aware of 1996 - until recently). 1997 - 1998 -2. The help variables used in the initialization of the "tablelist" 1999 - namespace are now declared with the "variable" keyword, in order to 2000 - avoid any conflicts with global variables. 2001 - 2002 -3. Improved the parsing of configuration and command options. 2003 - 2004 -What was new in Tablelist 1.1? 2005 ------------------------------- 2006 - 2007 -This version contains mainly bug fixes and small improvements. Many 2008 -thanks to Patrick Fradin, Bastien Chevreux, and Mats Bengtsson for 2009 -their valuable contributions. 2010 - 2011 -1. Fixed some bugs in the implementation of the "-listvariable" option. 2012 - Also, the value of this option can now be an array element, not only 2013 - a scalar variable. 2014 - 2015 -2. Fixed a bug in the implementation of the "get" subcommand. 2016 - 2017 -3. New "sortcolumn" and "sortorder" subcommands to query the arguments 2018 - of the last sorting. 2019 - 2020 -4. Improved the look & feel of tablelist widgets on the Macintosh. 2021 - 2022 -5. Worked around a bug in Tk 8.3.0 (fixed in 8.3.1) concerning listbox 2023 - widgets with configured "-cursor" option. 2024 - 2025 -6. Several further improvements and minor bug fixes. 2026 - 2027 -What was new in Tablelist 1.0? 2028 ------------------------------- 2029 - 2030 -1. New "-resizable" option for the "columnconfigure" subcommand. 2031 - 2032 -2. New "labels" subcommand, returning the list of the header labels. 2033 - 2034 -3. The "-disabledforeground" and "-state" configuration options no 2035 - longer require Tk version 8.3 or higher. 2036 - 2037 -4. All "-label*" column configuration options can now have an empty 2038 - string as value, meaning that the corresponding global option will 2039 - be used instead of the column-specific one. 2040 - 2041 -5. Improved the output of the "columnconfigure" subcommand. 2042 - 2043 -6. The help variables used in the coordinate transformations within 2044 - the scripts defined for the "TablelistBody" binding tag have been 2045 - moved into the "tablelist" namespace, in order to avoid any 2046 - conflicts with global variables. 2047 - 2048 -7. Improved cross-platform support with the aid of the new <<Button3>> 2049 - virtual event. 2050 - 2051 -8. Fixed a bug in the "compareAsSet" procedure of the demo script 2052 - "config.tcl". 2053 - 2054 -9. New demo script "browse.tcl", containing a simple widget browser 2055 - based on a tablelist. 2056 - 2057 -10. Both demo scripts now use a namespace for their procedures, to 2058 - avoid any conflicts when evaluating them with the "source" command. 2059 - 2060 -11. The tutorial "tablelist.html" is now completed and includes a 2061 - detailed discussion of both demo scripts mentioned above. 2062 - 2063 -12. Numerous further improvements in the code and documentation. 2064 - 2065 -What was new in Tablelist 0.9? 2066 ------------------------------- 2067 - 2068 -1. The documentation now includes the tutorial "tablelist.html" (part 2069 - of which is still work in progress), as well as reference pages for 2070 - the two exported commands "tablelist::tablelist" and 2071 - "tablelist::sortByColumn". 2072 - 2073 -2. The "-listvariable" configuration option is now fully implemented. 2074 - 2075 -3. A column of a tablelist widget can now be made invisible by using 2076 - the new "-hide" option of the "columnconfigure" subcommand. 2077 - 2078 -4. The contents of a row can now be updated with the new "-text" option 2079 - of the "rowconfigure" subcommand. 2080 - 2081 -5. For Tk versions 8.3 or higher the "tablelist::tablelist" command now 2082 - supports the "-disabledforeground", "-labeldisabledforeground", and 2083 - "-state" configuration options. 2084 - 2085 -6. Replaced "[focus]" with "[focus -displayof $win]", so that the code 2086 - will work properly in applications using multiple displays. 2087 - Similarly, the "font measure" command is now invoked with the 2088 - "-displayof $win" option. This also works around a peculiarity of 2089 - the "font measure" command. 2090 - 2091 -7. Renamed "tablelistBindingTag" to "Tablelist". 2092 - 2093 -8. Fixed a bug in the private procedure "colIndex", for arguments of 2094 - the form "@x,y". This procedure is invoked (directly or indirectly) 2095 - in the implementation of all commands that take a column or cell 2096 - index or an x coordinate as argument. 2097 - 2098 -9. Numerous further improvements and minor bug fixes.
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/COPYRIGHT.txt.
1 -Multi-column listbox and tree widget package Tablelist, version 5.16 2 -Copyright (c) 2000-2016 Csaba Nemethi (E-mail: csaba.nemethi@t-online.de) 3 - 4 -This library is free software; you can use, modify, and redistribute it 5 -for any purpose, provided that existing copyright notices are retained 6 -in all copies and that this notice is included verbatim in any 7 -distributions. 8 - 9 -This software is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the 10 -implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/README.txt.
1 - The Multi-Column Listbox and Tree Widget Package Tablelist 2 - 3 - by 4 - 5 - Csaba Nemethi 6 - 7 - csaba.nemethi@t-online.de 8 - 9 - 10 -What is Tablelist? 11 ------------------- 12 - 13 -Tablelist is a library package for Tcl/Tk versions 8.0 or higher, 14 -written in pure Tcl/Tk code. It contains: 15 - 16 - - the implementation of the "tablelist" mega-widget, including a 17 - general utility module for mega-widgets; 18 - - a demo script containing a useful procedure that displays the 19 - configuration options of an arbitrary widget in a tablelist and 20 - enables you to edit their values interactively; 21 - - a demo script implementing a widget browser based on a tablelist 22 - used as multi-column listbox; 23 - - a demo script implementing a widget browser based on a tablelist 24 - used as multi-column tree widget; 25 - - a demo script implementing a directory viewer based on a tablelist 26 - used as multi-column tree widget; 27 - - a demo script showing several ways to improve the appearance of a 28 - tablelist widget; 29 - - four further demo scripts, illustrating the interactive cell 30 - editing with the aid of various widgets from the Tk core and from 31 - the packages tile, BWidget, Iwidgets, combobox (by Bryan Oakley), 32 - and Mentry; 33 - - one further demo script, with a tablelist widget containing 34 - embedded windows; 35 - - tile-based counterparts of the above-mentioned demo scripts; 36 - - a tutorial in HTML format; 37 - - reference pages in HTML format. 38 - 39 -A tablelist is a multi-column listbox and tree widget. The width of 40 -each column can be dynamic (i.e., just large enough to hold all its 41 -elements, including the header) or static (specified in characters or 42 -pixels). The columns are, per default, resizable. The alignment of 43 -each column can be specified as "left", "right", or "center". 44 - 45 -The columns, rows, and cells can be configured individually. Several 46 -of the global and column-specific options refer to the headers, 47 -implemented as label widgets. For instance, the "-labelcommand" option 48 -specifies a Tcl command to be invoked when mouse button 1 is released 49 -over a label. The most common value of this option sorts the items 50 -based on the respective column. 51 - 52 -The Tablelist package provides a great variety of tree styles 53 -controlling the look & feel of the column that displays the tree 54 -hierarchy with the aid of indentations and expand/collapse controls. 55 - 56 -Interactive editing of the elements of a tablelist widget can be 57 -enabled for individual cells and for entire columns. A great variety 58 -of widgets from the Tk core and from the packages tile, BWidget, 59 -Iwidgets, combobox, ctext, and Mentry (or Mentry_tile) is supported for 60 -being used as embedded edit window. In addition, a rich set of keyboard 61 -bindings is provided for a comfortable navigation between the editable 62 -cells. 63 - 64 -The Tcl command corresponding to a tablelist widget is very similar to 65 -the one associated with a normal listbox. There are column-, row-, and 66 -cell-specific counterparts of the "configure" and "cget" subcommands 67 -("columnconfigure", "rowconfigure", "cellconfigure", ...). They can be 68 -used, among others, to insert images into the cells and the header 69 -labels, or to insert embedded windows into the cells. The "index", 70 -"nearest", and "see" command options refer to the rows, but similar 71 -subcommands are provided for the columns and cells ("columnindex", 72 -"cellindex", ...). The items can be sorted with the "sort", 73 -"sortbycolumn", and "sortbycolumnlist" command options. 74 - 75 -The bindings defined for the body of a tablelist widget make it behave 76 -just like a normal listbox. This includes the support for the virtual 77 -event <<ListboxSelect>> (which is equivalent to <<TablelistSelect>>). 78 -In addition, version 2.3 or higher of the widget callback package Wcb 79 -(written in pure Tcl/Tk code as well) can be used to define callbacks 80 -for the "activate", "selection set", and "selection clear" commands, 81 -and Wcb version 3.0 or higher also supports callbacks for the 82 -"activatecell", "cellselection set", and "cellselection clear" 83 -commands. The download location of Wcb is 84 - 85 - http://www.nemethi.de 86 - 87 -How to get it? 88 --------------- 89 - 90 -Tablelist is available for free download from the same URL as Wcb. The 91 -distribution file is "tablelist5.16.tar.gz" for UNIX and 92 -"tablelist5_16.zip" for Windows. These files contain the same 93 -information, except for the additional carriage return character 94 -preceding the linefeed at the end of each line in the text files for 95 -Windows. 96 - 97 -Tablelist is also included in tklib, which has the address 98 - 99 - http://core.tcl.tk/tklib 100 - 101 -How to install it? 102 ------------------- 103 - 104 -Install the package as a subdirectory of one of the directories given 105 -by the "auto_path" variable. For example, you can install it as a 106 -directory at the same level as the Tcl and Tk script libraries. The 107 -locations of these library directories are given by the "tcl_library" 108 -and "tk_library" variables, respectively. 109 - 110 -To install Tablelist on UNIX, "cd" to the desired directory and unpack 111 -the distribution file "tablelist5.16.tar.gz": 112 - 113 - gunzip -c tablelist5.16.tar.gz | tar -xf - 114 - 115 -This command will create a directory named "tablelist5.16", with the 116 -subdirectories "demos", "doc", and "scripts". 117 - 118 -On Windows, use WinZip or some other program capable of unpacking the 119 -distribution file "tablelist5_16.zip" into the directory 120 -"tablelist5.16", with the subdirectories "demos", "doc", and "scripts". 121 - 122 -The file "tablelistEdit.tcl" in the "scripts" directory is only needed 123 -for applications making use of interactive cell editing. Similarly, the 124 -file "tablelistMove.tcl" in the same directory is only required for 125 -scripts invoking the "move" or "movecolumn" tablelist command. Finally, 126 -the file "tablelistThemes.tcl" is only needed for applications using 127 -the package Tablelist_tile (see next section). 128 - 129 -Next, you should check the exact version number of your Tcl/Tk 130 -distribution, given by the "tcl_patchLevel" and "tk_patchLevel" 131 -variables. If you are using Tcl/Tk version 8.2.X, 8.3.0 - 8.3.2, or 132 -8.4a1, then you should proceed as described in the "How to install it?" 133 -section of the file "tablelist.html", located in the "doc" directory. 134 - 135 -How to use it? 136 --------------- 137 - 138 -The Tablelist distribution provides two packages, called Tablelist and 139 -Tablelist_tile. The main difference between the two is that 140 -Tablelist_tile enables the tile-based, theme-specific appearance of 141 -tablelist widgets; this package requires Tcl/Tk 8.4 or higher and tile 142 -0.6 or higher. It is not possible to use both packages in one and the 143 -same application, because both are implemented in the same "tablelist" 144 -namespace and provide identical commands. 145 - 146 -To be able to use the commands and variables implemented in the package 147 -Tablelist, your scripts must contain one of the lines 148 - 149 - package require tablelist ?version? 150 - package require Tablelist ?version? 151 - 152 -Likewise, to be able to use the commands and variables implemented in 153 -the package Tablelist_tile, your scripts must contain one of the lines 154 - 155 - package require tablelist_tile ?version? 156 - package require Tablelist_tile ?version? 157 - 158 -Since the packages Tablelist and Tablelist_tile are implemented in the 159 -"tablelist" namespace, you must either import the procedures you need, 160 -or use qualified names like "tablelist::tablelist". 161 - 162 -For a detailed description of the commands and variables provided by 163 -Tablelist and of the examples contained in the "demos" directory, see 164 -the tutorial "tablelist.html" and the reference pages, all located in 165 -the "doc" directory.
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/browse.tcl.
1 -#============================================================================== 2 -# Demonstrates how to use a tablelist widget for displaying information about 3 -# the children of an arbitrary widget. 4 -# 5 -# Copyright (c) 2000-2016 Csaba Nemethi (E-mail: csaba.nemethi@t-online.de) 6 -#============================================================================== 7 - 8 -package require tablelist 5.16 9 - 10 -namespace eval demo { 11 - variable dir [file dirname [info script]] 12 - 13 - # 14 - # Create two images, needed in the procedure putChildren 15 - # 16 - variable leafImg [image create bitmap -file [file join $dir leaf.xbm] \ 17 - -background coral -foreground gray50] 18 - variable compImg [image create bitmap -file [file join $dir comp.xbm] \ 19 - -background yellow -foreground gray50] 20 -} 21 - 22 -source [file join $demo::dir config.tcl] 23 - 24 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 25 -# demo::displayChildren 26 -# 27 -# Displays information on the children of the widget w in a tablelist widget 28 -# contained in a newly created top-level widget. Returns the name of the 29 -# tablelist widget. 30 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 31 -proc demo::displayChildren w { 32 - if {![winfo exists $w]} { 33 - bell 34 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 35 - "Bad window path name \"$w\"" 36 - return "" 37 - } 38 - 39 - # 40 - # Create a top-level widget of the class DemoTop 41 - # 42 - set top .browseTop 43 - for {set n 2} {[winfo exists $top]} {incr n} { 44 - set top .browseTop$n 45 - } 46 - toplevel $top -class DemoTop 47 - 48 - # 49 - # Create a vertically scrolled tablelist widget with 9 dynamic-width 50 - # columns and interactive sort capability within the top-level 51 - # 52 - set tf $top.tf 53 - frame $tf 54 - set tbl $tf.tbl 55 - set vsb $tf.vsb 56 - tablelist::tablelist $tbl \ 57 - -columns {0 "Path Name" left 58 - 0 "Class" left 59 - 0 "X" right 60 - 0 "Y" right 61 - 0 "Width" right 62 - 0 "Height" right 63 - 0 "Mapped" center 64 - 0 "Viewable" center 65 - 0 "Manager" left} \ 66 - -labelcommand demo::labelCmd -yscrollcommand [list $vsb set] -width 0 67 - if {[$tbl cget -selectborderwidth] == 0} { 68 - $tbl configure -spacing 1 69 - } 70 - foreach col {2 3 4 5} { 71 - $tbl columnconfigure $col -sortmode integer 72 - } 73 - foreach col {6 7} { 74 - $tbl columnconfigure $col -formatcommand demo::formatBoolean 75 - } 76 - scrollbar $vsb -orient vertical -command [list $tbl yview] 77 - 78 - # 79 - # When displaying the information about the children of any 80 - # ancestor of the label widgets, the widths of some of the 81 - # labels and thus also the widths and x coordinates of some 82 - # children may change. For this reason, make sure the items 83 - # will be updated after any change in the sizes of the labels 84 - # 85 - foreach l [$tbl labels] { 86 - bind $l <Configure> [list demo::updateItemsDelayed $tbl] 87 - } 88 - bind $tbl <Configure> [list demo::updateItemsDelayed $tbl] 89 - 90 - # 91 - # Create a pop-up menu with two command entries; bind the script 92 - # associated with its first entry to the <Double-1> event, too 93 - # 94 - set menu $top.menu 95 - menu $menu -tearoff no 96 - $menu add command -label "Display Children" \ 97 - -command [list demo::putChildrenOfSelWidget $tbl] 98 - $menu add command -label "Display Config" \ 99 - -command [list demo::dispConfigOfSelWidget $tbl] 100 - set bodyTag [$tbl bodytag] 101 - bind $bodyTag <Double-1> [list demo::putChildrenOfSelWidget $tbl] 102 - bind $bodyTag <<Button3>> [bind TablelistBody <Button-1>] 103 - bind $bodyTag <<Button3>> +[bind TablelistBody <ButtonRelease-1>] 104 - bind $bodyTag <<Button3>> +[list demo::postPopupMenu $top %X %Y] 105 - 106 - # 107 - # Create three buttons within a frame child of the top-level widget 108 - # 109 - set bf $top.bf 110 - frame $bf 111 - set b1 $bf.b1 112 - set b2 $bf.b2 113 - set b3 $bf.b3 114 - button $b1 -text "Refresh" 115 - button $b2 -text "Parent" 116 - button $b3 -text "Close" -command [list destroy $top] 117 - 118 - # 119 - # Manage the widgets 120 - # 121 - grid $tbl -row 0 -rowspan 2 -column 0 -sticky news 122 - variable winSys 123 - if {[string compare $winSys "aqua"] == 0} { 124 - grid [$tbl cornerpath] -row 0 -column 1 -sticky ew 125 - grid $vsb -row 1 -column 1 -sticky ns 126 - } else { 127 - grid $vsb -row 0 -rowspan 2 -column 1 -sticky ns 128 - } 129 - grid rowconfigure $tf 1 -weight 1 130 - grid columnconfigure $tf 0 -weight 1 131 - pack $b1 $b2 $b3 -side left -expand yes -pady 10 132 - pack $bf -side bottom -fill x 133 - pack $tf -side top -expand yes -fill both 134 - 135 - # 136 - # Populate the tablelist with the data of the given widget's children 137 - # 138 - putChildren $w $tbl 139 - return $tbl 140 -} 141 - 142 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 143 -# demo::putChildren 144 -# 145 -# Outputs the data of the children of the widget w into the tablelist widget 146 -# tbl. 147 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 148 -proc demo::putChildren {w tbl} { 149 - # 150 - # The following check is necessary because this procedure 151 - # is also invoked by the "Refresh" and "Parent" buttons 152 - # 153 - if {![winfo exists $w]} { 154 - bell 155 - set choice [tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon warning \ 156 - -message "Bad window path name \"$w\" -- replacing\ 157 - it with nearest existent ancestor" \ 158 - -type okcancel -default ok -parent [winfo toplevel $tbl]] 159 - if {[string compare $choice "ok"] == 0} { 160 - while {![winfo exists $w]} { 161 - set last [string last "." $w] 162 - if {$last != 0} { 163 - incr last -1 164 - } 165 - set w [string range $w 0 $last] 166 - } 167 - } else { 168 - return "" 169 - } 170 - } 171 - 172 - set top [winfo toplevel $tbl] 173 - wm title $top "Children of the [winfo class $w] Widget \"$w\"" 174 - 175 - $tbl resetsortinfo 176 - $tbl delete 0 end 177 - 178 - # 179 - # Display the data of the children of the 180 - # widget w in the tablelist widget tbl 181 - # 182 - variable leafImg 183 - variable compImg 184 - foreach c [winfo children $w] { 185 - # 186 - # Insert the data of the current child into the tablelist widget 187 - # 188 - set item {} 189 - lappend item $c [winfo class $c] [winfo x $c] [winfo y $c] \ 190 - [winfo width $c] [winfo height $c] [winfo ismapped $c] \ 191 - [winfo viewable $c] [winfo manager $c] 192 - $tbl insert end $item 193 - 194 - # 195 - # Insert an image into the first cell of the row 196 - # 197 - if {[llength [winfo children $c]] == 0} { 198 - $tbl cellconfigure end,0 -image $leafImg 199 - } else { 200 - $tbl cellconfigure end,0 -image $compImg 201 - } 202 - } 203 - 204 - # 205 - # Configure the "Refresh" and "Parent" buttons 206 - # 207 - $top.bf.b1 configure -command [list demo::putChildren $w $tbl] 208 - set b2 $top.bf.b2 209 - set p [winfo parent $w] 210 - if {[string compare $p ""] == 0} { 211 - $b2 configure -state disabled 212 - } else { 213 - $b2 configure -state normal -command [list demo::putChildren $p $tbl] 214 - } 215 -} 216 - 217 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 218 -# demo::formatBoolean 219 -# 220 -# Returns "yes" or "no", according to the specified boolean value. 221 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 222 -proc demo::formatBoolean val { 223 - return [expr {$val ? "yes" : "no"}] 224 -} 225 - 226 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 227 -# demo::labelCmd 228 -# 229 -# Sorts the contents of the tablelist widget tbl by its col'th column and makes 230 -# sure the items will be updated 500 ms later (because one of the items might 231 -# refer to a canvas containing the arrow that displays the sort order). 232 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 233 -proc demo::labelCmd {tbl col} { 234 - tablelist::sortByColumn $tbl $col 235 - updateItemsDelayed $tbl 236 -} 237 - 238 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 239 -# demo::updateItemsDelayed 240 -# 241 -# Arranges for the items of the tablelist widget tbl to be updated 500 ms later. 242 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 243 -proc demo::updateItemsDelayed tbl { 244 - # 245 - # Schedule the demo::updateItems command for execution 246 - # 500 ms later, but only if it is not yet pending 247 - # 248 - if {[string compare [$tbl attrib afterId] ""] == 0} { 249 - $tbl attrib afterId [after 500 [list demo::updateItems $tbl]] 250 - } 251 -} 252 - 253 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 254 -# demo::updateItems 255 -# 256 -# Updates the items of the tablelist widget tbl. 257 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 258 -proc demo::updateItems tbl { 259 - # 260 - # Reset the tablelist's "afterId" attribute 261 - # 262 - $tbl attrib afterId "" 263 - 264 - # 265 - # Update the items 266 - # 267 - set rowCount [$tbl size] 268 - for {set row 0} {$row < $rowCount} {incr row} { 269 - set c [$tbl cellcget $row,0 -text] 270 - if {![winfo exists $c]} { 271 - continue 272 - } 273 - 274 - set item {} 275 - lappend item $c [winfo class $c] [winfo x $c] [winfo y $c] \ 276 - [winfo width $c] [winfo height $c] [winfo ismapped $c] \ 277 - [winfo viewable $c] [winfo manager $c] 278 - $tbl rowconfigure $row -text $item 279 - } 280 - 281 - # 282 - # Repeat the last sort operation (if any) 283 - # 284 - $tbl refreshsorting 285 -} 286 - 287 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 288 -# demo::putChildrenOfSelWidget 289 -# 290 -# Outputs the data of the children of the selected widget into the tablelist 291 -# widget tbl. 292 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 293 -proc demo::putChildrenOfSelWidget tbl { 294 - set w [$tbl cellcget [$tbl curselection],0 -text] 295 - if {![winfo exists $w]} { 296 - bell 297 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 298 - "Bad window path name \"$w\"" -parent [winfo toplevel $tbl] 299 - return "" 300 - } 301 - 302 - if {[llength [winfo children $w]] == 0} { 303 - bell 304 - } else { 305 - putChildren $w $tbl 306 - } 307 -} 308 - 309 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 310 -# demo::dispConfigOfSelWidget 311 -# 312 -# Displays the configuration options of the selected widget within the 313 -# tablelist tbl in a tablelist widget contained in a newly created top-level 314 -# widget. 315 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 316 -proc demo::dispConfigOfSelWidget tbl { 317 - demo::displayConfig [$tbl cellcget [$tbl curselection],0 -text] 318 -} 319 - 320 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 321 -# demo::postPopupMenu 322 -# 323 -# Posts the pop-up menu $top.menu at the given screen position. Before posting 324 -# the menu, the procedure enables/disables its first entry, depending upon 325 -# whether the selected widget has children or not. 326 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 327 -proc demo::postPopupMenu {top rootX rootY} { 328 - set tbl $top.tf.tbl 329 - set w [$tbl cellcget [$tbl curselection],0 -text] 330 - if {![winfo exists $w]} { 331 - bell 332 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 333 - "Bad window path name \"$w\"" -parent $top 334 - return "" 335 - } 336 - 337 - set menu $top.menu 338 - if {[llength [winfo children $w]] == 0} { 339 - $menu entryconfigure 0 -state disabled 340 - } else { 341 - $menu entryconfigure 0 -state normal 342 - } 343 - 344 - tk_popup $menu $rootX $rootY 345 -} 346 - 347 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 348 - 349 -if {$tcl_interactive} { 350 - return "\nTo display information about the children of an arbitrary\ 351 - widget, enter\n\n\tdemo::displayChildren <widgetName>\n" 352 -} else { 353 - wm withdraw . 354 - tk_messageBox -title $argv0 -icon warning -message \ 355 - "Please source this script into\nan interactive wish session" 356 - exit 1 357 -}
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/browseTree.tcl.
1 -#============================================================================== 2 -# Demonstrates how to use a tablelist widget for displaying information about 3 -# the children of an arbitrary widget. 4 -# 5 -# Copyright (c) 2010-2016 Csaba Nemethi (E-mail: csaba.nemethi@t-online.de) 6 -#============================================================================== 7 - 8 -package require Tk 8.3 9 -package require tablelist 5.16 10 - 11 -namespace eval demo { 12 - variable dir [file dirname [info script]] 13 - 14 - # 15 - # Create two images, needed in the procedure putChildren 16 - # 17 - variable leafImg [image create bitmap -file [file join $dir leaf.xbm] \ 18 - -background coral -foreground gray50] 19 - variable compImg [image create bitmap -file [file join $dir comp.xbm] \ 20 - -background yellow -foreground gray50] 21 -} 22 - 23 -source [file join $demo::dir config.tcl] 24 - 25 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 26 -# demo::displayChildren 27 -# 28 -# Displays information on the children of the widget w in a tablelist widget 29 -# contained in a newly created top-level widget. Returns the name of the 30 -# tablelist widget. 31 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 32 -proc demo::displayChildren w { 33 - if {![winfo exists $w]} { 34 - bell 35 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 36 - "Bad window path name \"$w\"" 37 - return "" 38 - } 39 - 40 - # 41 - # Create a top-level widget of the class DemoTop 42 - # 43 - set top .browseTop 44 - for {set n 2} {[winfo exists $top]} {incr n} { 45 - set top .browseTop$n 46 - } 47 - toplevel $top -class DemoTop 48 - 49 - # 50 - # Create a vertically scrolled tablelist widget with 9 dynamic-width 51 - # columns and interactive sort capability within the top-level 52 - # 53 - set tf $top.tf 54 - frame $tf 55 - set tbl $tf.tbl 56 - set vsb $tf.vsb 57 - tablelist::tablelist $tbl \ 58 - -columns {0 "Path Name" left 59 - 0 "Class" left 60 - 0 "X" right 61 - 0 "Y" right 62 - 0 "Width" right 63 - 0 "Height" right 64 - 0 "Mapped" center 65 - 0 "Viewable" center 66 - 0 "Manager" left} \ 67 - -expandcommand demo::expandCmd -labelcommand demo::labelCmd \ 68 - -yscrollcommand [list $vsb set] -setgrid no -width 0 69 - if {[$tbl cget -selectborderwidth] == 0} { 70 - $tbl configure -spacing 1 71 - } 72 - foreach col {2 3 4 5} { 73 - $tbl columnconfigure $col -sortmode integer 74 - } 75 - foreach col {6 7} { 76 - $tbl columnconfigure $col -formatcommand demo::formatBoolean 77 - } 78 - scrollbar $vsb -orient vertical -command [list $tbl yview] 79 - 80 - # 81 - # When displaying the information about the children of any 82 - # ancestor of the label widgets, the widths of some of the 83 - # labels and thus also the widths and x coordinates of some 84 - # children may change. For this reason, make sure the items 85 - # will be updated after any change in the sizes of the labels 86 - # 87 - foreach l [$tbl labels] { 88 - bind $l <Configure> [list demo::updateItemsDelayed $tbl] 89 - } 90 - bind $tbl <Configure> [list demo::updateItemsDelayed $tbl] 91 - 92 - # 93 - # Create a pop-up menu with two command entries; bind the script 94 - # associated with its first entry to the <Double-1> event, too 95 - # 96 - set menu $top.menu 97 - menu $menu -tearoff no 98 - $menu add command -label "Display Children" \ 99 - -command [list demo::putChildrenOfSelWidget $tbl] 100 - $menu add command -label "Display Config" \ 101 - -command [list demo::dispConfigOfSelWidget $tbl] 102 - set bodyTag [$tbl bodytag] 103 - bind $bodyTag <Double-1> [list demo::putChildrenOfSelWidget $tbl] 104 - bind $bodyTag <<Button3>> [bind TablelistBody <Button-1>] 105 - bind $bodyTag <<Button3>> +[bind TablelistBody <ButtonRelease-1>] 106 - bind $bodyTag <<Button3>> +[list demo::postPopupMenu $top %X %Y] 107 - 108 - # 109 - # Create three buttons within a frame child of the top-level widget 110 - # 111 - set bf $top.bf 112 - frame $bf 113 - set b1 $bf.b1 114 - set b2 $bf.b2 115 - set b3 $bf.b3 116 - button $b1 -text "Refresh" 117 - button $b2 -text "Parent" 118 - button $b3 -text "Close" -command [list destroy $top] 119 - 120 - # 121 - # Manage the widgets 122 - # 123 - grid $tbl -row 0 -rowspan 2 -column 0 -sticky news 124 - variable winSys 125 - if {[string compare $winSys "aqua"] == 0} { 126 - grid [$tbl cornerpath] -row 0 -column 1 -sticky ew 127 - grid $vsb -row 1 -column 1 -sticky ns 128 - } else { 129 - grid $vsb -row 0 -rowspan 2 -column 1 -sticky ns 130 - } 131 - grid rowconfigure $tf 1 -weight 1 132 - grid columnconfigure $tf 0 -weight 1 133 - pack $b1 $b2 $b3 -side left -expand yes -pady 10 134 - pack $bf -side bottom -fill x 135 - pack $tf -side top -expand yes -fill both 136 - 137 - # 138 - # Populate the tablelist with the data of the given widget's children 139 - # 140 - putChildren $w $tbl root 141 - return $tbl 142 -} 143 - 144 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 145 -# demo::putChildren 146 -# 147 -# Outputs the data of the children of the widget w into the tablelist widget 148 -# tbl, as child items of the one identified by nodeIdx. 149 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 150 -proc demo::putChildren {w tbl nodeIdx} { 151 - # 152 - # The following check is necessary because this procedure 153 - # is also invoked by the "Refresh" and "Parent" buttons 154 - # 155 - if {![winfo exists $w]} { 156 - bell 157 - if {[string compare $nodeIdx "root"] == 0} { 158 - set choice [tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon warning \ 159 - -message "Bad window path name \"$w\" -- replacing\ 160 - it with nearest existent ancestor" \ 161 - -type okcancel -default ok \ 162 - -parent [winfo toplevel $tbl]] 163 - if {[string compare $choice "ok"] == 0} { 164 - while {![winfo exists $w]} { 165 - set last [string last "." $w] 166 - if {$last != 0} { 167 - incr last -1 168 - } 169 - set w [string range $w 0 $last] 170 - } 171 - } else { 172 - return "" 173 - } 174 - } else { 175 - return "" 176 - } 177 - } 178 - 179 - if {[string compare $nodeIdx "root"] == 0} { 180 - set top [winfo toplevel $tbl] 181 - wm title $top "Children of the [winfo class $w] Widget \"$w\"" 182 - 183 - $tbl resetsortinfo 184 - $tbl delete 0 end 185 - set row 0 186 - } else { 187 - set row [expr {$nodeIdx + 1}] 188 - } 189 - 190 - # 191 - # Display the data of the children of the 192 - # widget w in the tablelist widget tbl 193 - # 194 - variable leafImg 195 - variable compImg 196 - foreach c [winfo children $w] { 197 - # 198 - # Insert the data of the current child into the tablelist widget 199 - # 200 - set item {} 201 - lappend item \ 202 - [winfo name $c] [winfo class $c] [winfo x $c] [winfo y $c] \ 203 - [winfo width $c] [winfo height $c] [winfo ismapped $c] \ 204 - [winfo viewable $c] [winfo manager $c] 205 - $tbl insertchild $nodeIdx end $item 206 - 207 - # 208 - # Insert an image into the first cell of the row; mark the 209 - # row as collapsed if the child widget has children itself 210 - # 211 - if {[llength [winfo children $c]] == 0} { 212 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,0 -image $leafImg 213 - } else { 214 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,0 -image $compImg 215 - $tbl collapse $row 216 - } 217 - 218 - $tbl rowattrib $row pathName $c 219 - incr row 220 - } 221 - 222 - if {[string compare $nodeIdx "root"] == 0} { 223 - # 224 - # Configure the "Refresh" and "Parent" buttons 225 - # 226 - $top.bf.b1 configure -command [list demo::refreshView $w $tbl] 227 - set b2 $top.bf.b2 228 - set p [winfo parent $w] 229 - if {[string compare $p ""] == 0} { 230 - $b2 configure -state disabled 231 - } else { 232 - $b2 configure -state normal -command \ 233 - [list demo::putChildren $p $tbl root] 234 - } 235 - } 236 -} 237 - 238 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 239 -# demo::expandCmd 240 -# 241 -# Outputs the data of the children of the widget whose leaf name is displayed 242 -# in the first cell of the specified row of the tablelist widget tbl, as child 243 -# items of the one identified by row. 244 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 245 -proc demo::expandCmd {tbl row} { 246 - if {[$tbl childcount $row] == 0} { 247 - set w [$tbl rowattrib $row pathName] 248 - putChildren $w $tbl $row 249 - 250 - # 251 - # Apply the last sorting (if any) to the new items 252 - # 253 - $tbl refreshsorting $row 254 - } 255 -} 256 - 257 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 258 -# demo::formatBoolean 259 -# 260 -# Returns "yes" or "no", according to the specified boolean value. 261 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 262 -proc demo::formatBoolean val { 263 - return [expr {$val ? "yes" : "no"}] 264 -} 265 - 266 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 267 -# demo::labelCmd 268 -# 269 -# Sorts the contents of the tablelist widget tbl by its col'th column and makes 270 -# sure the items will be updated 500 ms later (because one of the items might 271 -# refer to a canvas containing the arrow that displays the sort order). 272 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 273 -proc demo::labelCmd {tbl col} { 274 - tablelist::sortByColumn $tbl $col 275 - updateItemsDelayed $tbl 276 -} 277 - 278 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 279 -# demo::updateItemsDelayed 280 -# 281 -# Arranges for the items of the tablelist widget tbl to be updated 500 ms later. 282 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 283 -proc demo::updateItemsDelayed tbl { 284 - # 285 - # Schedule the demo::updateItems command for execution 286 - # 500 ms later, but only if it is not yet pending 287 - # 288 - if {[string compare [$tbl attrib afterId] ""] == 0} { 289 - $tbl attrib afterId [after 500 [list demo::updateItems $tbl]] 290 - } 291 -} 292 - 293 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 294 -# demo::updateItems 295 -# 296 -# Updates the items of the tablelist widget tbl. 297 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 298 -proc demo::updateItems tbl { 299 - # 300 - # Reset the tablelist's "afterId" attribute 301 - # 302 - $tbl attrib afterId "" 303 - 304 - # 305 - # Update the items 306 - # 307 - set rowCount [$tbl size] 308 - for {set row 0} {$row < $rowCount} {incr row} { 309 - set c [$tbl rowattrib $row pathName] 310 - if {![winfo exists $c]} { 311 - continue 312 - } 313 - 314 - set item {} 315 - lappend item \ 316 - [winfo name $c] [winfo class $c] [winfo x $c] [winfo y $c] \ 317 - [winfo width $c] [winfo height $c] [winfo ismapped $c] \ 318 - [winfo viewable $c] [winfo manager $c] 319 - $tbl rowconfigure $row -text $item 320 - } 321 - 322 - # 323 - # Repeat the last sort operation (if any) 324 - # 325 - $tbl refreshsorting 326 -} 327 - 328 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 329 -# demo::putChildrenOfSelWidget 330 -# 331 -# Outputs the data of the children of the selected widget into the tablelist 332 -# widget tbl. 333 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 334 -proc demo::putChildrenOfSelWidget tbl { 335 - set w [$tbl rowattrib [$tbl curselection] pathName] 336 - if {![winfo exists $w]} { 337 - bell 338 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 339 - "Bad window path name \"$w\"" -parent [winfo toplevel $tbl] 340 - return "" 341 - } 342 - 343 - if {[llength [winfo children $w]] == 0} { 344 - bell 345 - } else { 346 - putChildren $w $tbl root 347 - } 348 -} 349 - 350 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 351 -# demo::dispConfigOfSelWidget 352 -# 353 -# Displays the configuration options of the selected widget within the 354 -# tablelist tbl in a tablelist widget contained in a newly created top-level 355 -# widget. 356 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 357 -proc demo::dispConfigOfSelWidget tbl { 358 - demo::displayConfig [$tbl rowattrib [$tbl curselection] pathName] 359 -} 360 - 361 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 362 -# demo::postPopupMenu 363 -# 364 -# Posts the pop-up menu $top.menu at the given screen position. Before posting 365 -# the menu, the procedure enables/disables its first entry, depending upon 366 -# whether the selected widget has children or not. 367 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 368 -proc demo::postPopupMenu {top rootX rootY} { 369 - set tbl $top.tf.tbl 370 - set w [$tbl rowattrib [$tbl curselection] pathName] 371 - if {![winfo exists $w]} { 372 - bell 373 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 374 - "Bad window path name \"$w\"" -parent $top 375 - return "" 376 - } 377 - 378 - set menu $top.menu 379 - if {[llength [winfo children $w]] == 0} { 380 - $menu entryconfigure 0 -state disabled 381 - } else { 382 - $menu entryconfigure 0 -state normal 383 - } 384 - 385 - tk_popup $menu $rootX $rootY 386 -} 387 - 388 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 389 -# demo::refreshView 390 -# 391 -# Redisplays the data of the children of the widget w in the tablelist widget 392 -# tbl and restores the expanded states of the items as well as the vertical 393 -# view. 394 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 395 -proc demo::refreshView {w tbl} { 396 - # 397 - # Save the vertical view and get the path names of 398 - # the child widgets displayed in the expanded rows 399 - # 400 - set yView [$tbl yview] 401 - foreach key [$tbl expandedkeys] { 402 - set pathName [$tbl rowattrib $key pathName] 403 - set expandedWidgets($pathName) 1 404 - } 405 - 406 - # 407 - # Redisplay the data of the widget's (possibly changed) children and 408 - # restore the expanded states of the children, along with the vertical view 409 - # 410 - putChildren $w $tbl root 411 - restoreExpandedStates $tbl root expandedWidgets 412 - $tbl yview moveto [lindex $yView 0] 413 -} 414 - 415 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 416 -# demo::restoreExpandedStates 417 -# 418 -# Expands those children of the parent identified by nodeIdx that display the 419 -# data of child widgets whose path names are the names of the elements of the 420 -# array specified by the last argument. 421 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 422 -proc demo::restoreExpandedStates {tbl nodeIdx expandedWidgetsName} { 423 - upvar $expandedWidgetsName expandedWidgets 424 - 425 - foreach key [$tbl childkeys $nodeIdx] { 426 - set pathName [$tbl rowattrib $key pathName] 427 - if {[info exists expandedWidgets($pathName)]} { 428 - $tbl expand $key -partly 429 - restoreExpandedStates $tbl $key expandedWidgets 430 - } 431 - } 432 -} 433 - 434 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 435 - 436 -if {$tcl_interactive} { 437 - return "\nTo display information about the children of an arbitrary\ 438 - widget, enter\n\n\tdemo::displayChildren <widgetName>\n" 439 -} else { 440 - wm withdraw . 441 - tk_messageBox -title $argv0 -icon warning -message \ 442 - "Please source this script into\nan interactive wish session" 443 - exit 1 444 -}
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/browseTree_tile.tcl.
1 -#============================================================================== 2 -# Demonstrates how to use a tablelist widget for displaying information about 3 -# the children of an arbitrary widget. 4 -# 5 -# Copyright (c) 2010-2016 Csaba Nemethi (E-mail: csaba.nemethi@t-online.de) 6 -#============================================================================== 7 - 8 -package require tablelist_tile 5.16 9 - 10 -namespace eval demo { 11 - variable dir [file dirname [info script]] 12 - 13 - # 14 - # Create two images, needed in the procedure putChildren 15 - # 16 - variable leafImg [image create bitmap -file [file join $dir leaf.xbm] \ 17 - -background coral -foreground gray50] 18 - variable compImg [image create bitmap -file [file join $dir comp.xbm] \ 19 - -background yellow -foreground gray50] 20 -} 21 - 22 -source [file join $demo::dir config_tile.tcl] 23 - 24 -# 25 -# Work around the improper appearance of the tile scrollbars in the aqua theme 26 -# 27 -if {[tablelist::getCurrentTheme] eq "aqua"} { 28 - interp alias {} ttk::scrollbar {} ::scrollbar 29 -} 30 - 31 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 32 -# demo::displayChildren 33 -# 34 -# Displays information on the children of the widget w in a tablelist widget 35 -# contained in a newly created top-level widget. Returns the name of the 36 -# tablelist widget. 37 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 38 -proc demo::displayChildren w { 39 - if {![winfo exists $w]} { 40 - bell 41 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 42 - "Bad window path name \"$w\"" 43 - return "" 44 - } 45 - 46 - # 47 - # Create a top-level widget of the class DemoTop 48 - # 49 - set top .browseTop 50 - for {set n 2} {[winfo exists $top]} {incr n} { 51 - set top .browseTop$n 52 - } 53 - toplevel $top -class DemoTop 54 - 55 - # 56 - # Create a vertically scrolled tablelist widget with 9 dynamic-width 57 - # columns and interactive sort capability within the top-level 58 - # 59 - set tf $top.tf 60 - ttk::frame $tf 61 - set tbl $tf.tbl 62 - set vsb $tf.vsb 63 - tablelist::tablelist $tbl \ 64 - -columns {0 "Path Name" left 65 - 0 "Class" left 66 - 0 "X" right 67 - 0 "Y" right 68 - 0 "Width" right 69 - 0 "Height" right 70 - 0 "Mapped" center 71 - 0 "Viewable" center 72 - 0 "Manager" left} \ 73 - -expandcommand demo::expandCmd -labelcommand demo::labelCmd \ 74 - -yscrollcommand [list $vsb set] -setgrid no -width 0 75 - if {[$tbl cget -selectborderwidth] == 0} { 76 - $tbl configure -spacing 1 77 - } 78 - foreach col {2 3 4 5} { 79 - $tbl columnconfigure $col -sortmode integer 80 - } 81 - foreach col {6 7} { 82 - $tbl columnconfigure $col -formatcommand demo::formatBoolean 83 - } 84 - ttk::scrollbar $vsb -orient vertical -command [list $tbl yview] 85 - 86 - # 87 - # When displaying the information about the children of any 88 - # ancestor of the label widgets, the widths of some of the 89 - # labels and thus also the widths and x coordinates of some 90 - # children may change. For this reason, make sure the items 91 - # will be updated after any change in the sizes of the labels 92 - # 93 - foreach l [$tbl labels] { 94 - bind $l <Configure> [list demo::updateItemsDelayed $tbl] 95 - } 96 - bind $tbl <Configure> [list demo::updateItemsDelayed $tbl] 97 - 98 - # 99 - # Create a pop-up menu with two command entries; bind the script 100 - # associated with its first entry to the <Double-1> event, too 101 - # 102 - set menu $top.menu 103 - menu $menu -tearoff no 104 - $menu add command -label "Display Children" \ 105 - -command [list demo::putChildrenOfSelWidget $tbl] 106 - $menu add command -label "Display Config" \ 107 - -command [list demo::dispConfigOfSelWidget $tbl] 108 - set bodyTag [$tbl bodytag] 109 - bind $bodyTag <Double-1> [list demo::putChildrenOfSelWidget $tbl] 110 - bind $bodyTag <<Button3>> [bind TablelistBody <Button-1>] 111 - bind $bodyTag <<Button3>> +[bind TablelistBody <ButtonRelease-1>] 112 - bind $bodyTag <<Button3>> +[list demo::postPopupMenu $top %X %Y] 113 - 114 - # 115 - # Create three buttons within a tile frame child of the top-level widget 116 - # 117 - set bf $top.bf 118 - ttk::frame $bf 119 - set b1 $bf.b1 120 - set b2 $bf.b2 121 - set b3 $bf.b3 122 - ttk::button $b1 -text "Refresh" 123 - ttk::button $b2 -text "Parent" 124 - ttk::button $b3 -text "Close" -command [list destroy $top] 125 - 126 - # 127 - # Manage the widgets 128 - # 129 - grid $tbl -row 0 -rowspan 2 -column 0 -sticky news 130 - if {[tablelist::getCurrentTheme] eq "aqua"} { 131 - grid [$tbl cornerpath] -row 0 -column 1 -sticky ew 132 - grid $vsb -row 1 -column 1 -sticky ns 133 - } else { 134 - grid $vsb -row 0 -rowspan 2 -column 1 -sticky ns 135 - } 136 - grid rowconfigure $tf 1 -weight 1 137 - grid columnconfigure $tf 0 -weight 1 138 - pack $b1 $b2 $b3 -side left -expand yes -pady 10 139 - pack $bf -side bottom -fill x 140 - pack $tf -side top -expand yes -fill both 141 - 142 - # 143 - # Populate the tablelist with the data of the given widget's children 144 - # 145 - putChildren $w $tbl root 146 - return $tbl 147 -} 148 - 149 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 150 -# demo::putChildren 151 -# 152 -# Outputs the data of the children of the widget w into the tablelist widget 153 -# tbl, as child items of the one identified by nodeIdx. 154 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 155 -proc demo::putChildren {w tbl nodeIdx} { 156 - # 157 - # The following check is necessary because this procedure 158 - # is also invoked by the "Refresh" and "Parent" buttons 159 - # 160 - if {![winfo exists $w]} { 161 - bell 162 - if {[string compare $nodeIdx "root"] == 0} { 163 - set choice [tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon warning \ 164 - -message "Bad window path name \"$w\" -- replacing\ 165 - it with nearest existent ancestor" \ 166 - -type okcancel -default ok \ 167 - -parent [winfo toplevel $tbl]] 168 - if {[string compare $choice "ok"] == 0} { 169 - while {![winfo exists $w]} { 170 - set last [string last "." $w] 171 - if {$last != 0} { 172 - incr last -1 173 - } 174 - set w [string range $w 0 $last] 175 - } 176 - } else { 177 - return "" 178 - } 179 - } else { 180 - return "" 181 - } 182 - } 183 - 184 - if {[string compare $nodeIdx "root"] == 0} { 185 - set top [winfo toplevel $tbl] 186 - wm title $top "Children of the [winfo class $w] Widget \"$w\"" 187 - 188 - $tbl resetsortinfo 189 - $tbl delete 0 end 190 - set row 0 191 - } else { 192 - set row [expr {$nodeIdx + 1}] 193 - } 194 - 195 - # 196 - # Display the data of the children of the 197 - # widget w in the tablelist widget tbl 198 - # 199 - variable leafImg 200 - variable compImg 201 - foreach c [winfo children $w] { 202 - # 203 - # Insert the data of the current child into the tablelist widget 204 - # 205 - set item {} 206 - lappend item \ 207 - [winfo name $c] [winfo class $c] [winfo x $c] [winfo y $c] \ 208 - [winfo width $c] [winfo height $c] [winfo ismapped $c] \ 209 - [winfo viewable $c] [winfo manager $c] 210 - $tbl insertchild $nodeIdx end $item 211 - 212 - # 213 - # Insert an image into the first cell of the row; mark the 214 - # row as collapsed if the child widget has children itself 215 - # 216 - if {[llength [winfo children $c]] == 0} { 217 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,0 -image $leafImg 218 - } else { 219 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,0 -image $compImg 220 - $tbl collapse $row 221 - } 222 - 223 - $tbl rowattrib $row pathName $c 224 - incr row 225 - } 226 - 227 - if {[string compare $nodeIdx "root"] == 0} { 228 - # 229 - # Configure the "Refresh" and "Parent" buttons 230 - # 231 - $top.bf.b1 configure -command [list demo::refreshView $w $tbl] 232 - set b2 $top.bf.b2 233 - set p [winfo parent $w] 234 - if {[string compare $p ""] == 0} { 235 - $b2 configure -state disabled 236 - } else { 237 - $b2 configure -state normal -command \ 238 - [list demo::putChildren $p $tbl root] 239 - } 240 - } 241 -} 242 - 243 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 244 -# demo::expandCmd 245 -# 246 -# Outputs the data of the children of the widget whose leaf name is displayed 247 -# in the first cell of the specified row of the tablelist widget tbl, as child 248 -# items of the one identified by row. 249 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 250 -proc demo::expandCmd {tbl row} { 251 - if {[$tbl childcount $row] == 0} { 252 - set w [$tbl rowattrib $row pathName] 253 - putChildren $w $tbl $row 254 - 255 - # 256 - # Apply the last sorting (if any) to the new items 257 - # 258 - $tbl refreshsorting $row 259 - } 260 -} 261 - 262 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 263 -# demo::formatBoolean 264 -# 265 -# Returns "yes" or "no", according to the specified boolean value. 266 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 267 -proc demo::formatBoolean val { 268 - return [expr {$val ? "yes" : "no"}] 269 -} 270 - 271 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 272 -# demo::labelCmd 273 -# 274 -# Sorts the contents of the tablelist widget tbl by its col'th column and makes 275 -# sure the items will be updated 500 ms later (because one of the items might 276 -# refer to a canvas containing the arrow that displays the sort order). 277 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 278 -proc demo::labelCmd {tbl col} { 279 - tablelist::sortByColumn $tbl $col 280 - updateItemsDelayed $tbl 281 -} 282 - 283 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 284 -# demo::updateItemsDelayed 285 -# 286 -# Arranges for the items of the tablelist widget tbl to be updated 500 ms later. 287 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 288 -proc demo::updateItemsDelayed tbl { 289 - # 290 - # Schedule the demo::updateItems command for execution 291 - # 500 ms later, but only if it is not yet pending 292 - # 293 - if {[string compare [$tbl attrib afterId] ""] == 0} { 294 - $tbl attrib afterId [after 500 [list demo::updateItems $tbl]] 295 - } 296 -} 297 - 298 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 299 -# demo::updateItems 300 -# 301 -# Updates the items of the tablelist widget tbl. 302 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 303 -proc demo::updateItems tbl { 304 - # 305 - # Reset the tablelist's "afterId" attribute 306 - # 307 - $tbl attrib afterId "" 308 - 309 - # 310 - # Update the items 311 - # 312 - set rowCount [$tbl size] 313 - for {set row 0} {$row < $rowCount} {incr row} { 314 - set c [$tbl rowattrib $row pathName] 315 - if {![winfo exists $c]} { 316 - continue 317 - } 318 - 319 - set item {} 320 - lappend item \ 321 - [winfo name $c] [winfo class $c] [winfo x $c] [winfo y $c] \ 322 - [winfo width $c] [winfo height $c] [winfo ismapped $c] \ 323 - [winfo viewable $c] [winfo manager $c] 324 - $tbl rowconfigure $row -text $item 325 - } 326 - 327 - # 328 - # Repeat the last sort operation (if any) 329 - # 330 - $tbl refreshsorting 331 -} 332 - 333 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 334 -# demo::putChildrenOfSelWidget 335 -# 336 -# Outputs the data of the children of the selected widget into the tablelist 337 -# widget tbl. 338 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 339 -proc demo::putChildrenOfSelWidget tbl { 340 - set w [$tbl rowattrib [$tbl curselection] pathName] 341 - if {![winfo exists $w]} { 342 - bell 343 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 344 - "Bad window path name \"$w\"" -parent [winfo toplevel $tbl] 345 - return "" 346 - } 347 - 348 - if {[llength [winfo children $w]] == 0} { 349 - bell 350 - } else { 351 - putChildren $w $tbl root 352 - } 353 -} 354 - 355 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 356 -# demo::dispConfigOfSelWidget 357 -# 358 -# Displays the configuration options of the selected widget within the 359 -# tablelist tbl in a tablelist widget contained in a newly created top-level 360 -# widget. 361 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 362 -proc demo::dispConfigOfSelWidget tbl { 363 - demo::displayConfig [$tbl rowattrib [$tbl curselection] pathName] 364 -} 365 - 366 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 367 -# demo::postPopupMenu 368 -# 369 -# Posts the pop-up menu $top.menu at the given screen position. Before posting 370 -# the menu, the procedure enables/disables its first entry, depending upon 371 -# whether the selected widget has children or not. 372 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 373 -proc demo::postPopupMenu {top rootX rootY} { 374 - set tbl $top.tf.tbl 375 - set w [$tbl rowattrib [$tbl curselection] pathName] 376 - if {![winfo exists $w]} { 377 - bell 378 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 379 - "Bad window path name \"$w\"" -parent $top 380 - return "" 381 - } 382 - 383 - set menu $top.menu 384 - if {[llength [winfo children $w]] == 0} { 385 - $menu entryconfigure 0 -state disabled 386 - } else { 387 - $menu entryconfigure 0 -state normal 388 - } 389 - 390 - tk_popup $menu $rootX $rootY 391 -} 392 - 393 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 394 -# demo::refreshView 395 -# 396 -# Redisplays the data of the children of the widget w in the tablelist widget 397 -# tbl and restores the expanded states of the items as well as the vertical 398 -# view. 399 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 400 -proc demo::refreshView {w tbl} { 401 - # 402 - # Save the vertical view and get the path names of 403 - # the child widgets displayed in the expanded rows 404 - # 405 - set yView [$tbl yview] 406 - foreach key [$tbl expandedkeys] { 407 - set pathName [$tbl rowattrib $key pathName] 408 - set expandedWidgets($pathName) 1 409 - } 410 - 411 - # 412 - # Redisplay the data of the widget's (possibly changed) children and 413 - # restore the expanded states of the children, along with the vertical view 414 - # 415 - putChildren $w $tbl root 416 - restoreExpandedStates $tbl root expandedWidgets 417 - $tbl yview moveto [lindex $yView 0] 418 -} 419 - 420 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 421 -# demo::restoreExpandedStates 422 -# 423 -# Expands those children of the parent identified by nodeIdx that display the 424 -# data of child widgets whose path names are the names of the elements of the 425 -# array specified by the last argument. 426 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 427 -proc demo::restoreExpandedStates {tbl nodeIdx expandedWidgetsName} { 428 - upvar $expandedWidgetsName expandedWidgets 429 - 430 - foreach key [$tbl childkeys $nodeIdx] { 431 - set pathName [$tbl rowattrib $key pathName] 432 - if {[info exists expandedWidgets($pathName)]} { 433 - $tbl expand $key -partly 434 - restoreExpandedStates $tbl $key expandedWidgets 435 - } 436 - } 437 -} 438 - 439 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 440 - 441 -if {$tcl_interactive} { 442 - return "\nTo display information about the children of an arbitrary\ 443 - widget, enter\n\n\tdemo::displayChildren <widgetName>\n" 444 -} else { 445 - wm withdraw . 446 - tk_messageBox -title $argv0 -icon warning -message \ 447 - "Please source this script into\nan interactive wish session" 448 - exit 1 449 -}
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/browse_tile.tcl.
1 -#============================================================================== 2 -# Demonstrates how to use a tablelist widget for displaying information about 3 -# children of an arbitrary widget. 4 -# 5 -# Copyright (c) 2000-2016 Csaba Nemethi (E-mail: csaba.nemethi@t-online.de) 6 -#============================================================================== 7 - 8 -package require tablelist_tile 5.16 9 - 10 -namespace eval demo { 11 - variable dir [file dirname [info script]] 12 - 13 - # 14 - # Create two images, needed in the procedure putChildren 15 - # 16 - variable leafImg [image create bitmap -file [file join $dir leaf.xbm] \ 17 - -background coral -foreground gray50] 18 - variable compImg [image create bitmap -file [file join $dir comp.xbm] \ 19 - -background yellow -foreground gray50] 20 -} 21 - 22 -source [file join $demo::dir config_tile.tcl] 23 - 24 -# 25 -# Work around the improper appearance of the tile scrollbars in the aqua theme 26 -# 27 -if {[tablelist::getCurrentTheme] eq "aqua"} { 28 - interp alias {} ttk::scrollbar {} ::scrollbar 29 -} 30 - 31 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 32 -# demo::displayChildren 33 -# 34 -# Displays information on the children of the widget w in a tablelist widget 35 -# contained in a newly created top-level widget. Returns the name of the 36 -# tablelist widget. 37 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 38 -proc demo::displayChildren w { 39 - if {![winfo exists $w]} { 40 - bell 41 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 42 - "Bad window path name \"$w\"" 43 - return "" 44 - } 45 - 46 - # 47 - # Create a top-level widget of the class DemoTop 48 - # 49 - set top .browseTop 50 - for {set n 2} {[winfo exists $top]} {incr n} { 51 - set top .browseTop$n 52 - } 53 - toplevel $top -class DemoTop 54 - 55 - # 56 - # Create a vertically scrolled tablelist widget with 9 dynamic-width 57 - # columns and interactive sort capability within the top-level 58 - # 59 - set tf $top.tf 60 - ttk::frame $tf 61 - set tbl $tf.tbl 62 - set vsb $tf.vsb 63 - tablelist::tablelist $tbl \ 64 - -columns {0 "Path Name" left 65 - 0 "Class" left 66 - 0 "X" right 67 - 0 "Y" right 68 - 0 "Width" right 69 - 0 "Height" right 70 - 0 "Mapped" center 71 - 0 "Viewable" center 72 - 0 "Manager" left} \ 73 - -labelcommand demo::labelCmd -yscrollcommand [list $vsb set] -width 0 74 - if {[$tbl cget -selectborderwidth] == 0} { 75 - $tbl configure -spacing 1 76 - } 77 - foreach col {2 3 4 5} { 78 - $tbl columnconfigure $col -sortmode integer 79 - } 80 - foreach col {6 7} { 81 - $tbl columnconfigure $col -formatcommand demo::formatBoolean 82 - } 83 - ttk::scrollbar $vsb -orient vertical -command [list $tbl yview] 84 - 85 - # 86 - # When displaying the information about the children of any 87 - # ancestor of the label widgets, the widths of some of the 88 - # labels and thus also the widths and x coordinates of some 89 - # children may change. For this reason, make sure the items 90 - # will be updated after any change in the sizes of the labels 91 - # 92 - foreach l [$tbl labels] { 93 - bind $l <Configure> [list demo::updateItemsDelayed $tbl] 94 - } 95 - bind $tbl <Configure> [list demo::updateItemsDelayed $tbl] 96 - 97 - # 98 - # Create a pop-up menu with two command entries; bind the script 99 - # associated with its first entry to the <Double-1> event, too 100 - # 101 - set menu $top.menu 102 - menu $menu -tearoff no 103 - $menu add command -label "Display Children" \ 104 - -command [list demo::putChildrenOfSelWidget $tbl] 105 - $menu add command -label "Display Config" \ 106 - -command [list demo::dispConfigOfSelWidget $tbl] 107 - set bodyTag [$tbl bodytag] 108 - bind $bodyTag <Double-1> [list demo::putChildrenOfSelWidget $tbl] 109 - bind $bodyTag <<Button3>> [bind TablelistBody <Button-1>] 110 - bind $bodyTag <<Button3>> +[bind TablelistBody <ButtonRelease-1>] 111 - bind $bodyTag <<Button3>> +[list demo::postPopupMenu $top %X %Y] 112 - 113 - # 114 - # Create three buttons within a tile frame child of the top-level widget 115 - # 116 - set bf $top.bf 117 - ttk::frame $bf 118 - set b1 $bf.b1 119 - set b2 $bf.b2 120 - set b3 $bf.b3 121 - ttk::button $b1 -text "Refresh" 122 - ttk::button $b2 -text "Parent" 123 - ttk::button $b3 -text "Close" -command [list destroy $top] 124 - 125 - # 126 - # Manage the widgets 127 - # 128 - grid $tbl -row 0 -rowspan 2 -column 0 -sticky news 129 - if {[tablelist::getCurrentTheme] eq "aqua"} { 130 - grid [$tbl cornerpath] -row 0 -column 1 -sticky ew 131 - grid $vsb -row 1 -column 1 -sticky ns 132 - } else { 133 - grid $vsb -row 0 -rowspan 2 -column 1 -sticky ns 134 - } 135 - grid rowconfigure $tf 1 -weight 1 136 - grid columnconfigure $tf 0 -weight 1 137 - pack $b1 $b2 $b3 -side left -expand yes -pady 10 138 - pack $bf -side bottom -fill x 139 - pack $tf -side top -expand yes -fill both 140 - 141 - # 142 - # Populate the tablelist with the data of the given widget's children 143 - # 144 - putChildren $w $tbl 145 - return $tbl 146 -} 147 - 148 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 149 -# demo::putChildren 150 -# 151 -# Outputs the data of the children of the widget w into the tablelist widget 152 -# tbl. 153 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 154 -proc demo::putChildren {w tbl} { 155 - # 156 - # The following check is necessary because this procedure 157 - # is also invoked by the "Refresh" and "Parent" buttons 158 - # 159 - if {![winfo exists $w]} { 160 - bell 161 - set choice [tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon warning \ 162 - -message "Bad window path name \"$w\" -- replacing\ 163 - it with nearest existent ancestor" \ 164 - -type okcancel -default ok -parent [winfo toplevel $tbl]] 165 - if {[string compare $choice "ok"] == 0} { 166 - while {![winfo exists $w]} { 167 - set last [string last "." $w] 168 - if {$last != 0} { 169 - incr last -1 170 - } 171 - set w [string range $w 0 $last] 172 - } 173 - } else { 174 - return "" 175 - } 176 - } 177 - 178 - set top [winfo toplevel $tbl] 179 - wm title $top "Children of the [winfo class $w] Widget \"$w\"" 180 - 181 - $tbl resetsortinfo 182 - $tbl delete 0 end 183 - 184 - # 185 - # Display the data of the children of the 186 - # widget w in the tablelist widget tbl 187 - # 188 - variable leafImg 189 - variable compImg 190 - foreach c [winfo children $w] { 191 - # 192 - # Insert the data of the current child into the tablelist widget 193 - # 194 - set item {} 195 - lappend item $c [winfo class $c] [winfo x $c] [winfo y $c] \ 196 - [winfo width $c] [winfo height $c] [winfo ismapped $c] \ 197 - [winfo viewable $c] [winfo manager $c] 198 - $tbl insert end $item 199 - 200 - # 201 - # Insert an image into the first cell of the row 202 - # 203 - if {[llength [winfo children $c]] == 0} { 204 - $tbl cellconfigure end,0 -image $leafImg 205 - } else { 206 - $tbl cellconfigure end,0 -image $compImg 207 - } 208 - } 209 - 210 - # 211 - # Configure the "Refresh" and "Parent" buttons 212 - # 213 - $top.bf.b1 configure -command [list demo::putChildren $w $tbl] 214 - set b2 $top.bf.b2 215 - set p [winfo parent $w] 216 - if {[string compare $p ""] == 0} { 217 - $b2 configure -state disabled 218 - } else { 219 - $b2 configure -state normal -command [list demo::putChildren $p $tbl] 220 - } 221 -} 222 - 223 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 224 -# demo::formatBoolean 225 -# 226 -# Returns "yes" or "no", according to the specified boolean value. 227 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 228 -proc demo::formatBoolean val { 229 - return [expr {$val ? "yes" : "no"}] 230 -} 231 - 232 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 233 -# demo::labelCmd 234 -# 235 -# Sorts the contents of the tablelist widget tbl by its col'th column and makes 236 -# sure the items will be updated 500 ms later (because one of the items might 237 -# refer to a canvas containing the arrow that displays the sort order). 238 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 239 -proc demo::labelCmd {tbl col} { 240 - tablelist::sortByColumn $tbl $col 241 - updateItemsDelayed $tbl 242 -} 243 - 244 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 245 -# demo::updateItemsDelayed 246 -# 247 -# Arranges for the items of the tablelist widget tbl to be updated 500 ms later. 248 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 249 -proc demo::updateItemsDelayed tbl { 250 - # 251 - # Schedule the demo::updateItems command for execution 252 - # 500 ms later, but only if it is not yet pending 253 - # 254 - if {[string compare [$tbl attrib afterId] ""] == 0} { 255 - $tbl attrib afterId [after 500 [list demo::updateItems $tbl]] 256 - } 257 -} 258 - 259 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 260 -# demo::updateItems 261 -# 262 -# Updates the items of the tablelist widget tbl. 263 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 264 -proc demo::updateItems tbl { 265 - # 266 - # Reset the tablelist's "afterId" attribute 267 - # 268 - $tbl attrib afterId "" 269 - 270 - # 271 - # Update the items 272 - # 273 - set rowCount [$tbl size] 274 - for {set row 0} {$row < $rowCount} {incr row} { 275 - set c [$tbl cellcget $row,0 -text] 276 - if {![winfo exists $c]} { 277 - continue 278 - } 279 - 280 - set item {} 281 - lappend item $c [winfo class $c] [winfo x $c] [winfo y $c] \ 282 - [winfo width $c] [winfo height $c] [winfo ismapped $c] \ 283 - [winfo viewable $c] [winfo manager $c] 284 - $tbl rowconfigure $row -text $item 285 - } 286 - 287 - # 288 - # Repeat the last sort operation (if any) 289 - # 290 - $tbl refreshsorting 291 -} 292 - 293 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 294 -# demo::putChildrenOfSelWidget 295 -# 296 -# Outputs the data of the children of the selected widget into the tablelist 297 -# widget tbl. 298 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 299 -proc demo::putChildrenOfSelWidget tbl { 300 - set w [$tbl cellcget [$tbl curselection],0 -text] 301 - if {![winfo exists $w]} { 302 - bell 303 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 304 - "Bad window path name \"$w\"" -parent [winfo toplevel $tbl] 305 - return "" 306 - } 307 - 308 - if {[llength [winfo children $w]] == 0} { 309 - bell 310 - } else { 311 - putChildren $w $tbl 312 - } 313 -} 314 - 315 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 316 -# demo::dispConfigOfSelWidget 317 -# 318 -# Displays the configuration options of the selected widget within the 319 -# tablelist tbl in a tablelist widget contained in a newly created top-level 320 -# widget. 321 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 322 -proc demo::dispConfigOfSelWidget tbl { 323 - demo::displayConfig [$tbl cellcget [$tbl curselection],0 -text] 324 -} 325 - 326 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 327 -# demo::postPopupMenu 328 -# 329 -# Posts the pop-up menu $top.menu at the given screen position. Before posting 330 -# the menu, the procedure enables/disables its first entry, depending upon 331 -# whether the selected widget has children or not. 332 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 333 -proc demo::postPopupMenu {top rootX rootY} { 334 - set tbl $top.tf.tbl 335 - set w [$tbl cellcget [$tbl curselection],0 -text] 336 - if {![winfo exists $w]} { 337 - bell 338 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 339 - "Bad window path name \"$w\"" -parent $top 340 - return "" 341 - } 342 - 343 - set menu $top.menu 344 - if {[llength [winfo children $w]] == 0} { 345 - $menu entryconfigure 0 -state disabled 346 - } else { 347 - $menu entryconfigure 0 -state normal 348 - } 349 - 350 - tk_popup $menu $rootX $rootY 351 -} 352 - 353 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 354 - 355 -if {$tcl_interactive} { 356 - return "\nTo display information about the children of an arbitrary\ 357 - widget, enter\n\n\tdemo::displayChildren <widgetName>\n" 358 -} else { 359 - wm withdraw . 360 - tk_messageBox -title $argv0 -icon warning -message \ 361 - "Please source this script into\nan interactive wish session" 362 - exit 1 363 -}
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/bwidget.tcl.
1 -#!/usr/bin/env wish 2 - 3 -#============================================================================== 4 -# Demonstrates the interactive tablelist cell editing with the aid of some 5 -# widgets from the BWidget package and of the Tk core checkbutton and 6 -# menubutton widgets. 7 -# 8 -# Copyright (c) 2004-2016 Csaba Nemethi (E-mail: csaba.nemethi@t-online.de) 9 -#============================================================================== 10 - 11 -package require Tk 8.4 ;# because of "-compound" 12 -package require tablelist 5.16 13 -package require BWidget 14 - 15 -wm title . "Serial Line Configuration" 16 - 17 -# 18 -# Add some entries to the Tk option database 19 -# 20 -set dir [file dirname [info script]] 21 -source [file join $dir option.tcl] 22 -option add *Tablelist*Checkbutton.background white 23 -option add *Tablelist*Checkbutton.activeBackground white 24 -option add *Tablelist*Entry.background white 25 - 26 -# 27 -# Register some widgets from the BWidget package for interactive cell editing 28 -# 29 -tablelist::addBWidgetEntry 30 -tablelist::addBWidgetSpinBox 31 -tablelist::addBWidgetComboBox 32 - 33 -# 34 -# Create the images "checkedImg" and "uncheckedImg", as well as 16 images of 35 -# names like "img#FF0000", displaying colors identified by names like "red" 36 -# 37 -source [file join $dir images.tcl] 38 - 39 -# 40 -# Create a tablelist widget with editable columns (except the first one) 41 -# 42 -set tbl .tbl 43 -tablelist::tablelist $tbl \ 44 - -columns {0 "No." right 45 - 0 "Available" center 46 - 0 "Name" left 47 - 0 "Baud Rate" right 48 - 0 "Data Bits" center 49 - 0 "Parity" left 50 - 0 "Stop Bits" center 51 - 0 "Handshake" left 52 - 0 "Activation Date" center 53 - 0 "Activation Time" center 54 - 0 "Cable Color" center} \ 55 - -editstartcommand editStartCmd -editendcommand editEndCmd \ 56 - -height 0 -width 0 57 -if {[$tbl cget -selectborderwidth] == 0} { 58 - $tbl configure -spacing 1 59 -} 60 -$tbl columnconfigure 0 -sortmode integer 61 -$tbl columnconfigure 1 -name available -editable yes -editwindow checkbutton \ 62 - -formatcommand emptyStr 63 -$tbl columnconfigure 2 -name lineName -editable yes -editwindow Entry \ 64 - -sortmode dictionary 65 -$tbl columnconfigure 3 -name baudRate -editable yes -editwindow ComboBox \ 66 - -sortmode integer 67 -$tbl columnconfigure 4 -name dataBits -editable yes -editwindow SpinBox 68 -$tbl columnconfigure 5 -name parity -editable yes -editwindow ComboBox 69 -$tbl columnconfigure 6 -name stopBits -editable yes -editwindow ComboBox 70 -$tbl columnconfigure 7 -name handshake -editable yes -editwindow ComboBox 71 -$tbl columnconfigure 8 -name actDate -editable yes -editwindow Entry \ 72 - -formatcommand formatDate -sortmode integer 73 -$tbl columnconfigure 9 -name actTime -editable yes -editwindow Entry \ 74 - -formatcommand formatTime -sortmode integer 75 -$tbl columnconfigure 10 -name color -editable yes -editwindow menubutton \ 76 - -formatcommand emptyStr 77 - 78 -proc emptyStr val { return "" } 79 -proc formatDate val { return [clock format $val -format "%Y-%m-%d"] } 80 -proc formatTime val { return [clock format $val -format "%H:%M:%S"] } 81 - 82 -# 83 -# Populate the tablelist widget; set the activation 84 -# date & time to 10 minutes past the current clock value 85 -# 86 -set clock [expr {[clock seconds] + 600}] 87 -for {set i 0; set n 1} {$i < 16} {set i $n; incr n} { 88 - $tbl insert end [list $n [expr {$i < 8}] "Line $n" 9600 8 None 1 XON/XOFF \ 89 - $clock $clock [lindex $colorNames $i]] 90 - 91 - set availImg [expr {($i < 8) ? "checkedImg" : "uncheckedImg"}] 92 - $tbl cellconfigure end,available -image $availImg 93 - $tbl cellconfigure end,color -image img[lindex $colorValues $i] 94 -} 95 - 96 -set btn [button .btn -text "Close" -command exit] 97 - 98 -# 99 -# Manage the widgets 100 -# 101 -pack $btn -side bottom -pady 10 102 -pack $tbl -side top -expand yes -fill both 103 - 104 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 105 -# editStartCmd 106 -# 107 -# Applies some configuration options to the edit window; if the latter is a 108 -# ComboBox, the procedure populates it. 109 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 110 -proc editStartCmd {tbl row col text} { 111 - set w [$tbl editwinpath] 112 - 113 - switch [$tbl columncget $col -name] { 114 - lineName { 115 - # 116 - # Set an upper limit of 20 for the number of characters 117 - # 118 - $w configure -invalidcommand bell -validate key \ 119 - -validatecommand {expr {[string length %P] <= 20}} 120 - } 121 - 122 - baudRate { 123 - # 124 - # Populate the ComboBox and allow no more 125 - # than 6 digits in its Entry component 126 - # 127 - $w configure -values {50 75 110 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 128 - 57600 115200 230400 460800 921600} 129 - $w configure -invalidcommand bell -validate key -validatecommand \ 130 - {expr {[string length %P] <= 6 && [regexp {^[0-9]*$} %S]}} 131 - } 132 - 133 - dataBits { 134 - # 135 - # Configure the SpinBox 136 - # 137 - $w configure -range {5 8 1} -editable no 138 - } 139 - 140 - parity { 141 - # 142 - # Populate the ComboBox and make it non-editable 143 - # 144 - $w configure -values {None Even Odd Mark Space} -editable no 145 - } 146 - 147 - stopBits { 148 - # 149 - # Populate the ComboBox and make it non-editable 150 - # 151 - $w configure -values {1 1.5 2} -editable no 152 - } 153 - 154 - handshake { 155 - # 156 - # Populate the ComboBox and make it non-editable 157 - # 158 - $w configure -values {XON/XOFF RTS/CTS None} -editable no 159 - } 160 - 161 - actDate { 162 - # 163 - # Set an upper limit of 10 for the number of characters 164 - # and allow only digits and the "-" character in it 165 - # 166 - $w configure -invalidcommand bell -validate key -validatecommand \ 167 - {expr {[string length %P] <= 10 && [regexp {^[0-9-]*$} %S]}} 168 - } 169 - 170 - actTime { 171 - # 172 - # Set an upper limit of 8 for the number of characters 173 - # and allow only digits and the ":" character in it 174 - # 175 - $w configure -invalidcommand bell -validate key -validatecommand \ 176 - {expr {[string length %P] <= 8 && [regexp {^[0-9:]*$} %S]}} 177 - } 178 - 179 - color { 180 - # 181 - # Populate the menu and make sure the menubutton will display the 182 - # color name rather than $text, which is "", due to -formatcommand 183 - # 184 - set menu [$w cget -menu] 185 - foreach name $::colorNames { 186 - $menu add radiobutton -compound left \ 187 - -image img$::colors($name) -label $name 188 - } 189 - $menu entryconfigure 8 -columnbreak 1 190 - return [$tbl cellcget $row,$col -text] 191 - } 192 - } 193 - 194 - return $text 195 -} 196 - 197 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 198 -# editEndCmd 199 -# 200 -# Performs a final validation of the text contained in the edit window and gets 201 -# the cell's internal contents. 202 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 203 -proc editEndCmd {tbl row col text} { 204 - switch [$tbl columncget $col -name] { 205 - available { 206 - # 207 - # Update the image contained in the cell 208 - # 209 - set img [expr {$text ? "checkedImg" : "uncheckedImg"}] 210 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,$col -image $img 211 - } 212 - 213 - baudRate { 214 - # 215 - # Check whether the baud rate is an integer in the range 50..921600 216 - # 217 - if {![regexp {^[0-9]+$} $text] || $text < 50 || $text > 921600} { 218 - bell 219 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 220 - "The baud rate must be an integer in the range 50..921600" 221 - $tbl rejectinput 222 - } 223 - } 224 - 225 - actDate { 226 - # 227 - # Get the activation date in seconds from the last argument 228 - # 229 - if {[catch {clock scan $text} actDate] != 0} { 230 - bell 231 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message "Invalid date" 232 - $tbl rejectinput 233 - return "" 234 - } 235 - 236 - # 237 - # Check whether the activation clock value is later than the 238 - # current one; if this is the case then make sure the cells 239 - # "actDate" and "actTime" will have the same internal value 240 - # 241 - set actTime [$tbl cellcget $row,actTime -text] 242 - set actClock [clock scan [formatTime $actTime] -base $actDate] 243 - if {$actClock <= [clock seconds]} { 244 - bell 245 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 246 - "The activation date & time must be in the future" 247 - $tbl rejectinput 248 - } else { 249 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,actTime -text $actClock 250 - return $actClock 251 - } 252 - } 253 - 254 - actTime { 255 - # 256 - # Get the activation clock value in seconds from the last argument 257 - # 258 - set actDate [$tbl cellcget $row,actDate -text] 259 - if {[catch {clock scan $text -base $actDate} actClock] != 0} { 260 - bell 261 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message "Invalid time" 262 - $tbl rejectinput 263 - return "" 264 - } 265 - 266 - # 267 - # Check whether the activation clock value is later than the 268 - # current one; if this is the case then make sure the cells 269 - # "actDate" and "actTime" will have the same internal value 270 - # 271 - if {$actClock <= [clock seconds]} { 272 - bell 273 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 274 - "The activation date & time must be in the future" 275 - $tbl rejectinput 276 - } else { 277 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,actDate -text $actClock 278 - return $actClock 279 - } 280 - } 281 - 282 - color { 283 - # 284 - # Update the image contained in the cell 285 - # 286 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,$col -image img$::colors($text) 287 - } 288 - } 289 - 290 - return $text 291 -}
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/bwidget_tile.tcl.
1 -#!/usr/bin/env wish 2 - 3 -#============================================================================== 4 -# Demonstrates the interactive tablelist cell editing with the aid of some 5 -# widgets from the BWidget package and of the Tk core checkbutton and 6 -# menubutton widgets. 7 -# 8 -# Copyright (c) 2004-2016 Csaba Nemethi (E-mail: csaba.nemethi@t-online.de) 9 -#============================================================================== 10 - 11 -package require tablelist_tile 5.16 12 -package require BWidget 13 - 14 -wm title . "Serial Line Configuration" 15 - 16 -# 17 -# Add some entries to the Tk option database 18 -# 19 -set dir [file dirname [info script]] 20 -source [file join $dir option_tile.tcl] 21 -option add *Tablelist*Checkbutton.background white 22 -option add *Tablelist*Checkbutton.activeBackground white 23 -option add *Tablelist*Entry.background white 24 - 25 -# 26 -# Register some widgets from the BWidget package for interactive cell editing 27 -# 28 -tablelist::addBWidgetEntry 29 -tablelist::addBWidgetSpinBox 30 -tablelist::addBWidgetComboBox 31 - 32 -# 33 -# Create the images "checkedImg" and "uncheckedImg", as well as 16 images of 34 -# names like "img#FF0000", displaying colors identified by names like "red" 35 -# 36 -source [file join $dir images.tcl] 37 - 38 -# 39 -# Improve the window's appearance by using a tile 40 -# frame as a container for the other widgets 41 -# 42 -set f [ttk::frame .f] 43 - 44 -# 45 -# Create a tablelist widget with editable columns (except the first one) 46 -# 47 -set tbl $f.tbl 48 -tablelist::tablelist $tbl \ 49 - -columns {0 "No." right 50 - 0 "Available" center 51 - 0 "Name" left 52 - 0 "Baud Rate" right 53 - 0 "Data Bits" center 54 - 0 "Parity" left 55 - 0 "Stop Bits" center 56 - 0 "Handshake" left 57 - 0 "Activation Date" center 58 - 0 "Activation Time" center 59 - 0 "Cable Color" center} \ 60 - -editstartcommand editStartCmd -editendcommand editEndCmd \ 61 - -height 0 -width 0 62 -if {[$tbl cget -selectborderwidth] == 0} { 63 - $tbl configure -spacing 1 64 -} 65 -$tbl columnconfigure 0 -sortmode integer 66 -$tbl columnconfigure 1 -name available -editable yes -editwindow checkbutton \ 67 - -formatcommand emptyStr 68 -$tbl columnconfigure 2 -name lineName -editable yes -editwindow Entry \ 69 - -sortmode dictionary 70 -$tbl columnconfigure 3 -name baudRate -editable yes -editwindow ComboBox \ 71 - -sortmode integer 72 -$tbl columnconfigure 4 -name dataBits -editable yes -editwindow SpinBox 73 -$tbl columnconfigure 5 -name parity -editable yes -editwindow ComboBox 74 -$tbl columnconfigure 6 -name stopBits -editable yes -editwindow ComboBox 75 -$tbl columnconfigure 7 -name handshake -editable yes -editwindow ComboBox 76 -$tbl columnconfigure 8 -name actDate -editable yes -editwindow Entry \ 77 - -formatcommand formatDate -sortmode integer 78 -$tbl columnconfigure 9 -name actTime -editable yes -editwindow Entry \ 79 - -formatcommand formatTime -sortmode integer 80 -$tbl columnconfigure 10 -name color -editable yes -editwindow menubutton \ 81 - -formatcommand emptyStr 82 - 83 -proc emptyStr val { return "" } 84 -proc formatDate val { return [clock format $val -format "%Y-%m-%d"] } 85 -proc formatTime val { return [clock format $val -format "%H:%M:%S"] } 86 - 87 -# 88 -# Populate the tablelist widget; set the activation 89 -# date & time to 10 minutes past the current clock value 90 -# 91 -set clock [expr {[clock seconds] + 600}] 92 -for {set i 0; set n 1} {$i < 16} {set i $n; incr n} { 93 - $tbl insert end [list $n [expr {$i < 8}] "Line $n" 9600 8 None 1 XON/XOFF \ 94 - $clock $clock [lindex $colorNames $i]] 95 - 96 - set availImg [expr {($i < 8) ? "checkedImg" : "uncheckedImg"}] 97 - $tbl cellconfigure end,available -image $availImg 98 - $tbl cellconfigure end,color -image img[lindex $colorValues $i] 99 -} 100 - 101 -set btn [ttk::button $f.btn -text "Close" -command exit] 102 - 103 -# 104 -# Manage the widgets 105 -# 106 -pack $btn -side bottom -pady 10 107 -pack $tbl -side top -expand yes -fill both 108 -pack $f -expand yes -fill both 109 - 110 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 111 -# editStartCmd 112 -# 113 -# Applies some configuration options to the edit window; if the latter is a 114 -# ComboBox, the procedure populates it. 115 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 116 -proc editStartCmd {tbl row col text} { 117 - set w [$tbl editwinpath] 118 - 119 - switch [$tbl columncget $col -name] { 120 - lineName { 121 - # 122 - # Set an upper limit of 20 for the number of characters 123 - # 124 - $w configure -invalidcommand bell -validate key \ 125 - -validatecommand {expr {[string length %P] <= 20}} 126 - } 127 - 128 - baudRate { 129 - # 130 - # Populate the ComboBox and allow no more 131 - # than 6 digits in its Entry component 132 - # 133 - $w configure -values {50 75 110 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 134 - 57600 115200 230400 460800 921600} 135 - $w configure -invalidcommand bell -validate key -validatecommand \ 136 - {expr {[string length %P] <= 6 && [regexp {^[0-9]*$} %S]}} 137 - } 138 - 139 - dataBits { 140 - # 141 - # Configure the SpinBox 142 - # 143 - $w configure -range {5 8 1} -editable no 144 - } 145 - 146 - parity { 147 - # 148 - # Populate the ComboBox and make it non-editable 149 - # 150 - $w configure -values {None Even Odd Mark Space} -editable no 151 - } 152 - 153 - stopBits { 154 - # 155 - # Populate the ComboBox and make it non-editable 156 - # 157 - $w configure -values {1 1.5 2} -editable no 158 - } 159 - 160 - handshake { 161 - # 162 - # Populate the ComboBox and make it non-editable 163 - # 164 - $w configure -values {XON/XOFF RTS/CTS None} -editable no 165 - } 166 - 167 - actDate { 168 - # 169 - # Set an upper limit of 10 for the number of characters 170 - # and allow only digits and the "-" character in it 171 - # 172 - $w configure -invalidcommand bell -validate key -validatecommand \ 173 - {expr {[string length %P] <= 10 && [regexp {^[0-9-]*$} %S]}} 174 - } 175 - 176 - actTime { 177 - # 178 - # Set an upper limit of 8 for the number of characters 179 - # and allow only digits and the ":" character in it 180 - # 181 - $w configure -invalidcommand bell -validate key -validatecommand \ 182 - {expr {[string length %P] <= 8 && [regexp {^[0-9:]*$} %S]}} 183 - } 184 - 185 - color { 186 - # 187 - # Populate the menu and make sure the menubutton will display the 188 - # color name rather than $text, which is "", due to -formatcommand 189 - # 190 - set menu [$w cget -menu] 191 - foreach name $::colorNames { 192 - $menu add radiobutton -compound left \ 193 - -image img$::colors($name) -label $name 194 - } 195 - $menu entryconfigure 8 -columnbreak 1 196 - return [$tbl cellcget $row,$col -text] 197 - } 198 - } 199 - 200 - return $text 201 -} 202 - 203 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 204 -# editEndCmd 205 -# 206 -# Performs a final validation of the text contained in the edit window and gets 207 -# the cell's internal contents. 208 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 209 -proc editEndCmd {tbl row col text} { 210 - switch [$tbl columncget $col -name] { 211 - available { 212 - # 213 - # Update the image contained in the cell 214 - # 215 - set img [expr {$text ? "checkedImg" : "uncheckedImg"}] 216 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,$col -image $img 217 - } 218 - 219 - baudRate { 220 - # 221 - # Check whether the baud rate is an integer in the range 50..921600 222 - # 223 - if {![regexp {^[0-9]+$} $text] || $text < 50 || $text > 921600} { 224 - bell 225 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 226 - "The baud rate must be an integer in the range 50..921600" 227 - $tbl rejectinput 228 - } 229 - } 230 - 231 - actDate { 232 - # 233 - # Get the activation date in seconds from the last argument 234 - # 235 - if {[catch {clock scan $text} actDate] != 0} { 236 - bell 237 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message "Invalid date" 238 - $tbl rejectinput 239 - return "" 240 - } 241 - 242 - # 243 - # Check whether the activation clock value is later than the 244 - # current one; if this is the case then make sure the cells 245 - # "actDate" and "actTime" will have the same internal value 246 - # 247 - set actTime [$tbl cellcget $row,actTime -text] 248 - set actClock [clock scan [formatTime $actTime] -base $actDate] 249 - if {$actClock <= [clock seconds]} { 250 - bell 251 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 252 - "The activation date & time must be in the future" 253 - $tbl rejectinput 254 - } else { 255 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,actTime -text $actClock 256 - return $actClock 257 - } 258 - } 259 - 260 - actTime { 261 - # 262 - # Get the activation clock value in seconds from the last argument 263 - # 264 - set actDate [$tbl cellcget $row,actDate -text] 265 - if {[catch {clock scan $text -base $actDate} actClock] != 0} { 266 - bell 267 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message "Invalid time" 268 - $tbl rejectinput 269 - return "" 270 - } 271 - 272 - # 273 - # Check whether the activation clock value is later than the 274 - # current one; if this is the case then make sure the cells 275 - # "actDate" and "actTime" will have the same internal value 276 - # 277 - if {$actClock <= [clock seconds]} { 278 - bell 279 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 280 - "The activation date & time must be in the future" 281 - $tbl rejectinput 282 - } else { 283 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,actDate -text $actClock 284 - return $actClock 285 - } 286 - } 287 - 288 - color { 289 - # 290 - # Update the image contained in the cell 291 - # 292 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,$col -image img$::colors($text) 293 - } 294 - } 295 - 296 - return $text 297 -}
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/checked.gif.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/clsdFolder.gif.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/comp.xbm.
1 -#define comp_width 14 2 -#define comp_height 12 3 -static unsigned char comp_bits[] = { 4 - 0xff, 0x3f, 0x01, 0x20, 0xfd, 0x3f, 0x05, 0x20, 0xf5, 0x3f, 0x15, 0x20, 5 - 0xd5, 0x3f, 0x55, 0x20, 0x55, 0x3f, 0x55, 0x21, 0x55, 0x21, 0xff, 0x3f};
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/config.tcl.
1 -#============================================================================== 2 -# Demonstrates how to use a tablelist widget for displaying and editing the 3 -# configuration options of an arbitrary widget. 4 -# 5 -# Copyright (c) 2000-2016 Csaba Nemethi (E-mail: csaba.nemethi@t-online.de) 6 -#============================================================================== 7 - 8 -package require tablelist 5.16 9 - 10 -namespace eval demo { 11 - # 12 - # Get the current windowing system ("x11", "win32", "classic", or "aqua") 13 - # and add some entries to the Tk option database for the following 14 - # widget hierarchy within a top-level widget of the class DemoTop: 15 - # 16 - # Name Class 17 - # ----------------------------- 18 - # tf Frame 19 - # tbl Tabellist 20 - # vsb, hsb Scrollbar 21 - # bf Frame 22 - # b1, b2, b3 Button 23 - # 24 - variable winSys 25 - if {[catch {tk windowingsystem} winSys] != 0} { 26 - switch $::tcl_platform(platform) { 27 - unix { set winSys x11 } 28 - windows { set winSys win32 } 29 - macintosh { set winSys classic } 30 - } 31 - } 32 - if {[string compare $winSys "x11"] == 0} { 33 - # 34 - # Create the font TkDefaultFont if not yet present 35 - # 36 - catch {font create TkDefaultFont -family Helvetica -size -12} 37 - 38 - option add *DemoTop*Font TkDefaultFont 39 - option add *DemoTop*selectBackground #678db2 40 - option add *DemoTop*selectForeground white 41 - } else { 42 - option add *DemoTop.tf.borderWidth 1 43 - option add *DemoTop.tf.relief sunken 44 - option add *DemoTop.tf.tbl.borderWidth 0 45 - option add *DemoTop.tf.tbl.highlightThickness 0 46 - } 47 - option add *DemoTop.tf.tbl.background white 48 - option add *DemoTop.tf.tbl.stripeBackground #f0f0f0 49 - option add *DemoTop.tf.tbl.setGrid yes 50 - option add *DemoTop.tf.tbl*Entry.background white 51 - option add *DemoTop.bf.Button.width 10 52 -} 53 - 54 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 55 -# demo::displayConfig 56 -# 57 -# Displays the configuration options of the widget w in a tablelist widget 58 -# contained in a newly created top-level widget. Returns the name of the 59 -# tablelist widget. 60 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 61 -proc demo::displayConfig w { 62 - if {![winfo exists $w]} { 63 - bell 64 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 65 - "Bad window path name \"$w\"" 66 - return "" 67 - } 68 - 69 - # 70 - # Create a top-level widget of the class DemoTop 71 - # 72 - set top .configTop 73 - for {set n 2} {[winfo exists $top]} {incr n} { 74 - set top .configTop$n 75 - } 76 - toplevel $top -class DemoTop 77 - wm title $top "Configuration Options of the [winfo class $w] Widget \"$w\"" 78 - 79 - # 80 - # Create a scrolled tablelist widget with 5 dynamic-width 81 - # columns and interactive sort capability within the top-level 82 - # 83 - set tf $top.tf 84 - frame $tf 85 - set tbl $tf.tbl 86 - set vsb $tf.vsb 87 - set hsb $tf.hsb 88 - tablelist::tablelist $tbl \ 89 - -columns {0 "Command-Line Name" 90 - 0 "Database/Alias Name" 91 - 0 "Database Class" 92 - 0 "Default Value" 93 - 0 "Current Value"} \ 94 - -labelcommand tablelist::sortByColumn -sortcommand demo::compareAsSet \ 95 - -editendcommand demo::applyValue -height 15 -width 100 -stretch all \ 96 - -xscrollcommand [list $hsb set] -yscrollcommand [list $vsb set] 97 - if {[$tbl cget -selectborderwidth] == 0} { 98 - $tbl configure -spacing 1 99 - } 100 - $tbl columnconfigure 3 -maxwidth 30 101 - $tbl columnconfigure 4 -maxwidth 30 -editable yes 102 - scrollbar $vsb -orient vertical -command [list $tbl yview] 103 - scrollbar $hsb -orient horizontal -command [list $tbl xview] 104 - 105 - # 106 - # Create three buttons within a frame child of the top-level widget 107 - # 108 - set bf $top.bf 109 - frame $bf 110 - set b1 $bf.b1 111 - set b2 $bf.b2 112 - set b3 $bf.b3 113 - button $b1 -text "Refresh" -command [list demo::putConfig $w $tbl] 114 - button $b2 -text "Sort as Set" -command [list $tbl sort] 115 - button $b3 -text "Close" -command [list destroy $top] 116 - 117 - # 118 - # Manage the widgets 119 - # 120 - grid $tbl -row 0 -rowspan 2 -column 0 -sticky news 121 - variable winSys 122 - if {[string compare $winSys "aqua"] == 0} { 123 - grid [$tbl cornerpath] -row 0 -column 1 -sticky ew 124 - grid $vsb -row 1 -column 1 -sticky ns 125 - } else { 126 - grid $vsb -row 0 -rowspan 2 -column 1 -sticky ns 127 - } 128 - grid $hsb -row 2 -column 0 -sticky ew 129 - grid rowconfigure $tf 1 -weight 1 130 - grid columnconfigure $tf 0 -weight 1 131 - pack $b1 $b2 $b3 -side left -expand yes -pady 10 132 - pack $bf -side bottom -fill x 133 - pack $tf -side top -expand yes -fill both 134 - 135 - # 136 - # Populate the tablelist with the configuration options of the given widget 137 - # 138 - putConfig $w $tbl 139 - return $tbl 140 -} 141 - 142 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 143 -# demo::putConfig 144 -# 145 -# Outputs the configuration options of the widget w into the tablelist widget 146 -# tbl. 147 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 148 -proc demo::putConfig {w tbl} { 149 - if {![winfo exists $w]} { 150 - bell 151 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 152 - "Bad window path name \"$w\"" -parent [winfo toplevel $tbl] 153 - return "" 154 - } 155 - 156 - # 157 - # Display the configuration options of w in the tablelist widget tbl 158 - # 159 - $tbl delete 0 end 160 - foreach configSet [$w configure] { 161 - # 162 - # Insert the list configSet into the tablelist widget 163 - # 164 - $tbl insert end $configSet 165 - 166 - if {[llength $configSet] == 2} { 167 - $tbl rowconfigure end -foreground gray50 -selectforeground gray75 168 - $tbl cellconfigure end -editable no 169 - } else { 170 - # 171 - # Change the colors of the first and last cell of the row 172 - # if the current value is different from the default one 173 - # 174 - set default [lindex $configSet 3] 175 - set current [lindex $configSet 4] 176 - if {[string compare $default $current] != 0} { 177 - foreach col {0 4} { 178 - $tbl cellconfigure end,$col \ 179 - -foreground red -selectforeground yellow 180 - } 181 - } 182 - } 183 - } 184 - 185 - $tbl sortbycolumn 0 186 - $tbl activate 0 187 - $tbl attrib widget $w 188 -} 189 - 190 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 191 -# demo::compareAsSet 192 -# 193 -# Compares two items of a tablelist widget used to display the configuration 194 -# options of an arbitrary widget. The item in which the current value is 195 -# different from the default one is considered to be less than the other; if 196 -# both items fulfil this condition or its negation then string comparison is 197 -# applied to the two option names. 198 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 199 -proc demo::compareAsSet {item1 item2} { 200 - foreach {opt1 dbName1 dbClass1 default1 current1} $item1 \ 201 - {opt2 dbName2 dbClass2 default2 current2} $item2 { 202 - set changed1 [expr {[string compare $default1 $current1] != 0}] 203 - set changed2 [expr {[string compare $default2 $current2] != 0}] 204 - if {$changed1 == $changed2} { 205 - return [string compare $opt1 $opt2] 206 - } elseif {$changed1} { 207 - return -1 208 - } else { 209 - return 1 210 - } 211 - } 212 -} 213 - 214 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 215 -# demo::applyValue 216 -# 217 -# Applies the new value of the configuraton option contained in the given row 218 -# of the tablelist widget tbl to the widget whose options are displayed in it, 219 -# and updates the colors of the first and last cell of the row. 220 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 221 -proc demo::applyValue {tbl row col text} { 222 - # 223 - # Try to apply the new value of the option contained in 224 - # the given row to the widget whose options are displayed 225 - # in the tablelist; reject the value if the attempt fails 226 - # 227 - set w [$tbl attrib widget] 228 - set opt [$tbl cellcget $row,0 -text] 229 - if {[catch {$w configure $opt $text} result] != 0} { 230 - bell 231 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message $result \ 232 - -parent [winfo toplevel $tbl] 233 - $tbl rejectinput 234 - return "" 235 - } 236 - 237 - # 238 - # Replace the new option value with its canonical form and 239 - # update the colors of the first and last cell of the row 240 - # 241 - set text [$w cget $opt] 242 - set default [$tbl cellcget $row,3 -text] 243 - if {[string compare $default $text] == 0} { 244 - foreach col {0 4} { 245 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,$col \ 246 - -foreground "" -selectforeground "" 247 - } 248 - } else { 249 - foreach col {0 4} { 250 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,$col \ 251 - -foreground red -selectforeground yellow 252 - } 253 - } 254 - 255 - return $text 256 -} 257 - 258 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 259 - 260 -if {$tcl_interactive} { 261 - return "\nTo display the configuration options of an arbitrary\ 262 - widget, enter\n\n\tdemo::displayConfig <widgetName>\n" 263 -} else { 264 - wm withdraw . 265 - tk_messageBox -title $argv0 -icon warning -message \ 266 - "Please source this script into\nan interactive wish session" 267 - exit 1 268 -}
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/config_tile.tcl.
1 -#============================================================================== 2 -# Demonstrates how to use a tablelist widget for displaying and editing the 3 -# configuration options of an arbitrary widget. 4 -# 5 -# Copyright (c) 2000-2016 Csaba Nemethi (E-mail: csaba.nemethi@t-online.de) 6 -#============================================================================== 7 - 8 -package require tablelist_tile 5.16 9 - 10 -namespace eval demo { 11 - # 12 - # Get the current windowing system ("x11", "win32", or "aqua") 13 - # and add some entries to the Tk option database for the following 14 - # widget hierarchy within a top-level widget of the class DemoTop: 15 - # 16 - # Name Class 17 - # ----------------------------- 18 - # tf TFrame 19 - # tbl Tabellist 20 - # vsb, hsb TScrollbar 21 - # bf TFrame 22 - # b1, b2, b3 TButton 23 - # 24 - if {[tk windowingsystem] eq "x11"} { 25 - option add *DemoTop*Font TkDefaultFont 26 - } else { 27 - option add *DemoTop.tf.borderWidth 1 28 - option add *DemoTop.tf.relief sunken 29 - option add *DemoTop.tf.tbl.borderWidth 0 30 - } 31 - tablelist::setThemeDefaults 32 - set foreground [winfo rgb . $tablelist::themeDefaults(-foreground)] 33 - set selectFg [winfo rgb . $tablelist::themeDefaults(-selectforeground)] 34 - set selectFgEqForeground [expr {$selectFg eq $foreground}] 35 - variable currentTheme [tablelist::getCurrentTheme] 36 - if {$currentTheme ne "aqua"} { 37 - option add *DemoTop*selectBackground \ 38 - $tablelist::themeDefaults(-selectbackground) 39 - option add *DemoTop*selectForeground \ 40 - $tablelist::themeDefaults(-selectforeground) 41 - option add *DemoTop*selectBorderWidth \ 42 - $tablelist::themeDefaults(-selectborderwidth) 43 - } 44 - option add *DemoTop.tf.tbl.background white 45 - option add *DemoTop.tf.tbl.stripeBackground #f0f0f0 46 - option add *DemoTop.tf.tbl.setGrid yes 47 - option add *DemoTop.tf.tbl*Entry.background white 48 - option add *DemoTop.bf.TButton.width 10 49 -} 50 - 51 -# 52 -# Work around the improper appearance of the tile scrollbars in the aqua theme 53 -# 54 -if {$demo::currentTheme eq "aqua"} { 55 - interp alias {} ttk::scrollbar {} ::scrollbar 56 -} 57 - 58 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 59 -# demo::displayConfig 60 -# 61 -# Displays the configuration options of the widget w in a tablelist widget 62 -# contained in a newly created top-level widget. Returns the name of the 63 -# tablelist widget. 64 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 65 -proc demo::displayConfig w { 66 - if {![winfo exists $w]} { 67 - bell 68 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 69 - "Bad window path name \"$w\"" 70 - return "" 71 - } 72 - 73 - # 74 - # Create a top-level widget of the class DemoTop 75 - # 76 - set top .configTop 77 - for {set n 2} {[winfo exists $top]} {incr n} { 78 - set top .configTop$n 79 - } 80 - toplevel $top -class DemoTop 81 - wm title $top "Configuration Options of the [winfo class $w] Widget \"$w\"" 82 - 83 - # 84 - # Create a scrolled tablelist widget with 5 dynamic-width 85 - # columns and interactive sort capability within the top-level 86 - # 87 - set tf $top.tf 88 - ttk::frame $tf 89 - set tbl $tf.tbl 90 - set vsb $tf.vsb 91 - set hsb $tf.hsb 92 - tablelist::tablelist $tbl \ 93 - -columns {0 "Command-Line Name" 94 - 0 "Database/Alias Name" 95 - 0 "Database Class" 96 - 0 "Default Value" 97 - 0 "Current Value"} \ 98 - -labelcommand tablelist::sortByColumn -sortcommand demo::compareAsSet \ 99 - -editendcommand demo::applyValue -height 15 -width 100 -stretch all \ 100 - -xscrollcommand [list $hsb set] -yscrollcommand [list $vsb set] 101 - if {[$tbl cget -selectborderwidth] == 0} { 102 - $tbl configure -spacing 1 103 - } 104 - $tbl columnconfigure 3 -maxwidth 30 105 - $tbl columnconfigure 4 -maxwidth 30 -editable yes 106 - ttk::scrollbar $vsb -orient vertical -command [list $tbl yview] 107 - ttk::scrollbar $hsb -orient horizontal -command [list $tbl xview] 108 - 109 - # 110 - # Create three buttons within a tile frame child of the top-level widget 111 - # 112 - set bf $top.bf 113 - ttk::frame $bf 114 - set b1 $bf.b1 115 - set b2 $bf.b2 116 - set b3 $bf.b3 117 - ttk::button $b1 -text "Refresh" -command [list demo::putConfig $w $tbl] 118 - ttk::button $b2 -text "Sort as Set" -command [list $tbl sort] 119 - ttk::button $b3 -text "Close" -command [list destroy $top] 120 - 121 - # 122 - # Manage the widgets 123 - # 124 - grid $tbl -row 0 -rowspan 2 -column 0 -sticky news 125 - if {[tablelist::getCurrentTheme] eq "aqua"} { 126 - grid [$tbl cornerpath] -row 0 -column 1 -sticky ew 127 - grid $vsb -row 1 -column 1 -sticky ns 128 - } else { 129 - grid $vsb -row 0 -rowspan 2 -column 1 -sticky ns 130 - } 131 - grid $hsb -row 2 -column 0 -sticky ew 132 - grid rowconfigure $tf 1 -weight 1 133 - grid columnconfigure $tf 0 -weight 1 134 - pack $b1 $b2 $b3 -side left -expand yes -pady 10 135 - pack $bf -side bottom -fill x 136 - pack $tf -side top -expand yes -fill both 137 - 138 - # 139 - # Populate the tablelist with the configuration options of the given widget 140 - # 141 - putConfig $w $tbl 142 - return $tbl 143 -} 144 - 145 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 146 -# demo::putConfig 147 -# 148 -# Outputs the configuration options of the widget w into the tablelist widget 149 -# tbl. 150 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 151 -proc demo::putConfig {w tbl} { 152 - if {![winfo exists $w]} { 153 - bell 154 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 155 - "Bad window path name \"$w\"" -parent [winfo toplevel $tbl] 156 - return "" 157 - } 158 - 159 - # 160 - # Display the configuration options of w in the tablelist widget tbl 161 - # 162 - $tbl delete 0 end 163 - foreach configSet [$w configure] { 164 - # 165 - # Insert the list configSet into the tablelist widget 166 - # 167 - $tbl insert end $configSet 168 - 169 - if {[llength $configSet] == 2} { 170 - $tbl rowconfigure end -foreground gray50 -selectforeground gray75 171 - $tbl cellconfigure end -editable no 172 - } else { 173 - # 174 - # Change the colors of the first and last cell of the row 175 - # if the current value is different from the default one 176 - # 177 - set default [lindex $configSet 3] 178 - set current [lindex $configSet 4] 179 - if {[string compare $default $current] != 0} { 180 - foreach col {0 4} { 181 - $tbl cellconfigure end,$col -foreground red 182 - if {$demo::selectFgEqForeground} { 183 - $tbl cellconfigure end,$col -selectforeground red 184 - } else { 185 - $tbl cellconfigure end,$col -selectforeground yellow 186 - } 187 - } 188 - } 189 - } 190 - } 191 - 192 - $tbl sortbycolumn 0 193 - $tbl activate 0 194 - $tbl attrib widget $w 195 -} 196 - 197 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 198 -# demo::compareAsSet 199 -# 200 -# Compares two items of a tablelist widget used to display the configuration 201 -# options of an arbitrary widget. The item in which the current value is 202 -# different from the default one is considered to be less than the other; if 203 -# both items fulfil this condition or its negation then string comparison is 204 -# applied to the two option names. 205 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 206 -proc demo::compareAsSet {item1 item2} { 207 - foreach {opt1 dbName1 dbClass1 default1 current1} $item1 \ 208 - {opt2 dbName2 dbClass2 default2 current2} $item2 { 209 - set changed1 [expr {[string compare $default1 $current1] != 0}] 210 - set changed2 [expr {[string compare $default2 $current2] != 0}] 211 - if {$changed1 == $changed2} { 212 - return [string compare $opt1 $opt2] 213 - } elseif {$changed1} { 214 - return -1 215 - } else { 216 - return 1 217 - } 218 - } 219 -} 220 - 221 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 222 -# demo::applyValue 223 -# 224 -# Applies the new value of the configuraton option contained in the given row 225 -# of the tablelist widget tbl to the widget whose options are displayed in it, 226 -# and updates the colors of the first and last cell of the row. 227 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 228 -proc demo::applyValue {tbl row col text} { 229 - # 230 - # Try to apply the new value of the option contained in 231 - # the given row to the widget whose options are displayed 232 - # in the tablelist; reject the value if the attempt fails 233 - # 234 - set w [$tbl attrib widget] 235 - set opt [$tbl cellcget $row,0 -text] 236 - if {[catch {$w configure $opt $text} result] != 0} { 237 - bell 238 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message $result \ 239 - -parent [winfo toplevel $tbl] 240 - $tbl rejectinput 241 - return "" 242 - } 243 - 244 - # 245 - # Replace the new option value with its canonical form and 246 - # update the colors of the first and last cell of the row 247 - # 248 - set text [$w cget $opt] 249 - set default [$tbl cellcget $row,3 -text] 250 - if {[string compare $default $text] == 0} { 251 - foreach col {0 4} { 252 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,$col \ 253 - -foreground "" -selectforeground "" 254 - } 255 - } else { 256 - foreach col {0 4} { 257 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,$col -foreground red 258 - if {$demo::selectFgEqForeground} { 259 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,$col -selectforeground red 260 - } else { 261 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,$col -selectforeground yellow 262 - } 263 - } 264 - } 265 - 266 - return $text 267 -} 268 - 269 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 270 - 271 -if {$tcl_interactive} { 272 - return "\nTo display the configuration options of an arbitrary\ 273 - widget, enter\n\n\tdemo::displayConfig <widgetName>\n" 274 -} else { 275 - wm withdraw . 276 - tk_messageBox -title $argv0 -icon warning -message \ 277 - "Please source this script into\nan interactive wish session" 278 - exit 1 279 -}
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/dirViewer.tcl.
1 -#!/usr/bin/env wish 2 - 3 -#============================================================================== 4 -# Demonstrates how to use a tablelist widget for displaying the contents of a 5 -# directory. 6 -# 7 -# Copyright (c) 2010-2016 Csaba Nemethi (E-mail: csaba.nemethi@t-online.de) 8 -#============================================================================== 9 - 10 -package require Tk 8.3 11 -package require tablelist 5.16 12 - 13 -# 14 -# Add some entries to the Tk option database 15 -# 16 -set dir [file dirname [info script]] 17 -source [file join $dir option.tcl] 18 - 19 -# 20 -# Create three images 21 -# 22 -image create photo clsdFolderImg -file [file join $dir clsdFolder.gif] 23 -image create photo openFolderImg -file [file join $dir openFolder.gif] 24 -image create photo fileImg -file [file join $dir file.gif] 25 - 26 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 27 -# displayContents 28 -# 29 -# Displays the contents of the directory dir in a tablelist widget. 30 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 31 -proc displayContents dir { 32 - # 33 - # Create a scrolled tablelist widget with 3 dynamic- 34 - # width columns and interactive sort capability 35 - # 36 - set tf .tf 37 - frame $tf -class ScrollArea 38 - set tbl $tf.tbl 39 - set vsb $tf.vsb 40 - set hsb $tf.hsb 41 - tablelist::tablelist $tbl \ 42 - -columns {0 "Name" left 43 - 0 "Size" right 44 - 0 "Date Modified" left} \ 45 - -expandcommand expandCmd -collapsecommand collapseCmd \ 46 - -xscrollcommand [list $hsb set] -yscrollcommand [list $vsb set] \ 47 - -movablecolumns no -setgrid no -showseparators yes -height 18 -width 80 48 - if {[$tbl cget -selectborderwidth] == 0} { 49 - $tbl configure -spacing 1 50 - } 51 - $tbl columnconfigure 0 -formatcommand formatString -sortmode dictionary 52 - $tbl columnconfigure 1 -formatcommand formatSize -sortmode integer 53 - $tbl columnconfigure 2 -formatcommand formatString 54 - scrollbar $vsb -orient vertical -command [list $tbl yview] 55 - scrollbar $hsb -orient horizontal -command [list $tbl xview] 56 - 57 - # 58 - # Create a pop-up menu with one command entry; bind the script 59 - # associated with its entry to the <Double-1> event, too 60 - # 61 - set menu .menu 62 - menu $menu -tearoff no 63 - $menu add command -label "Display Contents" \ 64 - -command [list putContentsOfSelFolder $tbl] 65 - set bodyTag [$tbl bodytag] 66 - bind $bodyTag <<Button3>> [bind TablelistBody <Button-1>] 67 - bind $bodyTag <<Button3>> +[bind TablelistBody <ButtonRelease-1>] 68 - bind $bodyTag <<Button3>> +[list postPopupMenu %X %Y] 69 - bind $bodyTag <Double-1> [list putContentsOfSelFolder $tbl] 70 - 71 - # 72 - # Create three buttons within a frame child of the main widget 73 - # 74 - set bf .bf 75 - frame $bf 76 - set b1 $bf.b1 77 - set b2 $bf.b2 78 - set b3 $bf.b3 79 - button $b1 -width 10 -text "Refresh" 80 - button $b2 -width 10 -text "Parent" 81 - button $b3 -width 10 -text "Close" -command exit 82 - 83 - # 84 - # Manage the widgets 85 - # 86 - grid $tbl -row 0 -rowspan 2 -column 0 -sticky news 87 - global winSys 88 - if {[string compare $winSys "aqua"] == 0} { 89 - grid [$tbl cornerpath] -row 0 -column 1 -sticky ew 90 - grid $vsb -row 1 -column 1 -sticky ns 91 - } else { 92 - grid $vsb -row 0 -rowspan 2 -column 1 -sticky ns 93 - } 94 - grid $hsb -row 2 -column 0 -sticky ew 95 - grid rowconfigure $tf 1 -weight 1 96 - grid columnconfigure $tf 0 -weight 1 97 - pack $b1 $b2 $b3 -side left -expand yes -pady 10 98 - pack $bf -side bottom -fill x 99 - pack $tf -side top -expand yes -fill both 100 - 101 - # 102 - # Populate the tablelist with the contents of the given directory 103 - # 104 - $tbl sortbycolumn 0 105 - putContents $dir $tbl root 106 -} 107 - 108 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 109 -# putContents 110 -# 111 -# Outputs the contents of the directory dir into the tablelist widget tbl, as 112 -# child items of the one identified by nodeIdx. 113 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 114 -proc putContents {dir tbl nodeIdx} { 115 - # 116 - # The following check is necessary because this procedure 117 - # is also invoked by the "Refresh" and "Parent" buttons 118 - # 119 - if {[string compare $dir ""] != 0 && 120 - (![file isdirectory $dir] || ![file readable $dir])} { 121 - bell 122 - if {[string compare $nodeIdx "root"] == 0} { 123 - set choice [tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon warning -message \ 124 - "Cannot read directory \"[file nativename $dir]\"\ 125 - -- replacing it with nearest existent ancestor" \ 126 - -type okcancel -default ok] 127 - if {[string compare $choice "ok"] == 0} { 128 - while {![file isdirectory $dir] || ![file readable $dir]} { 129 - set dir [file dirname $dir] 130 - } 131 - } else { 132 - return "" 133 - } 134 - } else { 135 - return "" 136 - } 137 - } 138 - 139 - if {[string compare $nodeIdx "root"] == 0} { 140 - if {[string compare $dir ""] == 0} { 141 - if {[llength [file volumes]] == 1} { 142 - wm title . "Contents of the File System" 143 - } else { 144 - wm title . "Contents of the File Systems" 145 - } 146 - } else { 147 - wm title . "Contents of the Directory \"[file nativename $dir]\"" 148 - } 149 - 150 - $tbl delete 0 end 151 - set row 0 152 - } else { 153 - set row [expr {$nodeIdx + 1}] 154 - } 155 - 156 - # 157 - # Build a list from the data of the subdirectories and 158 - # files of the directory dir. Prepend a "D" or "F" to 159 - # each entry's name and modification date & time, for 160 - # sorting purposes (it will be removed by formatString). 161 - # 162 - set itemList {} 163 - if {[string compare $dir ""] == 0} { 164 - foreach volume [file volumes] { 165 - lappend itemList [list D[file nativename $volume] -1 D $volume] 166 - } 167 - } else { 168 - foreach entry [glob -nocomplain -types {d f} -directory $dir *] { 169 - if {[catch {file mtime $entry} modTime] != 0} { 170 - continue 171 - } 172 - 173 - if {[file isdirectory $entry]} { 174 - lappend itemList [list D[file tail $entry] -1 \ 175 - D[clock format $modTime -format "%Y-%m-%d %H:%M"] $entry] 176 - } else { 177 - lappend itemList [list F[file tail $entry] [file size $entry] \ 178 - F[clock format $modTime -format "%Y-%m-%d %H:%M"] ""] 179 - } 180 - } 181 - } 182 - 183 - # 184 - # Sort the above list and insert it into the tablelist widget 185 - # tbl as list of children of the row identified by nodeIdx 186 - # 187 - set itemList [$tbl applysorting $itemList] 188 - $tbl insertchildlist $nodeIdx end $itemList 189 - 190 - # 191 - # Insert an image into the first cell of each newly inserted row 192 - # 193 - foreach item $itemList { 194 - set name [lindex $item end] 195 - if {[string compare $name ""] == 0} { ;# file 196 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,0 -image fileImg 197 - } else { ;# directory 198 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,0 -image clsdFolderImg 199 - $tbl rowattrib $row pathName $name 200 - 201 - # 202 - # Mark the row as collapsed if the directory is non-empty 203 - # 204 - if {[file readable $name] && [llength \ 205 - [glob -nocomplain -types {d f} -directory $name *]] != 0} { 206 - $tbl collapse $row 207 - } 208 - } 209 - 210 - incr row 211 - } 212 - 213 - if {[string compare $nodeIdx "root"] == 0} { 214 - # 215 - # Configure the "Refresh" and "Parent" buttons 216 - # 217 - .bf.b1 configure -command [list refreshView $dir $tbl] 218 - set b2 .bf.b2 219 - if {[string compare $dir ""] == 0} { 220 - $b2 configure -state disabled 221 - } else { 222 - $b2 configure -state normal 223 - set p [file dirname $dir] 224 - if {[string compare $p $dir] == 0} { 225 - $b2 configure -command [list putContents "" $tbl root] 226 - } else { 227 - $b2 configure -command [list putContents $p $tbl root] 228 - } 229 - } 230 - } 231 -} 232 - 233 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 234 -# formatString 235 -# 236 -# Returns the substring obtained from the specified value by removing its first 237 -# character. 238 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 239 -proc formatString val { 240 - return [string range $val 1 end] 241 -} 242 - 243 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 244 -# formatSize 245 -# 246 -# Returns an empty string if the specified value is negative and the value 247 -# itself in user-friendly format otherwise. 248 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 249 -proc formatSize val { 250 - if {$val < 0} { 251 - return "" 252 - } elseif {$val < 1024} { 253 - return "$val bytes" 254 - } elseif {$val < 1048576} { 255 - return [format "%.1f KB" [expr {$val / 1024.0}]] 256 - } elseif {$val < 1073741824} { 257 - return [format "%.1f MB" [expr {$val / 1048576.0}]] 258 - } else { 259 - return [format "%.1f GB" [expr {$val / 1073741824.0}]] 260 - } 261 -} 262 - 263 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 264 -# expandCmd 265 -# 266 -# Outputs the contents of the directory whose leaf name is displayed in the 267 -# first cell of the specified row of the tablelist widget tbl, as child items 268 -# of the one identified by row, and updates the image displayed in that cell. 269 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 270 -proc expandCmd {tbl row} { 271 - if {[$tbl childcount $row] == 0} { 272 - set dir [$tbl rowattrib $row pathName] 273 - putContents $dir $tbl $row 274 - } 275 - 276 - if {[$tbl childcount $row] != 0} { 277 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,0 -image openFolderImg 278 - } 279 -} 280 - 281 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 282 -# collapseCmd 283 -# 284 -# Updates the image displayed in the first cell of the specified row of the 285 -# tablelist widget tbl. 286 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 287 -proc collapseCmd {tbl row} { 288 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,0 -image clsdFolderImg 289 -} 290 - 291 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 292 -# putContentsOfSelFolder 293 -# 294 -# Outputs the contents of the selected folder into the tablelist widget tbl. 295 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 296 -proc putContentsOfSelFolder tbl { 297 - set row [$tbl curselection] 298 - if {[$tbl hasrowattrib $row pathName]} { ;# directory item 299 - set dir [$tbl rowattrib $row pathName] 300 - if {[file isdirectory $dir] && [file readable $dir]} { 301 - if {[llength [glob -nocomplain -types {d f} -directory $dir *]] 302 - == 0} { 303 - bell 304 - } else { 305 - putContents $dir $tbl root 306 - } 307 - } else { 308 - bell 309 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 310 - "Cannot read directory \"[file nativename $dir]\"" 311 - return "" 312 - } 313 - } else { ;# file item 314 - bell 315 - } 316 -} 317 - 318 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 319 -# postPopupMenu 320 -# 321 -# Posts the pop-up menu .menu at the given screen position. Before posting 322 -# the menu, the procedure enables/disables its only entry, depending upon 323 -# whether the selected item represents a readable directory or not. 324 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 325 -proc postPopupMenu {rootX rootY} { 326 - set tbl .tf.tbl 327 - set row [$tbl curselection] 328 - set menu .menu 329 - if {[$tbl hasrowattrib $row pathName]} { ;# directory item 330 - set dir [$tbl rowattrib $row pathName] 331 - if {[file isdirectory $dir] && [file readable $dir]} { 332 - if {[llength [glob -nocomplain -types {d f} -directory $dir *]] 333 - == 0} { 334 - $menu entryconfigure 0 -state disabled 335 - } else { 336 - $menu entryconfigure 0 -state normal 337 - } 338 - } else { 339 - bell 340 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 341 - "Cannot read directory \"[file nativename $dir]\"" 342 - return "" 343 - } 344 - } else { ;# file item 345 - $menu entryconfigure 0 -state disabled 346 - } 347 - 348 - tk_popup $menu $rootX $rootY 349 -} 350 - 351 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 352 -# refreshView 353 -# 354 -# Redisplays the contents of the directory dir in the tablelist widget tbl and 355 -# restores the expanded states of the folders as well as the vertical view. 356 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 357 -proc refreshView {dir tbl} { 358 - # 359 - # Save the vertical view and get the path names 360 - # of the folders displayed in the expanded rows 361 - # 362 - set yView [$tbl yview] 363 - foreach key [$tbl expandedkeys] { 364 - set pathName [$tbl rowattrib $key pathName] 365 - set expandedFolders($pathName) 1 366 - } 367 - 368 - # 369 - # Redisplay the directory's (possibly changed) contents and restore 370 - # the expanded states of the folders, along with the vertical view 371 - # 372 - putContents $dir $tbl root 373 - restoreExpandedStates $tbl root expandedFolders 374 - $tbl yview moveto [lindex $yView 0] 375 -} 376 - 377 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 378 -# restoreExpandedStates 379 -# 380 -# Expands those children of the parent identified by nodeIdx that display 381 -# folders whose path names are the names of the elements of the array specified 382 -# by the last argument. 383 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 384 -proc restoreExpandedStates {tbl nodeIdx expandedFoldersName} { 385 - upvar $expandedFoldersName expandedFolders 386 - 387 - foreach key [$tbl childkeys $nodeIdx] { 388 - set pathName [$tbl rowattrib $key pathName] 389 - if {[string compare $pathName ""] != 0 && 390 - [info exists expandedFolders($pathName)]} { 391 - $tbl expand $key -partly 392 - restoreExpandedStates $tbl $key expandedFolders 393 - } 394 - } 395 -} 396 - 397 -displayContents ""
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/dirViewer_tile.tcl.
1 -#!/usr/bin/env wish 2 - 3 -#============================================================================== 4 -# Demonstrates how to use a tablelist widget for displaying the contents of a 5 -# directory. 6 -# 7 -# Copyright (c) 2010-2016 Csaba Nemethi (E-mail: csaba.nemethi@t-online.de) 8 -#============================================================================== 9 - 10 -package require tablelist_tile 5.16 11 - 12 -# 13 -# Add some entries to the Tk option database 14 -# 15 -set dir [file dirname [info script]] 16 -source [file join $dir option_tile.tcl] 17 - 18 -# 19 -# Create three images 20 -# 21 -image create photo clsdFolderImg -file [file join $dir clsdFolder.gif] 22 -image create photo openFolderImg -file [file join $dir openFolder.gif] 23 -image create photo fileImg -file [file join $dir file.gif] 24 - 25 -# 26 -# Work around the improper appearance of the tile scrollbars in the aqua theme 27 -# 28 -if {[tablelist::getCurrentTheme] eq "aqua"} { 29 - interp alias {} ttk::scrollbar {} ::scrollbar 30 -} 31 - 32 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 33 -# displayContents 34 -# 35 -# Displays the contents of the directory dir in a tablelist widget. 36 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 37 -proc displayContents dir { 38 - # 39 - # Create a scrolled tablelist widget with 3 dynamic- 40 - # width columns and interactive sort capability 41 - # 42 - set tf .tf 43 - ttk::frame $tf -class ScrollArea 44 - set tbl $tf.tbl 45 - set vsb $tf.vsb 46 - set hsb $tf.hsb 47 - tablelist::tablelist $tbl \ 48 - -columns {0 "Name" left 49 - 0 "Size" right 50 - 0 "Date Modified" left} \ 51 - -expandcommand expandCmd -collapsecommand collapseCmd \ 52 - -xscrollcommand [list $hsb set] -yscrollcommand [list $vsb set] \ 53 - -movablecolumns no -setgrid no -showseparators yes -height 18 -width 80 54 - if {[$tbl cget -selectborderwidth] == 0} { 55 - $tbl configure -spacing 1 56 - } 57 - $tbl columnconfigure 0 -formatcommand formatString -sortmode dictionary 58 - $tbl columnconfigure 1 -formatcommand formatSize -sortmode integer 59 - $tbl columnconfigure 2 -formatcommand formatString 60 - ttk::scrollbar $vsb -orient vertical -command [list $tbl yview] 61 - ttk::scrollbar $hsb -orient horizontal -command [list $tbl xview] 62 - 63 - # 64 - # Create a pop-up menu with one command entry; bind the script 65 - # associated with its entry to the <Double-1> event, too 66 - # 67 - set menu .menu 68 - menu $menu -tearoff no 69 - $menu add command -label "Display Contents" \ 70 - -command [list putContentsOfSelFolder $tbl] 71 - set bodyTag [$tbl bodytag] 72 - bind $bodyTag <<Button3>> [bind TablelistBody <Button-1>] 73 - bind $bodyTag <<Button3>> +[bind TablelistBody <ButtonRelease-1>] 74 - bind $bodyTag <<Button3>> +[list postPopupMenu %X %Y] 75 - bind $bodyTag <Double-1> [list putContentsOfSelFolder $tbl] 76 - 77 - # 78 - # Create three buttons within a frame child of the main widget 79 - # 80 - set bf .bf 81 - ttk::frame $bf 82 - set b1 $bf.b1 83 - set b2 $bf.b2 84 - set b3 $bf.b3 85 - ttk::button $b1 -width 10 -text "Refresh" 86 - ttk::button $b2 -width 10 -text "Parent" 87 - ttk::button $b3 -width 10 -text "Close" -command exit 88 - 89 - # 90 - # Manage the widgets 91 - # 92 - grid $tbl -row 0 -rowspan 2 -column 0 -sticky news 93 - if {[tablelist::getCurrentTheme] eq "aqua"} { 94 - grid [$tbl cornerpath] -row 0 -column 1 -sticky ew 95 - grid $vsb -row 1 -column 1 -sticky ns 96 - } else { 97 - grid $vsb -row 0 -rowspan 2 -column 1 -sticky ns 98 - } 99 - grid $hsb -row 2 -column 0 -sticky ew 100 - grid rowconfigure $tf 1 -weight 1 101 - grid columnconfigure $tf 0 -weight 1 102 - pack $b1 $b2 $b3 -side left -expand yes -pady 10 103 - pack $bf -side bottom -fill x 104 - pack $tf -side top -expand yes -fill both 105 - 106 - # 107 - # Populate the tablelist with the contents of the given directory 108 - # 109 - $tbl sortbycolumn 0 110 - putContents $dir $tbl root 111 -} 112 - 113 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 114 -# putContents 115 -# 116 -# Outputs the contents of the directory dir into the tablelist widget tbl, as 117 -# child items of the one identified by nodeIdx. 118 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 119 -proc putContents {dir tbl nodeIdx} { 120 - # 121 - # The following check is necessary because this procedure 122 - # is also invoked by the "Refresh" and "Parent" buttons 123 - # 124 - if {[string compare $dir ""] != 0 && 125 - (![file isdirectory $dir] || ![file readable $dir])} { 126 - bell 127 - if {[string compare $nodeIdx "root"] == 0} { 128 - set choice [tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon warning -message \ 129 - "Cannot read directory \"[file nativename $dir]\"\ 130 - -- replacing it with nearest existent ancestor" \ 131 - -type okcancel -default ok] 132 - if {[string compare $choice "ok"] == 0} { 133 - while {![file isdirectory $dir] || ![file readable $dir]} { 134 - set dir [file dirname $dir] 135 - } 136 - } else { 137 - return "" 138 - } 139 - } else { 140 - return "" 141 - } 142 - } 143 - 144 - if {[string compare $nodeIdx "root"] == 0} { 145 - if {[string compare $dir ""] == 0} { 146 - if {[llength [file volumes]] == 1} { 147 - wm title . "Contents of the File System" 148 - } else { 149 - wm title . "Contents of the File Systems" 150 - } 151 - } else { 152 - wm title . "Contents of the Directory \"[file nativename $dir]\"" 153 - } 154 - 155 - $tbl delete 0 end 156 - set row 0 157 - } else { 158 - set row [expr {$nodeIdx + 1}] 159 - } 160 - 161 - # 162 - # Build a list from the data of the subdirectories and 163 - # files of the directory dir. Prepend a "D" or "F" to 164 - # each entry's name and modification date & time, for 165 - # sorting purposes (it will be removed by formatString). 166 - # 167 - set itemList {} 168 - if {[string compare $dir ""] == 0} { 169 - foreach volume [file volumes] { 170 - lappend itemList [list D[file nativename $volume] -1 D $volume] 171 - } 172 - } else { 173 - foreach entry [glob -nocomplain -types {d f} -directory $dir *] { 174 - if {[catch {file mtime $entry} modTime] != 0} { 175 - continue 176 - } 177 - 178 - if {[file isdirectory $entry]} { 179 - lappend itemList [list D[file tail $entry] -1 \ 180 - D[clock format $modTime -format "%Y-%m-%d %H:%M"] $entry] 181 - } else { 182 - lappend itemList [list F[file tail $entry] [file size $entry] \ 183 - F[clock format $modTime -format "%Y-%m-%d %H:%M"] ""] 184 - } 185 - } 186 - } 187 - 188 - # 189 - # Sort the above list and insert it into the tablelist widget 190 - # tbl as list of children of the row identified by nodeIdx 191 - # 192 - set itemList [$tbl applysorting $itemList] 193 - $tbl insertchildlist $nodeIdx end $itemList 194 - 195 - # 196 - # Insert an image into the first cell of each newly inserted row 197 - # 198 - foreach item $itemList { 199 - set name [lindex $item end] 200 - if {[string compare $name ""] == 0} { ;# file 201 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,0 -image fileImg 202 - } else { ;# directory 203 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,0 -image clsdFolderImg 204 - $tbl rowattrib $row pathName $name 205 - 206 - # 207 - # Mark the row as collapsed if the directory is non-empty 208 - # 209 - if {[file readable $name] && [llength \ 210 - [glob -nocomplain -types {d f} -directory $name *]] != 0} { 211 - $tbl collapse $row 212 - } 213 - } 214 - 215 - incr row 216 - } 217 - 218 - if {[string compare $nodeIdx "root"] == 0} { 219 - # 220 - # Configure the "Refresh" and "Parent" buttons 221 - # 222 - .bf.b1 configure -command [list refreshView $dir $tbl] 223 - set b2 .bf.b2 224 - if {[string compare $dir ""] == 0} { 225 - $b2 configure -state disabled 226 - } else { 227 - $b2 configure -state normal 228 - set p [file dirname $dir] 229 - if {[string compare $p $dir] == 0} { 230 - $b2 configure -command [list putContents "" $tbl root] 231 - } else { 232 - $b2 configure -command [list putContents $p $tbl root] 233 - } 234 - } 235 - } 236 -} 237 - 238 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 239 -# formatString 240 -# 241 -# Returns the substring obtained from the specified value by removing its first 242 -# character. 243 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 244 -proc formatString val { 245 - return [string range $val 1 end] 246 -} 247 - 248 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 249 -# formatSize 250 -# 251 -# Returns an empty string if the specified value is negative and the value 252 -# itself in user-friendly format otherwise. 253 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 254 -proc formatSize val { 255 - if {$val < 0} { 256 - return "" 257 - } elseif {$val < 1024} { 258 - return "$val bytes" 259 - } elseif {$val < 1048576} { 260 - return [format "%.1f KB" [expr {$val / 1024.0}]] 261 - } elseif {$val < 1073741824} { 262 - return [format "%.1f MB" [expr {$val / 1048576.0}]] 263 - } else { 264 - return [format "%.1f GB" [expr {$val / 1073741824.0}]] 265 - } 266 -} 267 - 268 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 269 -# expandCmd 270 -# 271 -# Outputs the contents of the directory whose leaf name is displayed in the 272 -# first cell of the specified row of the tablelist widget tbl, as child items 273 -# of the one identified by row, and updates the image displayed in that cell. 274 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 275 -proc expandCmd {tbl row} { 276 - if {[$tbl childcount $row] == 0} { 277 - set dir [$tbl rowattrib $row pathName] 278 - putContents $dir $tbl $row 279 - } 280 - 281 - if {[$tbl childcount $row] != 0} { 282 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,0 -image openFolderImg 283 - } 284 -} 285 - 286 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 287 -# collapseCmd 288 -# 289 -# Updates the image displayed in the first cell of the specified row of the 290 -# tablelist widget tbl. 291 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 292 -proc collapseCmd {tbl row} { 293 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,0 -image clsdFolderImg 294 -} 295 - 296 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 297 -# putContentsOfSelFolder 298 -# 299 -# Outputs the contents of the selected folder into the tablelist widget tbl. 300 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 301 -proc putContentsOfSelFolder tbl { 302 - set row [$tbl curselection] 303 - if {[$tbl hasrowattrib $row pathName]} { ;# directory item 304 - set dir [$tbl rowattrib $row pathName] 305 - if {[file isdirectory $dir] && [file readable $dir]} { 306 - if {[llength [glob -nocomplain -types {d f} -directory $dir *]] 307 - == 0} { 308 - bell 309 - } else { 310 - putContents $dir $tbl root 311 - } 312 - } else { 313 - bell 314 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 315 - "Cannot read directory \"[file nativename $dir]\"" 316 - return "" 317 - } 318 - } else { ;# file item 319 - bell 320 - } 321 -} 322 - 323 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 324 -# postPopupMenu 325 -# 326 -# Posts the pop-up menu .menu at the given screen position. Before posting 327 -# the menu, the procedure enables/disables its only entry, depending upon 328 -# whether the selected item represents a readable directory or not. 329 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 330 -proc postPopupMenu {rootX rootY} { 331 - set tbl .tf.tbl 332 - set row [$tbl curselection] 333 - set menu .menu 334 - if {[$tbl hasrowattrib $row pathName]} { ;# directory item 335 - set dir [$tbl rowattrib $row pathName] 336 - if {[file isdirectory $dir] && [file readable $dir]} { 337 - if {[llength [glob -nocomplain -types {d f} -directory $dir *]] 338 - == 0} { 339 - $menu entryconfigure 0 -state disabled 340 - } else { 341 - $menu entryconfigure 0 -state normal 342 - } 343 - } else { 344 - bell 345 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 346 - "Cannot read directory \"[file nativename $dir]\"" 347 - return "" 348 - } 349 - } else { ;# file item 350 - $menu entryconfigure 0 -state disabled 351 - } 352 - 353 - tk_popup $menu $rootX $rootY 354 -} 355 - 356 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 357 -# refreshView 358 -# 359 -# Redisplays the contents of the directory dir in the tablelist widget tbl and 360 -# restores the expanded states of the folders as well as the vertical view. 361 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 362 -proc refreshView {dir tbl} { 363 - # 364 - # Save the vertical view and get the path names 365 - # of the folders displayed in the expanded rows 366 - # 367 - set yView [$tbl yview] 368 - foreach key [$tbl expandedkeys] { 369 - set pathName [$tbl rowattrib $key pathName] 370 - set expandedFolders($pathName) 1 371 - } 372 - 373 - # 374 - # Redisplay the directory's (possibly changed) contents and restore 375 - # the expanded states of the folders, along with the vertical view 376 - # 377 - putContents $dir $tbl root 378 - restoreExpandedStates $tbl root expandedFolders 379 - $tbl yview moveto [lindex $yView 0] 380 -} 381 - 382 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 383 -# restoreExpandedStates 384 -# 385 -# Expands those children of the parent identified by nodeIdx that display 386 -# folders whose path names are the names of the elements of the array specified 387 -# by the last argument. 388 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 389 -proc restoreExpandedStates {tbl nodeIdx expandedFoldersName} { 390 - upvar $expandedFoldersName expandedFolders 391 - 392 - foreach key [$tbl childkeys $nodeIdx] { 393 - set pathName [$tbl rowattrib $key pathName] 394 - if {[string compare $pathName ""] != 0 && 395 - [info exists expandedFolders($pathName)]} { 396 - $tbl expand $key -partly 397 - restoreExpandedStates $tbl $key expandedFolders 398 - } 399 - } 400 -} 401 - 402 -displayContents ""
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/embeddedWindows.tcl.
1 -#!/usr/bin/env wish 2 - 3 -#============================================================================== 4 -# Demonstrates the use of embedded windows in tablelist widgets. 5 -# 6 -# Copyright (c) 2004-2016 Csaba Nemethi (E-mail: csaba.nemethi@t-online.de) 7 -#============================================================================== 8 - 9 -package require tablelist 5.16 10 - 11 -wm title . "Tk Library Scripts" 12 - 13 -# 14 -# Add some entries to the Tk option database 15 -# 16 -set dir [file dirname [info script]] 17 -source [file join $dir option.tcl] 18 - 19 -# 20 -# Create the font TkFixedFont if not yet present 21 -# 22 -catch {font create TkFixedFont -family Courier -size -12} 23 - 24 -# 25 -# Create an image to be displayed in buttons embedded in a tablelist widget 26 -# 27 -image create photo openImg -file [file join $dir open.gif] 28 - 29 -# 30 -# Create a vertically scrolled tablelist widget with 5 31 -# dynamic-width columns and interactive sort capability 32 -# 33 -set tf .tf 34 -frame $tf -class ScrollArea 35 -set tbl $tf.tbl 36 -set vsb $tf.vsb 37 -tablelist::tablelist $tbl \ 38 - -columns {0 "File Name" left 39 - 0 "Bar Chart" center 40 - 0 "File Size" right 41 - 0 "View" center 42 - 0 "Seen" center} \ 43 - -setgrid no -yscrollcommand [list $vsb set] -width 0 44 -if {[$tbl cget -selectborderwidth] == 0} { 45 - $tbl configure -spacing 1 46 -} 47 -$tbl columnconfigure 0 -name fileName 48 -$tbl columnconfigure 1 -formatcommand emptyStr -sortmode integer 49 -$tbl columnconfigure 2 -name fileSize -sortmode integer 50 -$tbl columnconfigure 4 -name seen 51 -scrollbar $vsb -orient vertical -command [list $tbl yview] 52 - 53 -proc emptyStr val { return "" } 54 - 55 -eval font create BoldFont [font actual [$tbl cget -font]] -weight bold 56 - 57 -# 58 -# Populate the tablelist widget 59 -# 60 -cd $tk_library 61 -set maxFileSize 0 62 -foreach fileName [lsort [glob *.tcl]] { 63 - set fileSize [file size $fileName] 64 - $tbl insert end [list $fileName $fileSize $fileSize "" no] 65 - 66 - if {$fileSize > $maxFileSize} { 67 - set maxFileSize $fileSize 68 - } 69 -} 70 - 71 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 72 -# createFrame 73 -# 74 -# Creates a frame widget w to be embedded into the specified cell of the 75 -# tablelist widget tbl, as well as a child frame representing the size of the 76 -# file whose name is diplayed in the first column of the cell's row. 77 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 78 -proc createFrame {tbl row col w} { 79 - # 80 - # Create the frame and replace the binding tag "Frame" 81 - # with "TablelistBody" in the list of its binding tags 82 - # 83 - frame $w -width 102 -height 14 -background ivory -borderwidth 1 \ 84 - -relief solid 85 - bindtags $w [lreplace [bindtags $w] 1 1 TablelistBody] 86 - 87 - # 88 - # Create the child frame and replace the binding tag "Frame" 89 - # with "TablelistBody" in the list of its binding tags 90 - # 91 - frame $w.f -height 12 -background red -borderwidth 1 -relief raised 92 - bindtags $w.f [lreplace [bindtags $w] 1 1 TablelistBody] 93 - 94 - # 95 - # Manage the child frame 96 - # 97 - set fileSize [$tbl cellcget $row,fileSize -text] 98 - place $w.f -relwidth [expr {double($fileSize) / $::maxFileSize}] 99 -} 100 - 101 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 102 -# createButton 103 -# 104 -# Creates a button widget w to be embedded into the specified cell of the 105 -# tablelist widget tbl. 106 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 107 -proc createButton {tbl row col w} { 108 - set key [$tbl getkeys $row] 109 - button $w -image openImg -highlightthickness 0 -takefocus 0 \ 110 - -command [list viewFile $tbl $key] 111 -} 112 - 113 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 114 -# viewFile 115 -# 116 -# Displays the contents of the file whose name is contained in the row with the 117 -# given key of the tablelist widget tbl. 118 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 119 -proc viewFile {tbl key} { 120 - set top .top$key 121 - if {[winfo exists $top]} { 122 - raise $top 123 - return "" 124 - } 125 - 126 - toplevel $top 127 - set fileName [$tbl cellcget k$key,fileName -text] 128 - wm title $top "File \"$fileName\"" 129 - 130 - # 131 - # Create a vertically scrolled text widget as a grandchild of the toplevel 132 - # 133 - set tf $top.tf 134 - frame $tf -class ScrollArea 135 - set txt $tf.txt 136 - set vsb $tf.vsb 137 - text $txt -background white -font TkFixedFont -setgrid yes \ 138 - -yscrollcommand [list $vsb set] 139 - catch {$txt configure -tabstyle wordprocessor} ;# for Tk 8.5 and above 140 - scrollbar $vsb -orient vertical -command [list $txt yview] 141 - 142 - # 143 - # Insert the file's contents into the text widget 144 - # 145 - set chan [open $fileName] 146 - $txt insert end [read $chan] 147 - close $chan 148 - 149 - set btn [button $top.btn -text "Close" -command [list destroy $top]] 150 - 151 - # 152 - # Manage the widgets 153 - # 154 - grid $txt -row 0 -column 0 -sticky news 155 - grid $vsb -row 0 -column 1 -sticky ns 156 - grid rowconfigure $tf 0 -weight 1 157 - grid columnconfigure $tf 0 -weight 1 158 - pack $btn -side bottom -pady 10 159 - pack $tf -side top -expand yes -fill both 160 - 161 - # 162 - # Mark the file as seen 163 - # 164 - $tbl rowconfigure k$key -font BoldFont 165 - $tbl cellconfigure k$key,seen -text yes 166 -} 167 - 168 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 169 - 170 -# 171 -# Create embedded windows in the columns no. 1 and 3 172 -# 173 -set rowCount [$tbl size] 174 -for {set row 0} {$row < $rowCount} {incr row} { 175 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,1 -window createFrame -stretchwindow yes 176 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,3 -window createButton 177 -} 178 - 179 -set btn [button .btn -text "Close" -command exit] 180 - 181 -# 182 -# Manage the widgets 183 -# 184 -grid $tbl -row 0 -rowspan 2 -column 0 -sticky news 185 -if {[string compare $winSys "aqua"] == 0} { 186 - grid [$tbl cornerpath] -row 0 -column 1 -sticky ew 187 - grid $vsb -row 1 -column 1 -sticky ns 188 -} else { 189 - grid $vsb -row 0 -rowspan 2 -column 1 -sticky ns 190 -} 191 -grid rowconfigure $tf 1 -weight 1 192 -grid columnconfigure $tf 0 -weight 1 193 -pack $btn -side bottom -pady 10 194 -pack $tf -side top -expand yes -fill both
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/embeddedWindows_tile.tcl.
1 -#!/usr/bin/env wish 2 - 3 -#============================================================================== 4 -# Demonstrates the use of embedded windows in tablelist widgets. 5 -# 6 -# Copyright (c) 2004-2016 Csaba Nemethi (E-mail: csaba.nemethi@t-online.de) 7 -#============================================================================== 8 - 9 -package require tablelist_tile 5.16 10 - 11 -wm title . "Tile Library Scripts" 12 - 13 -# 14 -# Add some entries to the Tk option database 15 -# 16 -set dir [file dirname [info script]] 17 -source [file join $dir option_tile.tcl] 18 - 19 -# 20 -# Create the font TkFixedFont if not yet present 21 -# 22 -catch {font create TkFixedFont -family Courier -size -12} 23 - 24 -# 25 -# Create an image to be displayed in buttons embedded in a tablelist widget 26 -# 27 -image create photo openImg -file [file join $dir open.gif] 28 - 29 -if {[tablelist::getCurrentTheme] eq "aqua"} { 30 - # 31 - # Work around the improper appearance of the tile scrollbars 32 - # 33 - interp alias {} ttk::scrollbar {} ::scrollbar 34 -} else { 35 - # 36 - # Make the embedded buttons as small as possible. Recall that in most 37 - # themes, the tile buttons consist of the following element hierarchy: 38 - # 39 - # Button.border 40 - # Button.focus (one of its options is -focusthickness) 41 - # Button.padding (two of its options are -padding and -shiftrelief) 42 - # Button.label 43 - # 44 - if {[info commands "::ttk::style"] ne ""} { 45 - interp alias {} styleConfig {} ttk::style configure 46 - } elseif {[string compare $tile::version "0.7"] >= 0} { 47 - interp alias {} styleConfig {} style configure 48 - } else { 49 - interp alias {} styleConfig {} style default 50 - } 51 - styleConfig Embedded.TButton -focusthickness 0 -padding 0 -shiftrelief 0 52 -} 53 - 54 -# 55 -# Create a vertically scrolled tablelist widget with 5 56 -# dynamic-width columns and interactive sort capability 57 -# 58 -set tf .tf 59 -ttk::frame $tf -class ScrollArea 60 -set tbl $tf.tbl 61 -set vsb $tf.vsb 62 -tablelist::tablelist $tbl \ 63 - -columns {0 "File Name" left 64 - 0 "Bar Chart" center 65 - 0 "File Size" right 66 - 0 "View" center 67 - 0 "Seen" center} \ 68 - -setgrid no -yscrollcommand [list $vsb set] -width 0 69 -if {[$tbl cget -selectborderwidth] == 0} { 70 - $tbl configure -spacing 1 71 -} 72 -$tbl columnconfigure 0 -name fileName 73 -$tbl columnconfigure 1 -formatcommand emptyStr -sortmode integer 74 -$tbl columnconfigure 2 -name fileSize -sortmode integer 75 -$tbl columnconfigure 4 -name seen 76 -ttk::scrollbar $vsb -orient vertical -command [list $tbl yview] 77 - 78 -proc emptyStr val { return "" } 79 - 80 -eval font create BoldFont [font actual [$tbl cget -font]] -weight bold 81 - 82 -# 83 -# Populate the tablelist widget 84 -# 85 -if {[info exists ttk::library]} { 86 - cd $ttk::library 87 -} else { 88 - cd $tile::library 89 -} 90 -set maxFileSize 0 91 -foreach fileName [lsort [glob *.tcl]] { 92 - set fileSize [file size $fileName] 93 - $tbl insert end [list $fileName $fileSize $fileSize "" no] 94 - 95 - if {$fileSize > $maxFileSize} { 96 - set maxFileSize $fileSize 97 - } 98 -} 99 - 100 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 101 -# createFrame 102 -# 103 -# Creates a frame widget w to be embedded into the specified cell of the 104 -# tablelist widget tbl, as well as a child frame representing the size of the 105 -# file whose name is diplayed in the first column of the cell's row. 106 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 107 -proc createFrame {tbl row col w} { 108 - # 109 - # Create the frame and replace the binding tag "Frame" 110 - # with "TablelistBody" in the list of its binding tags 111 - # 112 - frame $w -width 102 -height 14 -background ivory -borderwidth 1 \ 113 - -relief solid 114 - bindtags $w [lreplace [bindtags $w] 1 1 TablelistBody] 115 - 116 - # 117 - # Create the child frame and replace the binding tag "Frame" 118 - # with "TablelistBody" in the list of its binding tags 119 - # 120 - frame $w.f -height 12 -background red -borderwidth 1 -relief raised 121 - bindtags $w.f [lreplace [bindtags $w] 1 1 TablelistBody] 122 - 123 - # 124 - # Manage the child frame 125 - # 126 - set fileSize [$tbl cellcget $row,fileSize -text] 127 - place $w.f -relwidth [expr {double($fileSize) / $::maxFileSize}] 128 -} 129 - 130 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 131 -# createButton 132 -# 133 -# Creates a button widget w to be embedded into the specified cell of the 134 -# tablelist widget tbl. 135 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 136 -proc createButton {tbl row col w} { 137 - set key [$tbl getkeys $row] 138 - ttk::button $w -style Embedded.TButton -image openImg -takefocus 0 \ 139 - -command [list viewFile $tbl $key] 140 -} 141 - 142 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 143 -# viewFile 144 -# 145 -# Displays the contents of the file whose name is contained in the row with the 146 -# given key of the tablelist widget tbl. 147 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 148 -proc viewFile {tbl key} { 149 - set top .top$key 150 - if {[winfo exists $top]} { 151 - raise $top 152 - return "" 153 - } 154 - 155 - toplevel $top 156 - set fileName [$tbl cellcget k$key,fileName -text] 157 - wm title $top "File \"$fileName\"" 158 - 159 - # 160 - # Create a vertically scrolled text widget as a grandchild of the toplevel 161 - # 162 - set tf $top.tf 163 - ttk::frame $tf -class ScrollArea 164 - set txt $tf.txt 165 - set vsb $tf.vsb 166 - text $txt -background white -font TkFixedFont -highlightthickness 0 \ 167 - -setgrid yes -yscrollcommand [list $vsb set] 168 - catch {$txt configure -tabstyle wordprocessor} ;# for Tk 8.5 and above 169 - ttk::scrollbar $vsb -orient vertical -command [list $txt yview] 170 - 171 - # 172 - # Insert the file's contents into the text widget 173 - # 174 - set chan [open $fileName] 175 - $txt insert end [read $chan] 176 - close $chan 177 - 178 - set bf $top.bf 179 - ttk::frame $bf 180 - set btn [ttk::button $bf.btn -text "Close" -command [list destroy $top]] 181 - 182 - # 183 - # Manage the widgets 184 - # 185 - grid $txt -row 0 -column 0 -sticky news 186 - grid $vsb -row 0 -column 1 -sticky ns 187 - grid rowconfigure $tf 0 -weight 1 188 - grid columnconfigure $tf 0 -weight 1 189 - pack $btn -pady 10 190 - pack $bf -side bottom -fill x 191 - pack $tf -side top -expand yes -fill both 192 - 193 - # 194 - # Mark the file as seen 195 - # 196 - $tbl rowconfigure k$key -font BoldFont 197 - $tbl cellconfigure k$key,seen -text yes 198 -} 199 - 200 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 201 - 202 -# 203 -# Create embedded windows in the columns no. 1 and 3 204 -# 205 -set rowCount [$tbl size] 206 -for {set row 0} {$row < $rowCount} {incr row} { 207 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,1 -window createFrame -stretchwindow yes 208 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,3 -window createButton 209 -} 210 - 211 -set bf .bf 212 -ttk::frame $bf 213 -set btn [ttk::button $bf.btn -text "Close" -command exit] 214 - 215 -# 216 -# Manage the widgets 217 -# 218 -grid $tbl -row 0 -rowspan 2 -column 0 -sticky news 219 -if {[tablelist::getCurrentTheme] eq "aqua"} { 220 - grid [$tbl cornerpath] -row 0 -column 1 -sticky ew 221 - grid $vsb -row 1 -column 1 -sticky ns 222 -} else { 223 - grid $vsb -row 0 -rowspan 2 -column 1 -sticky ns 224 -} 225 -grid rowconfigure $tf 1 -weight 1 226 -grid columnconfigure $tf 0 -weight 1 227 -pack $btn -pady 10 228 -pack $bf -side bottom -fill x 229 -pack $tf -side top -expand yes -fill both
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/file.gif.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/images.tcl.
1 -#============================================================================== 2 -# Creates some images. 3 -# 4 -# Copyright (c) 2011-2016 Csaba Nemethi (E-mail: csaba.nemethi@t-online.de) 5 -#============================================================================== 6 - 7 -# 8 -# Create two images, to be displayed in tablelist cells with boolean values 9 -# 10 -image create photo checkedImg -file [file join $dir checked.gif] 11 -image create photo uncheckedImg -file [file join $dir unchecked.gif] 12 - 13 -# 14 -# Create 16 images representing different colors 15 -# 16 -set colorNames { 17 - "red" "green" "blue" "magenta" 18 - "yellow" "cyan" "white" "light gray" 19 - "dark red" "dark green" "dark blue" "dark magenta" 20 - "dark yellow" "dark cyan" "dark gray" "black" 21 -} 22 -set colorValues { 23 - #FF0000 #00FF00 #0000FF #FF00FF 24 - #FFFF00 #00FFFF #FFFFFF #C0C0C0 25 - #800000 #008000 #000080 #800080 26 - #808000 #008080 #808080 #000000 27 -} 28 -foreach name $colorNames value $colorValues { 29 - set colors($name) $value 30 -} 31 -foreach value $colorValues { 32 - image create photo img$value -height 13 -width 13 33 - img$value put gray50 -to 0 0 13 1 ;# top edge 34 - img$value put gray50 -to 0 1 1 12 ;# left edge 35 - img$value put gray75 -to 0 12 13 13 ;# bottom edge 36 - img$value put gray75 -to 12 1 13 12 ;# right edge 37 - img$value put $value -to 1 1 12 12 38 -}
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/iwidgets.tcl.
1 -#!/usr/bin/env wish 2 - 3 -#============================================================================== 4 -# Demonstrates the interactive tablelist cell editing with the aid of some 5 -# widgets from the Iwidgets package and of the Tk core checkbutton and 6 -# menubutton widgets. 7 -# 8 -# Copyright (c) 2004-2016 Csaba Nemethi (E-mail: csaba.nemethi@t-online.de) 9 -#============================================================================== 10 - 11 -package require Tk 8.4 ;# because of "-compound" 12 -package require tablelist 5.16 13 -package require Iwidgets 14 - 15 -wm title . "Serial Line Configuration" 16 - 17 -# 18 -# Add some entries to the Tk option database 19 -# 20 -set dir [file dirname [info script]] 21 -source [file join $dir option.tcl] 22 -option add *Tablelist*Checkbutton.background white 23 -option add *Tablelist*Checkbutton.activeBackground white 24 -option add *Tablelist*textBackground white 25 -option add *Tablelist*Entry.disabledBackground white 26 -option add *Tablelist*Entry.disabledForeground black 27 -option add *Tablelist*Dateentry*Label.background white 28 -option add *Tablelist*Timeentry*Label.background white 29 - 30 -# 31 -# Register some widgets from the Iwidgets package for interactive cell editing 32 -# 33 -tablelist::addIncrEntryfield 34 -tablelist::addIncrSpinint 35 -tablelist::addIncrCombobox 36 -tablelist::addIncrDateTimeWidget dateentry -seconds 37 -tablelist::addIncrDateTimeWidget timeentry -seconds 38 - 39 -# 40 -# Create the images "checkedImg" and "uncheckedImg", as well as 16 images of 41 -# names like "img#FF0000", displaying colors identified by names like "red" 42 -# 43 -source [file join $dir images.tcl] 44 - 45 -# 46 -# Create a tablelist widget with editable columns (except the first one) 47 -# 48 -set tbl .tbl 49 -tablelist::tablelist $tbl \ 50 - -columns {0 "No." right 51 - 0 "Available" center 52 - 0 "Name" left 53 - 0 "Baud Rate" right 54 - 0 "Data Bits" center 55 - 0 "Parity" left 56 - 0 "Stop Bits" center 57 - 0 "Handshake" left 58 - 0 "Activation Date" center 59 - 0 "Activation Time" center 60 - 0 "Cable Color" center} \ 61 - -editstartcommand editStartCmd -editendcommand editEndCmd \ 62 - -height 0 -width 0 63 -if {[$tbl cget -selectborderwidth] == 0} { 64 - $tbl configure -spacing 1 65 -} 66 -$tbl columnconfigure 0 -sortmode integer 67 -$tbl columnconfigure 1 -name available -editable yes -editwindow checkbutton \ 68 - -formatcommand emptyStr 69 -$tbl columnconfigure 2 -name lineName -editable yes -editwindow entryfield \ 70 - -sortmode dictionary 71 -$tbl columnconfigure 3 -name baudRate -editable yes -editwindow combobox \ 72 - -sortmode integer 73 -$tbl columnconfigure 4 -name dataBits -editable yes -editwindow spinint 74 -$tbl columnconfigure 5 -name parity -editable yes -editwindow combobox 75 -$tbl columnconfigure 6 -name stopBits -editable yes -editwindow combobox 76 -$tbl columnconfigure 7 -name handshake -editable yes -editwindow combobox 77 -$tbl columnconfigure 8 -name actDate -editable yes -editwindow dateentry \ 78 - -formatcommand formatDate -sortmode integer 79 -$tbl columnconfigure 9 -name actTime -editable yes -editwindow timeentry \ 80 - -formatcommand formatTime -sortmode integer 81 -$tbl columnconfigure 10 -name color -editable yes -editwindow menubutton \ 82 - -formatcommand emptyStr 83 - 84 -proc emptyStr val { return "" } 85 -proc formatDate val { return [clock format $val -format "%Y-%m-%d"] } 86 -proc formatTime val { return [clock format $val -format "%H:%M:%S"] } 87 - 88 -# 89 -# Populate the tablelist widget; set the activation 90 -# date & time to 10 minutes past the current clock value 91 -# 92 -set clock [expr {[clock seconds] + 600}] 93 -for {set i 0; set n 1} {$i < 16} {set i $n; incr n} { 94 - $tbl insert end [list $n [expr {$i < 8}] "Line $n" 9600 8 None 1 XON/XOFF \ 95 - $clock $clock [lindex $colorNames $i]] 96 - 97 - set availImg [expr {($i < 8) ? "checkedImg" : "uncheckedImg"}] 98 - $tbl cellconfigure end,available -image $availImg 99 - $tbl cellconfigure end,color -image img[lindex $colorValues $i] 100 -} 101 - 102 -set btn [button .btn -text "Close" -command exit] 103 - 104 -# 105 -# Manage the widgets 106 -# 107 -pack $btn -side bottom -pady 10 108 -pack $tbl -side top -expand yes -fill both 109 - 110 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 111 -# editStartCmd 112 -# 113 -# Applies some configuration options to the edit window; if the latter is a 114 -# combobox, the procedure populates it. 115 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 116 -proc editStartCmd {tbl row col text} { 117 - set w [$tbl editwinpath] 118 - 119 - switch [$tbl columncget $col -name] { 120 - lineName { 121 - # 122 - # Set an upper limit of 20 for the number of characters 123 - # 124 - $w configure -pasting no -fixed 20 125 - } 126 - 127 - baudRate { 128 - # 129 - # Populate the combobox and allow no more 130 - # than 6 digits in its entry component 131 - # 132 - $w insert list end 50 75 110 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 \ 133 - 57600 115200 230400 460800 921600 134 - $w configure -pasting no -fixed 6 -validate numeric 135 - } 136 - 137 - dataBits { 138 - # 139 - # Configure the spinint widget 140 - # 141 - $w configure -range {5 8} -wrap no -pasting no -fixed 1 \ 142 - -validate {regexp {^[5-8]$} %c} 143 - } 144 - 145 - parity { 146 - # 147 - # Populate the combobox and make it non-editable 148 - # 149 - $w insert list end None Even Odd Mark Space 150 - $w configure -editable no -listheight 120 151 - } 152 - 153 - stopBits { 154 - # 155 - # Populate the combobox and make it non-editable 156 - # 157 - $w insert list end 1 1.5 2 158 - $w configure -editable no -listheight 90 159 - } 160 - 161 - handshake { 162 - # 163 - # Populate the combobox and make it non-editable 164 - # 165 - $w insert list end XON/XOFF RTS/CTS None 166 - $w configure -editable no -listheight 90 167 - } 168 - 169 - actDate { 170 - # 171 - # Set the date format "%Y-%m-%d" 172 - # 173 - $w configure -int yes 174 - } 175 - 176 - actTime { 177 - # 178 - # Set the time format "%H:%M:%S" 179 - # 180 - $w configure -format military 181 - } 182 - 183 - color { 184 - # 185 - # Populate the menu and make sure the menubutton will display the 186 - # color name rather than $text, which is "", due to -formatcommand 187 - # 188 - set menu [$w cget -menu] 189 - foreach name $::colorNames { 190 - $menu add radiobutton -compound left \ 191 - -image img$::colors($name) -label $name 192 - } 193 - $menu entryconfigure 8 -columnbreak 1 194 - return [$tbl cellcget $row,$col -text] 195 - } 196 - } 197 - 198 - return $text 199 -} 200 - 201 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 202 -# editEndCmd 203 -# 204 -# Performs a final validation of the text contained in the edit window and gets 205 -# the cell's internal contents. 206 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 207 -proc editEndCmd {tbl row col text} { 208 - switch [$tbl columncget $col -name] { 209 - available { 210 - # 211 - # Update the image contained in the cell 212 - # 213 - set img [expr {$text ? "checkedImg" : "uncheckedImg"}] 214 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,$col -image $img 215 - } 216 - 217 - baudRate { 218 - # 219 - # Check whether the baud rate is an integer in the range 50..921600 220 - # 221 - if {![regexp {^[0-9]+$} $text] || $text < 50 || $text > 921600} { 222 - bell 223 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 224 - "The baud rate must be an integer in the range 50..921600" 225 - $tbl rejectinput 226 - } 227 - } 228 - 229 - dataBits { 230 - # 231 - # Check whether the # of data bits is an integer in the range 5..8 232 - # 233 - if {![regexp {^[5-8]$} $text]} { 234 - bell 235 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 236 - "The # of data bits must be an integer in the range 5..8" 237 - $tbl rejectinput 238 - } 239 - } 240 - 241 - actDate { 242 - # 243 - # Check whether the activation clock value is later than the 244 - # current one; if this is the case then make sure the cells 245 - # "actDate" and "actTime" will have the same internal value 246 - # 247 - set actTime [$tbl cellcget $row,actTime -text] 248 - set actClock [clock scan [formatTime $actTime] -base $text] 249 - if {$actClock <= [clock seconds]} { 250 - bell 251 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 252 - "The activation date & time must be in the future" 253 - $tbl rejectinput 254 - } else { 255 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,actTime -text $actClock 256 - return $actClock 257 - } 258 - } 259 - 260 - actTime { 261 - # 262 - # Check whether the activation clock value is later than the 263 - # current one; if this is the case then make sure the cells 264 - # "actDate" and "actTime" will have the same internal value 265 - # 266 - set actDate [$tbl cellcget $row,actDate -text] 267 - set actClock [clock scan [formatTime $text] -base $actDate] 268 - if {$actClock <= [clock seconds]} { 269 - bell 270 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 271 - "The activation date & time must be in the future" 272 - $tbl rejectinput 273 - } else { 274 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,actDate -text $actClock 275 - return $actClock 276 - } 277 - } 278 - 279 - color { 280 - # 281 - # Update the image contained in the cell 282 - # 283 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,$col -image img$::colors($text) 284 - } 285 - } 286 - 287 - return $text 288 -}
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/iwidgets_tile.tcl.
1 -#!/usr/bin/env wish 2 - 3 -#============================================================================== 4 -# Demonstrates the interactive tablelist cell editing with the aid of some 5 -# widgets from the Iwidgets package and of the Tk core checkbutton and 6 -# menubutton widgets. 7 -# 8 -# Copyright (c) 2004-2016 Csaba Nemethi (E-mail: csaba.nemethi@t-online.de) 9 -#============================================================================== 10 - 11 -package require tablelist_tile 5.16 12 -package require Iwidgets 13 - 14 -wm title . "Serial Line Configuration" 15 - 16 -# 17 -# Add some entries to the Tk option database 18 -# 19 -set dir [file dirname [info script]] 20 -source [file join $dir option_tile.tcl] 21 -option add *Tablelist*Checkbutton.background white 22 -option add *Tablelist*Checkbutton.activeBackground white 23 -option add *Tablelist*textBackground white 24 -option add *Tablelist*Entry.disabledBackground white 25 -option add *Tablelist*Entry.disabledForeground black 26 -option add *Tablelist*Dateentry*Label.background white 27 -option add *Tablelist*Timeentry*Label.background white 28 - 29 -# 30 -# Register some widgets from the Iwidgets package for interactive cell editing 31 -# 32 -tablelist::addIncrEntryfield 33 -tablelist::addIncrSpinint 34 -tablelist::addIncrCombobox 35 -tablelist::addIncrDateTimeWidget dateentry -seconds 36 -tablelist::addIncrDateTimeWidget timeentry -seconds 37 - 38 -# 39 -# Create the images "checkedImg" and "uncheckedImg", as well as 16 images of 40 -# names like "img#FF0000", displaying colors identified by names like "red" 41 -# 42 -source [file join $dir images.tcl] 43 - 44 -# 45 -# Improve the window's appearance by using a tile 46 -# frame as a container for the other widgets 47 -# 48 -set f [ttk::frame .f] 49 - 50 -# 51 -# Create a tablelist widget with editable columns (except the first one) 52 -# 53 -set tbl $f.tbl 54 -tablelist::tablelist $tbl \ 55 - -columns {0 "No." right 56 - 0 "Available" center 57 - 0 "Name" left 58 - 0 "Baud Rate" right 59 - 0 "Data Bits" center 60 - 0 "Parity" left 61 - 0 "Stop Bits" center 62 - 0 "Handshake" left 63 - 0 "Activation Date" center 64 - 0 "Activation Time" center 65 - 0 "Cable Color" center} \ 66 - -editstartcommand editStartCmd -editendcommand editEndCmd \ 67 - -height 0 -width 0 68 -if {[$tbl cget -selectborderwidth] == 0} { 69 - $tbl configure -spacing 1 70 -} 71 -$tbl columnconfigure 0 -sortmode integer 72 -$tbl columnconfigure 1 -name available -editable yes -editwindow checkbutton \ 73 - -formatcommand emptyStr 74 -$tbl columnconfigure 2 -name lineName -editable yes -editwindow entryfield \ 75 - -sortmode dictionary 76 -$tbl columnconfigure 3 -name baudRate -editable yes -editwindow combobox \ 77 - -sortmode integer 78 -$tbl columnconfigure 4 -name dataBits -editable yes -editwindow spinint 79 -$tbl columnconfigure 5 -name parity -editable yes -editwindow combobox 80 -$tbl columnconfigure 6 -name stopBits -editable yes -editwindow combobox 81 -$tbl columnconfigure 7 -name handshake -editable yes -editwindow combobox 82 -$tbl columnconfigure 8 -name actDate -editable yes -editwindow dateentry \ 83 - -formatcommand formatDate -sortmode integer 84 -$tbl columnconfigure 9 -name actTime -editable yes -editwindow timeentry \ 85 - -formatcommand formatTime -sortmode integer 86 -$tbl columnconfigure 10 -name color -editable yes -editwindow menubutton \ 87 - -formatcommand emptyStr 88 - 89 -proc emptyStr val { return "" } 90 -proc formatDate val { return [clock format $val -format "%Y-%m-%d"] } 91 -proc formatTime val { return [clock format $val -format "%H:%M:%S"] } 92 - 93 -# 94 -# Populate the tablelist widget; set the activation 95 -# date & time to 10 minutes past the current clock value 96 -# 97 -set clock [expr {[clock seconds] + 600}] 98 -for {set i 0; set n 1} {$i < 16} {set i $n; incr n} { 99 - $tbl insert end [list $n [expr {$i < 8}] "Line $n" 9600 8 None 1 XON/XOFF \ 100 - $clock $clock [lindex $colorNames $i]] 101 - 102 - set availImg [expr {($i < 8) ? "checkedImg" : "uncheckedImg"}] 103 - $tbl cellconfigure end,available -image $availImg 104 - $tbl cellconfigure end,color -image img[lindex $colorValues $i] 105 -} 106 - 107 -set btn [ttk::button $f.btn -text "Close" -command exit] 108 - 109 -# 110 -# Manage the widgets 111 -# 112 -pack $btn -side bottom -pady 10 113 -pack $tbl -side top -expand yes -fill both 114 -pack $f -expand yes -fill both 115 - 116 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 117 -# editStartCmd 118 -# 119 -# Applies some configuration options to the edit window; if the latter is a 120 -# combobox, the procedure populates it. 121 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 122 -proc editStartCmd {tbl row col text} { 123 - set w [$tbl editwinpath] 124 - 125 - switch [$tbl columncget $col -name] { 126 - lineName { 127 - # 128 - # Set an upper limit of 20 for the number of characters 129 - # 130 - $w configure -pasting no -fixed 20 131 - } 132 - 133 - baudRate { 134 - # 135 - # Populate the combobox and allow no more 136 - # than 6 digits in its entry component 137 - # 138 - $w insert list end 50 75 110 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 \ 139 - 57600 115200 230400 460800 921600 140 - $w configure -pasting no -fixed 6 -validate numeric 141 - } 142 - 143 - dataBits { 144 - # 145 - # Configure the spinint widget 146 - # 147 - $w configure -range {5 8} -wrap no -pasting no -fixed 1 \ 148 - -validate {regexp {^[5-8]$} %c} 149 - } 150 - 151 - parity { 152 - # 153 - # Populate the combobox and make it non-editable 154 - # 155 - $w insert list end None Even Odd Mark Space 156 - $w configure -editable no -listheight 120 157 - } 158 - 159 - stopBits { 160 - # 161 - # Populate the combobox and make it non-editable 162 - # 163 - $w insert list end 1 1.5 2 164 - $w configure -editable no -listheight 90 165 - } 166 - 167 - handshake { 168 - # 169 - # Populate the combobox and make it non-editable 170 - # 171 - $w insert list end XON/XOFF RTS/CTS None 172 - $w configure -editable no -listheight 90 173 - } 174 - 175 - actDate { 176 - # 177 - # Set the date format "%Y-%m-%d" 178 - # 179 - $w configure -int yes 180 - } 181 - 182 - actTime { 183 - # 184 - # Set the time format "%H:%M:%S" 185 - # 186 - $w configure -format military 187 - } 188 - 189 - color { 190 - # 191 - # Populate the menu and make sure the menubutton will display the 192 - # color name rather than $text, which is "", due to -formatcommand 193 - # 194 - set menu [$w cget -menu] 195 - foreach name $::colorNames { 196 - $menu add radiobutton -compound left \ 197 - -image img$::colors($name) -label $name 198 - } 199 - $menu entryconfigure 8 -columnbreak 1 200 - return [$tbl cellcget $row,$col -text] 201 - } 202 - } 203 - 204 - return $text 205 -} 206 - 207 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 208 -# editEndCmd 209 -# 210 -# Performs a final validation of the text contained in the edit window and gets 211 -# the cell's internal contents. 212 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 213 -proc editEndCmd {tbl row col text} { 214 - switch [$tbl columncget $col -name] { 215 - available { 216 - # 217 - # Update the image contained in the cell 218 - # 219 - set img [expr {$text ? "checkedImg" : "uncheckedImg"}] 220 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,$col -image $img 221 - } 222 - 223 - baudRate { 224 - # 225 - # Check whether the baud rate is an integer in the range 50..921600 226 - # 227 - if {![regexp {^[0-9]+$} $text] || $text < 50 || $text > 921600} { 228 - bell 229 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 230 - "The baud rate must be an integer in the range 50..921600" 231 - $tbl rejectinput 232 - } 233 - } 234 - 235 - dataBits { 236 - # 237 - # Check whether the # of data bits is an integer in the range 5..8 238 - # 239 - if {![regexp {^[5-8]$} $text]} { 240 - bell 241 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 242 - "The # of data bits must be an integer in the range 5..8" 243 - $tbl rejectinput 244 - } 245 - } 246 - 247 - actDate { 248 - # 249 - # Check whether the activation clock value is later than the 250 - # current one; if this is the case then make sure the cells 251 - # "actDate" and "actTime" will have the same internal value 252 - # 253 - set actTime [$tbl cellcget $row,actTime -text] 254 - set actClock [clock scan [formatTime $actTime] -base $text] 255 - if {$actClock <= [clock seconds]} { 256 - bell 257 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 258 - "The activation date & time must be in the future" 259 - $tbl rejectinput 260 - } else { 261 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,actTime -text $actClock 262 - return $actClock 263 - } 264 - } 265 - 266 - actTime { 267 - # 268 - # Check whether the activation clock value is later than the 269 - # current one; if this is the case then make sure the cells 270 - # "actDate" and "actTime" will have the same internal value 271 - # 272 - set actDate [$tbl cellcget $row,actDate -text] 273 - set actClock [clock scan [formatTime $text] -base $actDate] 274 - if {$actClock <= [clock seconds]} { 275 - bell 276 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 277 - "The activation date & time must be in the future" 278 - $tbl rejectinput 279 - } else { 280 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,actDate -text $actClock 281 - return $actClock 282 - } 283 - } 284 - 285 - color { 286 - # 287 - # Update the image contained in the cell 288 - # 289 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,$col -image img$::colors($text) 290 - } 291 - } 292 - 293 - return $text 294 -}
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/leaf.xbm.
1 -#define leaf_width 14 2 -#define leaf_height 12 3 -static unsigned char leaf_bits[] = { 4 - 0xff, 0x3f, 0x01, 0x20, 0x01, 0x20, 0x01, 0x20, 0x01, 0x20, 0x01, 0x20, 5 - 0x01, 0x20, 0x01, 0x20, 0x01, 0x20, 0x01, 0x20, 0x01, 0x20, 0xff, 0x3f};
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/miscWidgets.tcl.
1 -#!/usr/bin/env wish 2 - 3 -#============================================================================== 4 -# Demonstrates the interactive tablelist cell editing with the aid of Bryan 5 -# Oakley's combobox, the mentry widgets of type "Date" and "Time", and of the 6 -# Tk core entry, spinbox, checkbutton, and menubutton widgets. 7 -# 8 -# Copyright (c) 2004-2016 Csaba Nemethi (E-mail: csaba.nemethi@t-online.de) 9 -#============================================================================== 10 - 11 -package require Tk 8.4 ;# because of "-compound" and the spinbox widget 12 -package require tablelist 5.16 13 -package require combobox 14 -package require mentry 15 - 16 -wm title . "Serial Line Configuration" 17 - 18 -# 19 -# Add some entries to the Tk option database 20 -# 21 -set dir [file dirname [info script]] 22 -source [file join $dir option.tcl] 23 -option add *Tablelist*Checkbutton.background white 24 -option add *Tablelist*Checkbutton.activeBackground white 25 -option add *Tablelist*Entry.background white 26 -option add *Tablelist*Spinbox.background white 27 -option add *Tablelist*Spinbox.readonlyBackground white 28 -option add *Tablelist*Combobox.background white 29 -option add *Tablelist*Combobox.elementBorderWidth 2 30 -option add *Tablelist*Mentry.background white 31 - 32 -# 33 -# Register Bryan Oakley's combobox widget as well as the mentry 34 -# widgets of type "Date" and "Time" for interactive cell editing 35 -# 36 -tablelist::addOakleyCombobox 37 -tablelist::addDateMentry Ymd - 38 -tablelist::addTimeMentry HMS : 39 - 40 -# 41 -# Create the images "checkedImg" and "uncheckedImg", as well as 16 images of 42 -# names like "img#FF0000", displaying colors identified by names like "red" 43 -# 44 -source [file join $dir images.tcl] 45 - 46 -# 47 -# Create a tablelist widget with editable columns (except the first one) 48 -# 49 -set tbl .tbl 50 -tablelist::tablelist $tbl \ 51 - -columns {0 "No." right 52 - 0 "Available" center 53 - 0 "Name" left 54 - 0 "Baud Rate" right 55 - 0 "Data Bits" center 56 - 0 "Parity" left 57 - 0 "Stop Bits" center 58 - 0 "Handshake" left 59 - 0 "Activation Date" center 60 - 0 "Activation Time" center 61 - 0 "Cable Color" center} \ 62 - -editstartcommand editStartCmd -editendcommand editEndCmd \ 63 - -height 0 -width 0 64 -if {[$tbl cget -selectborderwidth] == 0} { 65 - $tbl configure -spacing 1 66 -} 67 -$tbl columnconfigure 0 -sortmode integer 68 -$tbl columnconfigure 1 -name available -editable yes -editwindow checkbutton \ 69 - -formatcommand emptyStr 70 -$tbl columnconfigure 2 -name lineName -editable yes -editwindow entry \ 71 - -sortmode dictionary 72 -$tbl columnconfigure 3 -name baudRate -editable yes -editwindow combobox \ 73 - -sortmode integer 74 -$tbl columnconfigure 4 -name dataBits -editable yes -editwindow spinbox 75 -$tbl columnconfigure 5 -name parity -editable yes -editwindow combobox 76 -$tbl columnconfigure 6 -name stopBits -editable yes -editwindow combobox 77 -$tbl columnconfigure 7 -name handshake -editable yes -editwindow combobox 78 -$tbl columnconfigure 8 -name actDate -editable yes -editwindow dateMentry \ 79 - -formatcommand formatDate -sortmode integer 80 -$tbl columnconfigure 9 -name actTime -editable yes -editwindow timeMentry \ 81 - -formatcommand formatTime -sortmode integer 82 -$tbl columnconfigure 10 -name color -editable yes -editwindow menubutton \ 83 - -formatcommand emptyStr 84 - 85 -proc emptyStr val { return "" } 86 -proc formatDate val { return [clock format $val -format "%Y-%m-%d"] } 87 -proc formatTime val { return [clock format $val -format "%H:%M:%S"] } 88 - 89 -# 90 -# Populate the tablelist widget; set the activation 91 -# date & time to 10 minutes past the current clock value 92 -# 93 -set clock [expr {[clock seconds] + 600}] 94 -for {set i 0; set n 1} {$i < 16} {set i $n; incr n} { 95 - $tbl insert end [list $n [expr {$i < 8}] "Line $n" 9600 8 None 1 XON/XOFF \ 96 - $clock $clock [lindex $colorNames $i]] 97 - 98 - set availImg [expr {($i < 8) ? "checkedImg" : "uncheckedImg"}] 99 - $tbl cellconfigure end,available -image $availImg 100 - $tbl cellconfigure end,color -image img[lindex $colorValues $i] 101 -} 102 - 103 -set btn [button .btn -text "Close" -command exit] 104 - 105 -# 106 -# Manage the widgets 107 -# 108 -pack $btn -side bottom -pady 10 109 -pack $tbl -side top -expand yes -fill both 110 - 111 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 112 -# editStartCmd 113 -# 114 -# Applies some configuration options to the edit window; if the latter is a 115 -# combobox, the procedure populates it. 116 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 117 -proc editStartCmd {tbl row col text} { 118 - set w [$tbl editwinpath] 119 - 120 - switch [$tbl columncget $col -name] { 121 - lineName { 122 - # 123 - # Set an upper limit of 20 for the number of characters 124 - # 125 - wcb::callback $w before insert {wcb::checkEntryLen 20} 126 - } 127 - 128 - baudRate { 129 - # 130 - # Populate the combobox and allow no more 131 - # than 6 digits in its entry component 132 - # 133 - $w list insert end 50 75 110 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 \ 134 - 57600 115200 230400 460800 921600 135 - wcb::callback [$tbl entrypath] before insert \ 136 - {wcb::checkEntryLen 6} {wcb::checkStrForRegExp {^[0-9]*$}} 137 - } 138 - 139 - dataBits { 140 - # 141 - # Configure the spinbox 142 - # 143 - $w configure -from 5 -to 8 -state readonly 144 - } 145 - 146 - parity { 147 - # 148 - # Populate the combobox and make it non-editable 149 - # 150 - $w list insert end None Even Odd Mark Space 151 - $w configure -editable no 152 - } 153 - 154 - stopBits { 155 - # 156 - # Populate the combobox and make it non-editable 157 - # 158 - $w list insert end 1 1.5 2 159 - $w configure -editable no 160 - } 161 - 162 - handshake { 163 - # 164 - # Populate the combobox and make it non-editable 165 - # 166 - $w list insert end XON/XOFF RTS/CTS None 167 - $w configure -editable no 168 - } 169 - 170 - actDate - 171 - actTime { 172 - # 173 - # Configure the mentry widget 174 - # 175 - $w configure -justify center 176 - } 177 - 178 - color { 179 - # 180 - # Populate the menu and make sure the menubutton will display the 181 - # color name rather than $text, which is "", due to -formatcommand 182 - # 183 - set menu [$w cget -menu] 184 - foreach name $::colorNames { 185 - $menu add radiobutton -compound left \ 186 - -image img$::colors($name) -label $name 187 - } 188 - $menu entryconfigure 8 -columnbreak 1 189 - return [$tbl cellcget $row,$col -text] 190 - } 191 - } 192 - 193 - return $text 194 -} 195 - 196 -# 197 -# Message strings corresponding to the values 198 -# returned by mentry::getClockVal on failure 199 -# 200 -array set msgs { 201 - EMPTY "Field value missing" 202 - BAD "Invalid field value" 203 - BAD_DATE "Invalid date" 204 - BAD_YEAR "Unsupported year" 205 -} 206 - 207 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 208 -# editEndCmd 209 -# 210 -# Performs a final validation of the text contained in the edit window and gets 211 -# the cell's internal contents. 212 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 213 -proc editEndCmd {tbl row col text} { 214 - switch [$tbl columncget $col -name] { 215 - available { 216 - # 217 - # Update the image contained in the cell 218 - # 219 - set img [expr {$text ? "checkedImg" : "uncheckedImg"}] 220 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,$col -image $img 221 - } 222 - 223 - baudRate { 224 - # 225 - # Check whether the baud rate is an integer in the range 50..921600 226 - # 227 - if {![regexp {^[0-9]+$} $text] || $text < 50 || $text > 921600} { 228 - bell 229 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 230 - "The baud rate must be an integer in the range 50..921600" 231 - $tbl rejectinput 232 - } 233 - } 234 - 235 - actDate { 236 - # 237 - # Check whether the last argument is a clock value in seconds 238 - # 239 - if {![string is digit $text]} { 240 - bell 241 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message $::msgs($text) 242 - $tbl rejectinput 243 - return "" 244 - } 245 - 246 - # 247 - # Check whether the activation clock value is later than the 248 - # current one; if this is the case then make sure the cells 249 - # "actDate" and "actTime" will have the same internal value 250 - # 251 - set actTime [$tbl cellcget $row,actTime -text] 252 - set actClock [clock scan [formatTime $actTime] -base $text] 253 - if {$actClock <= [clock seconds]} { 254 - bell 255 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 256 - "The activation date & time must be in the future" 257 - $tbl rejectinput 258 - } else { 259 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,actTime -text $actClock 260 - return $actClock 261 - } 262 - } 263 - 264 - actTime { 265 - # 266 - # Check whether the last argument is a clock value in seconds 267 - # 268 - if {![string is digit $text]} { 269 - bell 270 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message $::msgs($text) 271 - $tbl rejectinput 272 - return "" 273 - } 274 - 275 - # 276 - # Check whether the activation clock value is later than the 277 - # current one; if this is the case then make sure the cells 278 - # "actDate" and "actTime" will have the same internal value 279 - # 280 - set actDate [$tbl cellcget $row,actDate -text] 281 - set actClock [clock scan [formatTime $text] -base $actDate] 282 - if {$actClock <= [clock seconds]} { 283 - bell 284 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 285 - "The activation date & time must be in the future" 286 - $tbl rejectinput 287 - } else { 288 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,actDate -text $actClock 289 - return $actClock 290 - } 291 - } 292 - 293 - color { 294 - # 295 - # Update the image contained in the cell 296 - # 297 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,$col -image img$::colors($text) 298 - } 299 - } 300 - 301 - return $text 302 -}
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/miscWidgets_tile.tcl.
1 -#!/usr/bin/env wish 2 - 3 -#============================================================================== 4 -# Demonstrates the interactive tablelist cell editing with the aid of Bryan 5 -# Oakley's combobox, the mentry widgets of type "Date" and "Time", and of the 6 -# Tk core entry, spinbox, checkbutton, and menubutton widgets. 7 -# 8 -# Copyright (c) 2004-2016 Csaba Nemethi (E-mail: csaba.nemethi@t-online.de) 9 -#============================================================================== 10 - 11 -package require tablelist_tile 5.16 12 -package require combobox 13 -package require mentry 14 - 15 -wm title . "Serial Line Configuration" 16 - 17 -# 18 -# Add some entries to the Tk option database 19 -# 20 -set dir [file dirname [info script]] 21 -source [file join $dir option_tile.tcl] 22 -option add *Tablelist*Checkbutton.background white 23 -option add *Tablelist*Checkbutton.activeBackground white 24 -option add *Tablelist*Entry.background white 25 -option add *Tablelist*Spinbox.background white 26 -option add *Tablelist*Spinbox.readonlyBackground white 27 -option add *Tablelist*Combobox.background white 28 -option add *Tablelist*Combobox.elementBorderWidth 2 29 -option add *Tablelist*Mentry.background white 30 - 31 -# 32 -# Register Bryan Oakley's combobox widget as well as the mentry 33 -# widgets of type "Date" and "Time" for interactive cell editing 34 -# 35 -tablelist::addOakleyCombobox 36 -tablelist::addDateMentry Ymd - 37 -tablelist::addTimeMentry HMS : 38 - 39 -# 40 -# Create the images "checkedImg" and "uncheckedImg", as well as 16 images of 41 -# names like "img#FF0000", displaying colors identified by names like "red" 42 -# 43 -source [file join $dir images.tcl] 44 - 45 -# 46 -# Improve the window's appearance by using a tile 47 -# frame as a container for the other widgets 48 -# 49 -set f [ttk::frame .f] 50 - 51 -# 52 -# Create a tablelist widget with editable columns (except the first one) 53 -# 54 -set tbl $f.tbl 55 -tablelist::tablelist $tbl \ 56 - -columns {0 "No." right 57 - 0 "Available" center 58 - 0 "Name" left 59 - 0 "Baud Rate" right 60 - 0 "Data Bits" center 61 - 0 "Parity" left 62 - 0 "Stop Bits" center 63 - 0 "Handshake" left 64 - 0 "Activation Date" center 65 - 0 "Activation Time" center 66 - 0 "Cable Color" center} \ 67 - -editstartcommand editStartCmd -editendcommand editEndCmd \ 68 - -height 0 -width 0 69 -if {[$tbl cget -selectborderwidth] == 0} { 70 - $tbl configure -spacing 1 71 -} 72 -$tbl columnconfigure 0 -sortmode integer 73 -$tbl columnconfigure 1 -name available -editable yes -editwindow checkbutton \ 74 - -formatcommand emptyStr 75 -$tbl columnconfigure 2 -name lineName -editable yes -editwindow entry \ 76 - -sortmode dictionary 77 -$tbl columnconfigure 3 -name baudRate -editable yes -editwindow combobox \ 78 - -sortmode integer 79 -$tbl columnconfigure 4 -name dataBits -editable yes -editwindow spinbox 80 -$tbl columnconfigure 5 -name parity -editable yes -editwindow combobox 81 -$tbl columnconfigure 6 -name stopBits -editable yes -editwindow combobox 82 -$tbl columnconfigure 7 -name handshake -editable yes -editwindow combobox 83 -$tbl columnconfigure 8 -name actDate -editable yes -editwindow dateMentry \ 84 - -formatcommand formatDate -sortmode integer 85 -$tbl columnconfigure 9 -name actTime -editable yes -editwindow timeMentry \ 86 - -formatcommand formatTime -sortmode integer 87 -$tbl columnconfigure 10 -name color -editable yes -editwindow menubutton \ 88 - -formatcommand emptyStr 89 - 90 -proc emptyStr val { return "" } 91 -proc formatDate val { return [clock format $val -format "%Y-%m-%d"] } 92 -proc formatTime val { return [clock format $val -format "%H:%M:%S"] } 93 - 94 -# 95 -# Populate the tablelist widget; set the activation 96 -# date & time to 10 minutes past the current clock value 97 -# 98 -set clock [expr {[clock seconds] + 600}] 99 -for {set i 0; set n 1} {$i < 16} {set i $n; incr n} { 100 - $tbl insert end [list $n [expr {$i < 8}] "Line $n" 9600 8 None 1 XON/XOFF \ 101 - $clock $clock [lindex $colorNames $i]] 102 - 103 - set availImg [expr {($i < 8) ? "checkedImg" : "uncheckedImg"}] 104 - $tbl cellconfigure end,available -image $availImg 105 - $tbl cellconfigure end,color -image img[lindex $colorValues $i] 106 -} 107 - 108 -set btn [ttk::button $f.btn -text "Close" -command exit] 109 - 110 -# 111 -# Manage the widgets 112 -# 113 -pack $btn -side bottom -pady 10 114 -pack $tbl -side top -expand yes -fill both 115 -pack $f -expand yes -fill both 116 - 117 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 118 -# editStartCmd 119 -# 120 -# Applies some configuration options to the edit window; if the latter is a 121 -# combobox, the procedure populates it. 122 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 123 -proc editStartCmd {tbl row col text} { 124 - set w [$tbl editwinpath] 125 - 126 - switch [$tbl columncget $col -name] { 127 - lineName { 128 - # 129 - # Set an upper limit of 20 for the number of characters 130 - # 131 - wcb::callback $w before insert {wcb::checkEntryLen 20} 132 - } 133 - 134 - baudRate { 135 - # 136 - # Populate the combobox and allow no more 137 - # than 6 digits in its entry component 138 - # 139 - $w list insert end 50 75 110 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 \ 140 - 57600 115200 230400 460800 921600 141 - wcb::callback [$tbl entrypath] before insert \ 142 - {wcb::checkEntryLen 6} {wcb::checkStrForRegExp {^[0-9]*$}} 143 - } 144 - 145 - dataBits { 146 - # 147 - # Configure the spinbox 148 - # 149 - $w configure -from 5 -to 8 -state readonly 150 - } 151 - 152 - parity { 153 - # 154 - # Populate the combobox and make it non-editable 155 - # 156 - $w list insert end None Even Odd Mark Space 157 - $w configure -editable no 158 - } 159 - 160 - stopBits { 161 - # 162 - # Populate the combobox and make it non-editable 163 - # 164 - $w list insert end 1 1.5 2 165 - $w configure -editable no 166 - } 167 - 168 - handshake { 169 - # 170 - # Populate the combobox and make it non-editable 171 - # 172 - $w list insert end XON/XOFF RTS/CTS None 173 - $w configure -editable no 174 - } 175 - 176 - actDate - 177 - actTime { 178 - # 179 - # Configure the mentry widget 180 - # 181 - $w configure -justify center 182 - } 183 - 184 - color { 185 - # 186 - # Populate the menu and make sure the menubutton will display the 187 - # color name rather than $text, which is "", due to -formatcommand 188 - # 189 - set menu [$w cget -menu] 190 - foreach name $::colorNames { 191 - $menu add radiobutton -compound left \ 192 - -image img$::colors($name) -label $name 193 - } 194 - $menu entryconfigure 8 -columnbreak 1 195 - return [$tbl cellcget $row,$col -text] 196 - } 197 - } 198 - 199 - return $text 200 -} 201 - 202 -# 203 -# Message strings corresponding to the values 204 -# returned by mentry::getClockVal on failure 205 -# 206 -array set msgs { 207 - EMPTY "Field value missing" 208 - BAD "Invalid field value" 209 - BAD_DATE "Invalid date" 210 - BAD_YEAR "Unsupported year" 211 -} 212 - 213 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 214 -# editEndCmd 215 -# 216 -# Performs a final validation of the text contained in the edit window and gets 217 -# the cell's internal contents. 218 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 219 -proc editEndCmd {tbl row col text} { 220 - switch [$tbl columncget $col -name] { 221 - available { 222 - # 223 - # Update the image contained in the cell 224 - # 225 - set img [expr {$text ? "checkedImg" : "uncheckedImg"}] 226 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,$col -image $img 227 - } 228 - 229 - baudRate { 230 - # 231 - # Check whether the baud rate is an integer in the range 50..921600 232 - # 233 - if {![regexp {^[0-9]+$} $text] || $text < 50 || $text > 921600} { 234 - bell 235 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 236 - "The baud rate must be an integer in the range 50..921600" 237 - $tbl rejectinput 238 - } 239 - } 240 - 241 - actDate { 242 - # 243 - # Check whether the last argument is a clock value in seconds 244 - # 245 - if {![string is digit $text]} { 246 - bell 247 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message $::msgs($text) 248 - $tbl rejectinput 249 - return "" 250 - } 251 - 252 - # 253 - # Check whether the activation clock value is later than the 254 - # current one; if this is the case then make sure the cells 255 - # "actDate" and "actTime" will have the same internal value 256 - # 257 - set actTime [$tbl cellcget $row,actTime -text] 258 - set actClock [clock scan [formatTime $actTime] -base $text] 259 - if {$actClock <= [clock seconds]} { 260 - bell 261 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 262 - "The activation date & time must be in the future" 263 - $tbl rejectinput 264 - } else { 265 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,actTime -text $actClock 266 - return $actClock 267 - } 268 - } 269 - 270 - actTime { 271 - # 272 - # Check whether the last argument is a clock value in seconds 273 - # 274 - if {![string is digit $text]} { 275 - bell 276 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message $::msgs($text) 277 - $tbl rejectinput 278 - return "" 279 - } 280 - 281 - # 282 - # Check whether the activation clock value is later than the 283 - # current one; if this is the case then make sure the cells 284 - # "actDate" and "actTime" will have the same internal value 285 - # 286 - set actDate [$tbl cellcget $row,actDate -text] 287 - set actClock [clock scan [formatTime $text] -base $actDate] 288 - if {$actClock <= [clock seconds]} { 289 - bell 290 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 291 - "The activation date & time must be in the future" 292 - $tbl rejectinput 293 - } else { 294 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,actDate -text $actClock 295 - return $actClock 296 - } 297 - } 298 - 299 - color { 300 - # 301 - # Update the image contained in the cell 302 - # 303 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,$col -image img$::colors($text) 304 - } 305 - } 306 - 307 - return $text 308 -}
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/open.gif.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/openFolder.gif.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/option.tcl.
1 -#============================================================================== 2 -# Contains some Tk option database settings. 3 -# 4 -# Copyright (c) 2004-2016 Csaba Nemethi (E-mail: csaba.nemethi@t-online.de) 5 -#============================================================================== 6 - 7 -# 8 -# Get the current windowing system ("x11", "win32", "classic", or "aqua") 9 -# 10 -if {[catch {tk windowingsystem} winSys] != 0} { 11 - switch $::tcl_platform(platform) { 12 - unix { set winSys x11 } 13 - windows { set winSys win32 } 14 - macintosh { set winSys classic } 15 - } 16 -} 17 - 18 -# 19 -# Add some entries to the Tk option database 20 -# 21 -if {[string compare $winSys "x11"] == 0} { 22 - # 23 - # Create the font TkDefaultFont if not yet present 24 - # 25 - catch {font create TkDefaultFont -family Helvetica -size -12} 26 - 27 - option add *Font TkDefaultFont 28 - option add *selectBackground #678db2 29 - option add *selectForeground white 30 -} else { 31 - option add *ScrollArea.borderWidth 1 32 - option add *ScrollArea.relief sunken 33 - option add *ScrollArea.Tablelist.borderWidth 0 34 - option add *ScrollArea.Tablelist.highlightThickness 0 35 - option add *ScrollArea.Text.borderWidth 0 36 - option add *ScrollArea.Text.highlightThickness 0 37 -} 38 -option add *Tablelist.background white 39 -option add *Tablelist.stripeBackground #f0f0f0 40 -option add *Tablelist.setGrid yes 41 -option add *Tablelist.movableColumns yes 42 -option add *Tablelist.labelCommand tablelist::sortByColumn 43 -option add *Tablelist.labelCommand2 tablelist::addToSortColumns
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/option_tile.tcl.
1 -#============================================================================== 2 -# Contains some Tk option database settings. 3 -# 4 -# Copyright (c) 2004-2016 Csaba Nemethi (E-mail: csaba.nemethi@t-online.de) 5 -#============================================================================== 6 - 7 -# 8 -# Get the current windowing system ("x11", "win32", or 9 -# "aqua") and add some entries to the Tk option database 10 -# 11 -if {[tk windowingsystem] eq "x11"} { 12 - option add *Font TkDefaultFont 13 -} else { 14 - option add *ScrollArea.borderWidth 1 15 - option add *ScrollArea.relief sunken 16 - option add *ScrollArea.Tablelist.borderWidth 0 17 - option add *ScrollArea.Text.borderWidth 0 18 - option add *ScrollArea.Text.highlightThickness 0 19 -} 20 -tablelist::setThemeDefaults 21 -if {[tablelist::getCurrentTheme] eq "aqua"} { 22 - option add *Listbox.selectBackground \ 23 - $tablelist::themeDefaults(-selectbackground) 24 - option add *Listbox.selectForeground \ 25 - $tablelist::themeDefaults(-selectforeground) 26 -} else { 27 - option add *selectBackground $tablelist::themeDefaults(-selectbackground) 28 - option add *selectForeground $tablelist::themeDefaults(-selectforeground) 29 -} 30 -option add *selectBorderWidth $tablelist::themeDefaults(-selectborderwidth) 31 -option add *Tablelist.background white 32 -option add *Tablelist.stripeBackground #f0f0f0 33 -option add *Tablelist.setGrid yes 34 -option add *Tablelist.movableColumns yes 35 -option add *Tablelist.labelCommand tablelist::sortByColumn 36 -option add *Tablelist.labelCommand2 tablelist::addToSortColumns
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/styles.tcl.
1 -#!/usr/bin/env wish 2 - 3 -#============================================================================== 4 -# Demonstrates some ways of improving the look & feel of a tablelist widget. 5 -# 6 -# Copyright (c) 2002-2016 Csaba Nemethi (E-mail: csaba.nemethi@t-online.de) 7 -#============================================================================== 8 - 9 -package require tablelist 5.16 10 - 11 -wm title . "Tablelist Styles" 12 - 13 -# 14 -# Get the current windowing system ("x11", "win32", "classic", 15 -# or "aqua") and add some entries to the Tk option database 16 -# 17 -if {[catch {tk windowingsystem} winSys] != 0} { 18 - switch $::tcl_platform(platform) { 19 - unix { set winSys x11 } 20 - windows { set winSys win32 } 21 - macintosh { set winSys classic } 22 - } 23 -} 24 -if {[string compare $winSys "x11"] == 0} { 25 - # 26 - # Create the font TkDefaultFont if not yet present 27 - # 28 - catch {font create TkDefaultFont -family Helvetica -size -12} 29 - 30 - option add *Font TkDefaultFont 31 - option add *selectBackground #678db2 32 - option add *selectForeground white 33 -} 34 - 35 -# 36 -# Create, configure, and populate 8 tablelist widgets 37 -# 38 -frame .f 39 -for {set n 0} { $n < 8} {incr n} { 40 - set tbl .f.tbl$n 41 - tablelist::tablelist $tbl \ 42 - -columntitles {"Label 0" "Label 1" "Label 2" "Label 3"} \ 43 - -background white -height 4 -width 40 -stretch all 44 - if {[$tbl cget -selectborderwidth] == 0} { 45 - $tbl configure -spacing 1 46 - } 47 - 48 - switch $n { 49 - 1 { 50 - $tbl configure -showseparators yes 51 - } 52 - 2 { 53 - $tbl configure -stripebackground #f0f0f0 54 - } 55 - 3 { 56 - $tbl configure -stripebackground #f0f0f0 -showseparators yes 57 - } 58 - 4 { 59 - $tbl columnconfigure 1 -background LightYellow 60 - $tbl columnconfigure 3 -background LightCyan 61 - } 62 - 5 { 63 - $tbl configure -showseparators yes 64 - $tbl columnconfigure 1 -background LightYellow 65 - $tbl columnconfigure 3 -background LightCyan 66 - } 67 - 6 { 68 - $tbl configure -stripebackground #f0f0f0 69 - $tbl columnconfigure 1 -background LightYellow \ 70 - -stripebackground #f0f0d2 71 - $tbl columnconfigure 3 -background LightCyan \ 72 - -stripebackground #d2f0f0 73 - } 74 - 7 { 75 - $tbl configure -stripebackground #f0f0f0 -showseparators yes 76 - $tbl columnconfigure 1 -background LightYellow \ 77 - -stripebackground #f0f0d2 78 - $tbl columnconfigure 3 -background LightCyan \ 79 - -stripebackground #d2f0f0 80 - } 81 - } 82 - 83 - foreach row {0 1 2 3} { 84 - $tbl insert end \ 85 - [list "Cell $row,0" "Cell $row,1" "Cell $row,2" "Cell $row,3"] 86 - } 87 -} 88 - 89 -button .close -text "Close" -command exit 90 -frame .bottom -height 10 91 - 92 -# 93 -# Manage the widgets 94 -# 95 -grid .f.tbl0 .f.tbl1 -sticky news -padx 5 -pady 5 96 -grid .f.tbl2 .f.tbl3 -sticky news -padx 5 -pady 5 97 -grid .f.tbl4 .f.tbl5 -sticky news -padx 5 -pady 5 98 -grid .f.tbl6 .f.tbl7 -sticky news -padx 5 -pady 5 99 -grid rowconfigure .f {0 1 2 3} -weight 1 100 -grid columnconfigure .f {0 1} -weight 1 101 -pack .bottom .close -side bottom 102 -pack .f -side top -expand yes -fill both -padx 5 -pady 5
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/styles_tile.tcl.
1 -#!/usr/bin/env wish 2 - 3 -#============================================================================== 4 -# Demonstrates some ways of improving the look & feel of a tablelist widget. 5 -# 6 -# Copyright (c) 2002-2016 Csaba Nemethi (E-mail: csaba.nemethi@t-online.de) 7 -#============================================================================== 8 - 9 -package require tablelist_tile 5.16 10 - 11 -wm title . "Tablelist Styles" 12 - 13 -# 14 -# Improve the window's appearance by using a tile 15 -# frame as a container for the other widgets 16 -# 17 -set f [ttk::frame .f] 18 - 19 -# 20 -# Create, configure, and populate 8 tablelist widgets 21 -# 22 -ttk::frame $f.f 23 -for {set n 0} { $n < 8} {incr n} { 24 - set tbl $f.f.tbl$n 25 - tablelist::tablelist $tbl \ 26 - -columntitles {"Label 0" "Label 1" "Label 2" "Label 3"} \ 27 - -background white -stripebackground "" -height 4 -width 40 -stretch all 28 - if {[$tbl cget -selectborderwidth] == 0} { 29 - $tbl configure -spacing 1 30 - } 31 - 32 - switch $n { 33 - 1 { 34 - $tbl configure -showseparators yes 35 - } 36 - 2 { 37 - $tbl configure -stripebackground #f0f0f0 38 - } 39 - 3 { 40 - $tbl configure -stripebackground #f0f0f0 -showseparators yes 41 - } 42 - 4 { 43 - $tbl columnconfigure 1 -background LightYellow 44 - $tbl columnconfigure 3 -background LightCyan 45 - } 46 - 5 { 47 - $tbl configure -showseparators yes 48 - $tbl columnconfigure 1 -background LightYellow 49 - $tbl columnconfigure 3 -background LightCyan 50 - } 51 - 6 { 52 - $tbl configure -stripebackground #f0f0f0 53 - $tbl columnconfigure 1 -background LightYellow \ 54 - -stripebackground #f0f0d2 55 - $tbl columnconfigure 3 -background LightCyan \ 56 - -stripebackground #d2f0f0 57 - } 58 - 7 { 59 - $tbl configure -stripebackground #f0f0f0 -showseparators yes 60 - $tbl columnconfigure 1 -background LightYellow \ 61 - -stripebackground #f0f0d2 62 - $tbl columnconfigure 3 -background LightCyan \ 63 - -stripebackground #d2f0f0 64 - } 65 - } 66 - 67 - foreach row {0 1 2 3} { 68 - $tbl insert end \ 69 - [list "Cell $row,0" "Cell $row,1" "Cell $row,2" "Cell $row,3"] 70 - } 71 -} 72 - 73 -ttk::button $f.close -text "Close" -command exit 74 -ttk::frame $f.bottom -height 10 75 - 76 -# 77 -# Manage the widgets 78 -# 79 -grid $f.f.tbl0 $f.f.tbl1 -sticky news -padx 5 -pady 5 80 -grid $f.f.tbl2 $f.f.tbl3 -sticky news -padx 5 -pady 5 81 -grid $f.f.tbl4 $f.f.tbl5 -sticky news -padx 5 -pady 5 82 -grid $f.f.tbl6 $f.f.tbl7 -sticky news -padx 5 -pady 5 83 -grid rowconfigure $f.f {0 1 2 3} -weight 1 84 -grid columnconfigure $f.f {0 1} -weight 1 85 -pack $f.bottom $f.close -side bottom 86 -pack $f.f -side top -expand yes -fill both -padx 5 -pady 5 87 -pack $f -expand yes -fill both
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/tileWidgets.tcl.
1 -#!/usr/bin/env wish 2 - 3 -#============================================================================== 4 -# Demonstrates the interactive tablelist cell editing with the aid of some 5 -# widgets from the tile package and of the Tk core spinbox widget. 6 -# 7 -# Copyright (c) 2005-2016 Csaba Nemethi (E-mail: csaba.nemethi@t-online.de) 8 -#============================================================================== 9 - 10 -package require tablelist_tile 5.16 11 - 12 -wm title . "Serial Line Configuration" 13 - 14 -# 15 -# Add some entries to the Tk option database 16 -# 17 -set dir [file dirname [info script]] 18 -source [file join $dir option_tile.tcl] 19 -option add *Tablelist*Spinbox.background white 20 -option add *Tablelist*Spinbox.readonlyBackground white 21 - 22 -# 23 -# Create the images "checkedImg" and "uncheckedImg", as well as 16 images of 24 -# names like "img#FF0000", displaying colors identified by names like "red" 25 -# 26 -source [file join $dir images.tcl] 27 - 28 -# 29 -# Improve the window's appearance by using a tile 30 -# frame as a container for the other widgets 31 -# 32 -set f [ttk::frame .f] 33 - 34 -# 35 -# Work around the improper appearance of the tile scrollbars in the aqua theme 36 -# 37 -if {[tablelist::getCurrentTheme] eq "aqua"} { 38 - interp alias {} ttk::scrollbar {} ::scrollbar 39 -} 40 - 41 -# 42 -# Create a tablelist widget with editable columns (except the first one) 43 -# 44 -set tbl $f.tbl 45 -tablelist::tablelist $tbl \ 46 - -columns {0 "No." right 47 - 0 "Available" center 48 - 0 "Name" left 49 - 0 "Baud Rate" right 50 - 0 "Data Bits" center 51 - 0 "Parity" left 52 - 0 "Stop Bits" center 53 - 0 "Handshake" left 54 - 0 "Activation Date" center 55 - 0 "Activation Time" center 56 - 0 "Cable Color" center} \ 57 - -editstartcommand editStartCmd -editendcommand editEndCmd \ 58 - -height 0 -width 0 59 -if {[$tbl cget -selectborderwidth] == 0} { 60 - $tbl configure -spacing 1 61 -} 62 -$tbl columnconfigure 0 -sortmode integer 63 -$tbl columnconfigure 1 -name available -editable yes \ 64 - -editwindow ttk::checkbutton -formatcommand emptyStr 65 -$tbl columnconfigure 2 -name lineName -editable yes -editwindow ttk::entry \ 66 - -sortmode dictionary 67 -$tbl columnconfigure 3 -name baudRate -editable yes -editwindow ttk::combobox \ 68 - -sortmode integer 69 -if {[info commands ttk::spinbox] eq ""} { 70 - $tbl columnconfigure 4 -name dataBits -editable yes -editwindow spinbox 71 -} else { 72 - $tbl columnconfigure 4 -name dataBits -editable yes -editwindow ttk::spinbox 73 -} 74 -$tbl columnconfigure 5 -name parity -editable yes -editwindow ttk::combobox 75 -$tbl columnconfigure 6 -name stopBits -editable yes -editwindow ttk::combobox 76 -$tbl columnconfigure 7 -name handshake -editable yes -editwindow ttk::combobox 77 -$tbl columnconfigure 8 -name actDate -editable yes -editwindow ttk::entry \ 78 - -formatcommand formatDate -sortmode integer 79 -$tbl columnconfigure 9 -name actTime -editable yes -editwindow ttk::entry \ 80 - -formatcommand formatTime -sortmode integer 81 -$tbl columnconfigure 10 -name color -editable yes \ 82 - -editwindow ttk::menubutton -formatcommand emptyStr 83 - 84 -proc emptyStr val { return "" } 85 -proc formatDate val { return [clock format $val -format "%Y-%m-%d"] } 86 -proc formatTime val { return [clock format $val -format "%H:%M:%S"] } 87 - 88 -# 89 -# Populate the tablelist widget; set the activation 90 -# date & time to 10 minutes past the current clock value 91 -# 92 -set clock [expr {[clock seconds] + 600}] 93 -for {set i 0; set n 1} {$i < 16} {set i $n; incr n} { 94 - $tbl insert end [list $n [expr {$i < 8}] "Line $n" 9600 8 None 1 XON/XOFF \ 95 - $clock $clock [lindex $colorNames $i]] 96 - 97 - set availImg [expr {($i < 8) ? "checkedImg" : "uncheckedImg"}] 98 - $tbl cellconfigure end,available -image $availImg 99 - $tbl cellconfigure end,color -image img[lindex $colorValues $i] 100 -} 101 - 102 -set btn [ttk::button $f.btn -text "Close" -command exit] 103 - 104 -# 105 -# Manage the widgets 106 -# 107 -pack $btn -side bottom -pady 10 108 -pack $tbl -side top -expand yes -fill both 109 -pack $f -expand yes -fill both 110 - 111 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 112 -# editStartCmd 113 -# 114 -# Applies some configuration options to the edit window; if the latter is a 115 -# combobox, the procedure populates it. 116 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 117 -proc editStartCmd {tbl row col text} { 118 - set w [$tbl editwinpath] 119 - 120 - switch [$tbl columncget $col -name] { 121 - lineName { 122 - # 123 - # Set an upper limit of 20 for the number of characters 124 - # 125 - $w configure -invalidcommand bell -validate key \ 126 - -validatecommand {expr {[string length %P] <= 20}} 127 - } 128 - 129 - baudRate { 130 - # 131 - # Populate the combobox and allow no more 132 - # than 6 digits in its entry component 133 - # 134 - $w configure -values {50 75 110 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 135 - 57600 115200 230400 460800 921600} 136 - $w configure -invalidcommand bell -validate key -validatecommand \ 137 - {expr {[string length %P] <= 6 && [regexp {^[0-9]*$} %S]}} 138 - } 139 - 140 - dataBits { 141 - # 142 - # Configure the spinbox 143 - # 144 - $w configure -from 5 -to 8 -state readonly 145 - } 146 - 147 - parity { 148 - # 149 - # Populate the combobox and make it non-editable 150 - # 151 - $w configure -values {None Even Odd Mark Space} -state readonly 152 - } 153 - 154 - stopBits { 155 - # 156 - # Populate the combobox and make it non-editable 157 - # 158 - $w configure -values {1 1.5 2} -state readonly 159 - } 160 - 161 - handshake { 162 - # 163 - # Populate the combobox and make it non-editable 164 - # 165 - $w configure -values {XON/XOFF RTS/CTS None} -state readonly 166 - } 167 - 168 - actDate { 169 - # 170 - # Set an upper limit of 10 for the number of characters 171 - # and allow only digits and the "-" character in it 172 - # 173 - $w configure -invalidcommand bell -validate key -validatecommand \ 174 - {expr {[string length %P] <= 10 && [regexp {^[0-9-]*$} %S]}} 175 - } 176 - 177 - actTime { 178 - # 179 - # Set an upper limit of 8 for the number of characters 180 - # and allow only digits and the ":" character in it 181 - # 182 - $w configure -invalidcommand bell -validate key -validatecommand \ 183 - {expr {[string length %P] <= 8 && [regexp {^[0-9:]*$} %S]}} 184 - } 185 - 186 - color { 187 - # 188 - # Populate the menu and make sure the menubutton will display the 189 - # color name rather than $text, which is "", due to -formatcommand 190 - # 191 - set menu [$w cget -menu] 192 - foreach name $::colorNames { 193 - $menu add radiobutton -compound left \ 194 - -image img$::colors($name) -label $name 195 - } 196 - $menu entryconfigure 8 -columnbreak 1 197 - return [$tbl cellcget $row,$col -text] 198 - } 199 - } 200 - 201 - return $text 202 -} 203 - 204 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 205 -# editEndCmd 206 -# 207 -# Performs a final validation of the text contained in the edit window and gets 208 -# the cell's internal contents. 209 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 210 -proc editEndCmd {tbl row col text} { 211 - switch [$tbl columncget $col -name] { 212 - available { 213 - # 214 - # Update the image contained in the cell 215 - # 216 - set img [expr {$text ? "checkedImg" : "uncheckedImg"}] 217 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,$col -image $img 218 - } 219 - 220 - baudRate { 221 - # 222 - # Check whether the baud rate is an integer in the range 50..921600 223 - # 224 - if {![regexp {^[0-9]+$} $text] || $text < 50 || $text > 921600} { 225 - bell 226 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 227 - "The baud rate must be an integer in the range 50..921600" 228 - $tbl rejectinput 229 - } 230 - } 231 - 232 - actDate { 233 - # 234 - # Get the activation date in seconds from the last argument 235 - # 236 - if {[catch {clock scan $text} actDate] != 0} { 237 - bell 238 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message "Invalid date" 239 - $tbl rejectinput 240 - return "" 241 - } 242 - 243 - # 244 - # Check whether the activation clock value is later than the 245 - # current one; if this is the case then make sure the cells 246 - # "actDate" and "actTime" will have the same internal value 247 - # 248 - set actTime [$tbl cellcget $row,actTime -text] 249 - set actClock [clock scan [formatTime $actTime] -base $actDate] 250 - if {$actClock <= [clock seconds]} { 251 - bell 252 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 253 - "The activation date & time must be in the future" 254 - $tbl rejectinput 255 - } else { 256 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,actTime -text $actClock 257 - return $actClock 258 - } 259 - } 260 - 261 - actTime { 262 - # 263 - # Get the activation clock value in seconds from the last argument 264 - # 265 - set actDate [$tbl cellcget $row,actDate -text] 266 - if {[catch {clock scan $text -base $actDate} actClock] != 0} { 267 - bell 268 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message "Invalid time" 269 - $tbl rejectinput 270 - return "" 271 - } 272 - 273 - # 274 - # Check whether the activation clock value is later than the 275 - # current one; if this is the case then make sure the cells 276 - # "actDate" and "actTime" will have the same internal value 277 - # 278 - if {$actClock <= [clock seconds]} { 279 - bell 280 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 281 - "The activation date & time must be in the future" 282 - $tbl rejectinput 283 - } else { 284 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,actDate -text $actClock 285 - return $actClock 286 - } 287 - } 288 - 289 - color { 290 - # 291 - # Update the image contained in the cell 292 - # 293 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,$col -image img$::colors($text) 294 - } 295 - } 296 - 297 - return $text 298 -}
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/demos/unchecked.gif.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/adwaita.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/ambiance.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/aqua.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/arrowStyles.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/arrowStyles_vista.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/baghira.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/bicolor1.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/bicolor2.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/bicolor3.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/bicolor4.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/browse.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/browseTree.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/bwidget.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/classic1.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/classic2.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/classic3.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/classic4.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/config.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/dirViewer.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/dust.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/dustSand.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/embeddedWindows.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/embeddedWindows_tile.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/gtk.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/index.html.
1 -<html> 2 -<head> 3 - <title>The Multi-Column Listbox and Tree Widget Package Tablelist 4 - 5.16</title> 5 - 6 - <meta name="Author" content="Csaba Nemethi"> 7 - <meta name="Keywords" content= 8 - "tablelist, multi-column, listbox, tree, widget, tile"> 9 -</head> 10 - 11 -<body bgcolor="#FFFFFF"> 12 - <div align="center"> 13 - <h1>The Multi-Column Listbox and Tree Widget Package Tablelist 5.16</h1> 14 - 15 - <h3>by</h3> 16 - 17 - <h2>Csaba Nemethi</h2> 18 - 19 - <address> 20 - <a href="mailto:csaba.nemethi@t-online.de">csaba.nemethi@t-online.de</a> 21 - </address> 22 - </div> 23 - 24 - <hr> 25 - 26 - <h2>Contents</h2> 27 - 28 - <p><a href="tablelist.html">Tablelist Programmer's Guide</a></p> 29 - 30 - <p><a href="tablelistWidget.html">The <code>tablelist::tablelist</code> 31 - Command</a></p> 32 - 33 - <p><a href="tablelistColSort.html">Commands for Interactive Sorting by One or 34 - More Columns</a></p> 35 - 36 - <p><a href="tablelistBinding.html">Helper Commands Used in Tablelist Binding 37 - Scripts</a></p> 38 - 39 - <p><a href="tablelistTkCore.html">Interactive Tablelist Cell Editing Using Tk 40 - Core Widgets</a></p> 41 - 42 - <p><a href="tablelistTile.html">Interactive Tablelist Cell Editing Using Tile 43 - Widgets</a></p> 44 - 45 - <p><a href="tablelistBWidget.html">Interactive Tablelist Cell Editing Using 46 - the BWidget Package</a></p> 47 - 48 - <p><a href="tablelistIwidgets.html">Interactive Tablelist Cell Editing Using 49 - the Iwidgets Package</a></p> 50 - 51 - <p><a href="tablelistCombobox.html">Interactive Tablelist Cell Editing Using 52 - the combobox Package</a></p> 53 - 54 - <p><a href="tablelistCtext.html">Interactive Tablelist Cell Editing Using 55 - the ctext Package</a></p> 56 - 57 - <p><a href="tablelistMentry.html">Interactive Tablelist Cell Editing Using 58 - the Mentry Package</a></p> 59 - 60 - <p><a href="tablelistThemes.html">Commands Related to Tile Themes</a></p> 61 -</body> 62 -</html>
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/klearlooks.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/mate.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/mint.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/mint2.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/newWave.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/oxygen1.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/oxygen2.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/phase.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/plain1.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/plain2.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/plain3.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/plain4.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/plastik.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/plastique.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/radiance.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/styles.png.
cannot compute difference between binary files
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/stylesheet.css.
1 -/* generic class defining a top margin whose height equals the font size */ 2 -.tm {margin-top: 1em} 3 - 4 -/* background and border for the <pre> tag */ 5 -pre {background: #F7F7F7; border: silver solid 1px} 6 - 7 -/* color for the <span> tag */ 8 -span {color: #E00000}
Deleted libs/tablelist5.16/doc/tablelist.html.
1 -<html> 2 -<head> 3 - <title>Tablelist Programmer's Guide</title> 4 - 5 - <meta name="Author" content="Csaba Nemethi"> 6 - <meta name="Keywords" content= 7 - "tablelist, multi-column, listbox, tree, widget, tile"> 8 - 9 - <link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="stylesheet.css"> 10 -</head> 11 - 12 -<body bgcolor="#FFFFFF"> 13 - <div align="center"> 14 - <h1>Tablelist Programmer's Guide</h1> 15 - 16 - <h2>For Tablelist Version 5.16</h2> 17 - 18 - <h3>by</h3> 19 - 20 - <h2>Csaba Nemethi</h2> 21 - 22 - <address> 23 - <a href="mailto:csaba.nemethi@t-online.de">csaba.nemethi@t-online.de</a> 24 - </address> 25 - </div> 26 - <hr> 27 - 28 - <h2 id="contents">Contents</h2> 29 - 30 - <h4><a href="#overview">Overview</a></h4> 31 - 32 - <ul> 33 - <li><a href="#ov_what">What is Tablelist?</a></li> 34 - 35 - <li><a href="#ov_get">How to Get It?</a></li> 36 - 37 - <li><a href="#ov_install">How to Install It?</a></li> 38 - 39 - <li><a href="#ov_use">How to Use It?</a></li> 40 - 41 - <li><a href="#ov_tile">More on Tablelist_tile</a></li> 42 - </ul> 43 - 44 - <h4><a href="#examples">Examples</a></h4> 45 - 46 - <ul> 47 - <li><a href="#ex_config">A tablelist Widget for Displaying and Editing 48 - Configuration Options</a></li> 49 - 50 - <li><a href="#ex_browse">Two Widget Browsers Based on a tablelist</a></li> 51 - 52 - <li><a href="#ex_dirViewer">A Directory Viewer Based on a 53 - tablelist</a></li> 54 - 55 - <li><a href="#ex_styles">Improving the Look & Feel of a tablelist 56 - Widget</a></li> 57 - 58 - <li><a href="#ex_editing">Advanced Interactive tablelist Cell 59 - Editing</a></li> 60 - 61 - <li><a href="#ex_windows">A tablelist Widget Containing Embedded 62 - Windows</a></li> 63 - 64 - <li><a href="#ex_tile">Tile-Based Demo Scripts</a></li> 65 - </ul> 66 - 67 - <div align="center"> 68 - <p><a href="index.html">Start page</a></p> 69 - </div> 70 - <hr> 71 - 72 - <h2 id="overview">Overview</h2> 73 - 74 - <h3 id="ov_what">What is Tablelist?</h3> 75 - 76 - <p>Tablelist is a library package for Tcl/Tk versions 8.0 or higher, written 77 - in pure Tcl/Tk code. It contains:</p> 78 - 79 - <ul> 80 - <li>the implementation of the <a href= 81 - "tablelistWidget.html"><b>tablelist</b> mega-widget</a>, including a 82 - general utility module for mega-widgets;</li> 83 - 84 - <li>a demo script containing a useful procedure that displays the 85 - configuration options of an arbitrary widget in a tablelist and enables you 86 - to edit their values interactively;</li> 87 - 88 - <li>a demo script implementing a widget browser based on a tablelist used 89 - as multi-column listbox;</li> 90 - 91 - <li>a demo script implementing a widget browser based on a tablelist used 92 - as multi-column tree widget;</li> 93 - 94 - <li>a demo script implementing a directory viewer based on a tablelist used 95 - as multi-column tree widget;</li> 96 - 97 - <li>a demo script showing several ways to improve the appearance of a 98 - tablelist widget;</li> 99 - 100 - <li>four further demo scripts, illustrating the interactive cell editing 101 - with the aid of various widgets from the Tk core and from the packages 102 - tile, BWidget, Iwidgets, combobox (by Bryan Oakley), and Mentry;</li> 103 - 104 - <li>one further demo script, with a tablelist widget containing embedded 105 - windows;</li> 106 - 107 - <li>tile-based counterparts of the above-mentioned demo scripts;</li> 108 - 109 - <li>this tutorial;</li> 110 - 111 - <li>reference pages in HTML format.</li> 112 - </ul> 113 - 114 - <p>A tablelist is a multi-column listbox and tree widget. The width of 115 - each column can be dynamic (i.e., just large enough to hold all its elements, 116 - including the header) or static (specified in characters or pixels). 117 - The columns are, per default, resizable. The alignment of each column 118 - can be specified as <code>left</code>, <code>right</code>, or 119 - <code>center</code>.</p> 120 - 121 - <p>The columns, rows, and cells can be configured individually. Several 122 - of the global and column-specific options refer to the headers, implemented 123 - as label widgets. For instance, the <code>-labelcommand</code> option 124 - specifies a Tcl command to be invoked when mouse button 1 is released over a 125 - label. The most common value of this option sorts the items based on 126 - the respective column.</p> 127 - 128 - <p>The Tablelist package provides a great variety of tree styles controlling 129 - the look & feel of the column that displays the tree hierarchy with the 130 - aid of indentations and expand/collapse controls.</p> 131 - 132 - <p>Interactive editing of the elements of a tablelist widget can be enabled 133 - for individual cells and for entire columns. A great variety of widgets 134 - from the Tk core and from the packages tile, BWidget, Iwidgets, combobox, 135 - ctext, and Mentry (or Mentry_tile) is supported for being used as embedded 136 - edit window. In addition, a rich set of keyboard bindings is provided 137 - for a comfortable navigation between the editable cells.</p> 138 - 139 - <p>The Tcl command corresponding to a tablelist widget is very similar to the 140 - one associated with a normal listbox. There are column-, row-, and 141 - cell-specific counterparts of the <code>configure</code> and 142 - <code>cget</code> subcommands (<code>columnconfigure</code>, 143 - <code>rowconfigure</code>, <code>cellconfigure</code>, ...). They can 144 - be used, among others, to insert images into the cells and the header labels, 145 - or to insert embedded windows into the cells. The <code>index</code>, 146 - <code>nearest</code>, and <code>see</code> command options refer to the rows, 147 - but similar subcommands are provided for the columns and cells 148 - (<code>columnindex</code>, <code>cellindex</code>, ...). The items can 149 - be sorted with the <code>sort</code>, <code>sortbycolumn</code>, and 150 - <code>sortbycolumnlist</code> command options.</p> 151 - 152 - <p>The bindings defined for the body of a tablelist widget make it behave 153 - just like a normal listbox. This includes the support for the virtual 154 - event <code><<ListboxSelect>></code> (which is equivalent to 155 - <code><<TablelistSelect>></code>). In addition, versions 156 - 2.3 or higher of the widget callback package Wcb (written in pure Tcl/Tk code 157 - as well) can be used to define callbacks for the <code>activate</code>, 158 - <code>selection set</code>, and <code>selection 159 - clear</code> commands, and Wcb versions 3.0 or higher also support 160 - callbacks for the <code>activatecell</code>, <code>cellselection 161 - set</code>, and <code>cellselection clear</code> 162 - commands. The download location of Wcb is</p> 163 - 164 - <blockquote> 165 - <address> 166 - <a href="http://www.nemethi.de">http://www.nemethi.de</a> 167 - </address> 168 - </blockquote> 169 - 170 - <h3 id="ov_get">How to Get It?</h3> 171 - 172 - <p>Tablelist is available for free download from the same URL as Wcb. 173 - The distribution file is <code>tablelist5.16.tar.gz</code> for UNIX and 174 - <code>tablelist5_16.zip</code> for Windows. These files contain the 175 - same information, except for the additional carriage return character 176 - preceding the linefeed at the end of each line in the text files for 177 - Windows.</p> 178 - 179 - <p>Tablelist is also included in tklib, which has the address</p> 180 - 181 - <blockquote> 182 - <address> 183 - <a href="http://core.tcl.tk/tklib">http://core.tcl.tk/tklib</a> 184 - </address> 185 - </blockquote> 186 - 187 - <h3 id="ov_install">How to Install It?</h3> 188 - 189 - <p>Install the package as a subdirectory of one of the directories given by 190 - the <code>auto_path</code> variable. For example, you can install it as 191 - a directory at the same level as the Tcl and Tk script libraries. The 192 - locations of these library directories are given by the 193 - <code>tcl_library</code> and <code>tk_library</code> variables, 194 - respectively.</p> 195 - 196 - <p>To install Tablelist <i>on UNIX</i>, <code>cd</code> to the desired 197 - directory and unpack the distribution file 198 - <code>tablelist5.16.tar.gz</code>:</p> 199 - 200 - <blockquote> 201 - <pre> 202 -gunzip -c tablelist5.16.tar.gz | tar -xf - 203 -</pre> 204 - </blockquote> 205 - 206 - <p>This command will create a directory named <code>tablelist5.16</code>, 207 - with the subdirectories <code>demos</code>, <code>doc</code>, and 208 - <code>scripts</code>.</p> 209 - 210 - <p><i>On Windows</i>, use WinZip or some other program capable of unpacking 211 - the distribution file <code>tablelist5_16.zip</code> into the directory 212 - <code>tablelist5.16</code>, with the subdirectories <code>demos</code>, 213 - <code>doc</code>, and <code>scripts</code>.</p> 214 - 215 - <p>The file <code>tablelistEdit.tcl</code> in the <code>scripts</code> 216 - directory is only needed for applications making use of interactive cell 217 - editing. Similarly, the file <code>tablelistMove.tcl</code> in the same 218 - directory is only required for scripts invoking the <code>move</code> or 219 - <code>movecolumn</code> command. Finally, the file 220 - <code>tablelistThemes.tcl</code> is only needed for applications using the 221 - package Tablelist_tile (see next section).</p> 222 - 223 - <p>Next, you should check the exact version number of your Tcl/Tk 224 - distribution, given by the <code>tcl_patchLevel</code> and 225 - <code>tk_patchLevel</code> variables. If you are using Tcl/Tk version 226 - 8.2.X, 8.3.0 - 8.3.2, or 8.4a1, then you should upgrade your Tcl/Tk 227 - distribution to a higher release. This is because a bug in these Tcl 228 - versions (fixed in Tcl 8.3.3 and 8.4a2) causes excessive memory use when 229 - calling <code>info exists</code> on non-existent array elements, 230 - and Tablelist makes a lot of invocations of this command.</p> 231 - 232 - <p>If for some reason you cannot upgrade your Tcl/Tk version, then you should 233 - execute the Tcl script <code>repair.tcl</code> in the directory 234 - <code>scripts</code>. This script makes backup copies of several files 235 - contained in this directory, and then creates new versions of them by 236 - replacing all invocations of <code>info exists</code> for array 237 - elements with a call to the helper procedure 238 - <code>arrElemExists</code>. The patched files work with all Tcl/Tk 239 - releases starting with 8.0, but the original ones have a much better 240 - performance.</p> 241 - 242 - <p>Notice that in tklib the Tablelist <code>demos</code> directory is 243 - replaced with the subdirectory <code>tablelist</code> of the 244 - <code>examples</code> directory. Please take this into account when 245 - reading the <a href="#examples">examples</a> below.</p> 246 - 247 - <h3 id="ov_use">How to Use It?</h3> 248 - 249 - <p>The Tablelist distribution provides two packages, called <b>Tablelist</b> 250 - and <b>Tablelist_tile</b>. The main difference between the two is that 251 - Tablelist_tile enables the tile-based, theme-specific appearance of tablelist 252 - widgets; this package requires Tcl/Tk 8.4 or higher and tile 0.6 or 253 - higher. It is not possible to use both packages in one and the same 254 - application, because both are implemented in the same <code>tablelist</code> 255 - namespace and provide identical commands.</p> 256 - 257 - <p>To be able to access the commands and variables defined in the package 258 - Tablelist, your scripts must contain one of the lines</p> 259 - 260 - <blockquote> 261 - <pre> 262 -package require tablelist ?<i>version</i>? 263 -package require Tablelist ?<i>version</i>? 264 -</pre> 265 - </blockquote> 266 - 267 - <p>You can use either one of the two statements above because the file 268 - <code>tablelist.tcl</code> contains both lines</p> 269 - 270 - <blockquote> 271 - <pre> 272 -package provide tablelist ... 273 -package provide Tablelist ... 274 -</pre> 275 - </blockquote> 276 - 277 - <p>Likewise, to be able to access the commands and variables defined in the 278 - package Tablelist_tile, your scripts must contain one of the lines</p> 279 - 280 - <blockquote> 281 - <pre> 282 -package require tablelist_tile ?<i>version</i>? 283 -package require Tablelist_tile ?<i>version</i>? 284 -</pre> 285 - </blockquote> 286 - 287 - <p>Again, you can use either one of the two statements above because the file 288 - <code>tablelist_tile.tcl</code> contains both lines</p> 289 - 290 - <blockquote> 291 - <pre> 292 -package provide tablelist_tile ... 293 -package provide Tablelist_tile ... 294 -</pre> 295 - </blockquote> 296 - 297 - <p>You are free to remove one of the above lines from 298 - <code>tablelist.tcl</code> and <code>tablelist_tile.tcl</code>, respectively, 299 - if you want to prevent the corresponding packages from making themselves 300 - known under two different names each. Of course, by doing so you 301 - restrict the argument of <code>package require</code> to a single 302 - name per package.</p> 303 - 304 - <p>Please note that <b>ActiveTcl versions 8.5 and later use a modified 305 - package mechanism, which only exports the all-lowercase names 306 - <code>tablelist</code> and <code>tablelist_tile</code></b>.</p> 307 - 308 - <p><b>REMARK:</b> If you have an earlier Tablelist version as part of 309 - ActiveTcl 8.5 or above and the new Tablelist release 5.16, then it is highly 310 - recommended to specify the version number <code>5.16</code> in the 311 - <code>package require</code> command, because otherwise the interpreter 312 - will load the old Tablelist version included in ActiveTcl as Tcl 313 - Module. The <a href="#examples">examples</a> below use the 314 - statement <code>package require tablelist 5.16</code>, and their 315 - tile-based counterparts invoke the command <code>package require 316 - tablelist_tile 5.16</code>.</p> 317 - 318 - <p>Since the packages Tablelist and Tablelist_tile are implemented in the 319 - <code>tablelist</code> namespace, you must either invoke the</p> 320 - 321 - <blockquote> 322 - <pre> 323 -namespace import tablelist::<i>pattern</i> ?tablelist::<i>pattern ...</i>? 324 -</pre> 325 - </blockquote> 326 - 327 - <p>command to import the <i>procedures</i> you need, or use qualified names 328 - like <code>tablelist::tablelist</code>. In the examples below we have 329 - chosen the latter approach.</p> 330 - 331 - <p>To access Tablelist <i>variables</i>, you <i>must</i> use qualified 332 - names. There are only 4 Tablelist variables (and one more when using 333 - Tablelist_tile) that are designed to be accessed outside the namespace 334 - <code>tablelist</code>:</p> 335 - 336 - <ul> 337 - <li>The variable <code>tablelist::version</code> holds the current version 338 - number of the Tablelist and Tablelist_tile packages.</li> 339 - 340 - <li>The variable <code>tablelist::library</code> holds the location of the 341 - Tablelist installation directory.</li> 342 - 343 - <li>The variable <code>tablelist::scalingpct</code> holds the scaling 344 - percentage used by Tablelist when adapting the sizes of the tree styles 345 - <code>vistaAero</code>, <code> vistaClassic</code>, <code>win7Aero</code>, 346 - <code>win7Classic</code>, and <code>win10</code> to the display's DPI 347 - scaling level. The currently supported values are <code>100</code>, 348 - <code>125</code>, <code>150</code>, and <code>200</code>. You can use 349 - the value of this variable, e.g., if you want to create images of different 350 - sizes, depending on the DPI scaling factor. For example, if your 351 - application uses images of size 16 x 16 on an unscaled display and 352 - <code>tablelist::scalingpct</code> has the value <code>150</code>, then the 353 - image size for this display should be 24 x 24.</li> 354 - 355 - <li>The read-only variable <code>tablelist::usingTile</code> has the value 356 - <code>0</code> in the package Tablelist and the value <code>1</code> in 357 - Tablelist_tile.</li> 358 - 359 - <li>In Tablelist_tile the array <code>tablelist::themeDefaults</code> holds 360 - the theme-specific default values of a series of Tablelist configuration 361 - options.</li> 362 - </ul> 363 - 364 - <h3 id="ov_tile">More on Tablelist_tile</h3> 365 - 366 - <p>A tablelist widget consists of a body (containing the items) and a header 367 - (displaying the column titles). Both components are contained in a 368 - hull, implemented as a frame. The header has a rather complex 369 - structure, consisting mainly of frame and label widgets. While in the 370 - Tablelist package all of these components are Tk widgets, the Tablelist_tile 371 - package uses both Tk and tile frame and label widgets. Due to several 372 - incompatibilities between Tk and tile, it is currently not possible to 373 - replace all Tk widgets making up a tablelist with their tile 374 - counterparts.</p> 375 - 376 - <p>From the above it follows that <b>the package Tablelist_tile will only 377 - work as expected if the Tk <code>frame</code> and <code>label</code> commands 378 - haven't been overridden by using <code>namespace import -force 379 - ttk::*</code> at global scope</b>. While earlier tile releases 380 - suggested using this command at global scope for the really adventurous, in 381 - newer tile versions this is considered a Really Bad Idea, causing many things 382 - to break. Instead, <b>you should explicitly invoke 383 - <code>ttk::frame</code>, <code>ttk::label</code>, etc. whenever you want to 384 - use a tile widget</b>.</p> 385 - 386 - <p><b>Overriding some other Tk widgets at global scope may be equally 387 - dangerous when using various widgets from the Tk core and from the packages 388 - BWidget, Iwidgets, combobox (by Bryan Oakley), ctext, and Mentry for 389 - interactive cell editing</b>, because these packages expect Tk widgets, which 390 - may not always be replaced by their tile counterparts.</p> 391 - 392 - <p>Another restriction to be taken into account is due to the fact that in 393 - earlier tile versions the <code>(ttk::)style theme use</code> 394 - command could only be used to set the current theme, but not to retrieve 395 - it. For this reason, the package Tablelist_tile makes use of the 396 - variable <code>ttk::currentTheme</code> or <code>tile::currentTheme</code> 397 - (depending on the tile version), which is set by the 398 - <code>ttk::setTheme</code> or <code>tile::setTheme</code> procedure. 399 - From this it follows that <b>the tile-based tablelist widgets will only have 400 - the expected appearance if the platform-specific default theme is either left 401 - unchanged or replaced with another theme by invoking the procedure 402 - <code>ttk::setTheme</code> or <code>tile::setTheme</code>, depending on the 403 - current tile version</b>. (See also the <code><a href= 404 - "tablelistThemes.html#setTheme">tablelist::setTheme</a></code> command.)</p> 405 - 406 - <p>After these cautions concerning the use of tile, the rest of this section 407 - describes the differences between the packages Tablelist and 408 - Tablelist_tile.</p> 409 - 410 - <p>The Tablelist_tile package checks whether the required Tcl, Tk, and tile 411 - versions are present, by executing the commands</p> 412 - 413 - <blockquote> 414 - <pre> 415 -package require Tcl 8.4 416 -package require Tk 8.4 417 -if {$::tk_version < 8.5 || [regexp {^8\.5a[1-5]$} $::tk_patchLevel]} { 418 - package require tile 0.6 419 -} 420 -</pre> 421 - </blockquote> 422 - 423 - <p>The last command above reflects the fact that, beginning with Tk 8.5a6, 424 - tile is integrated into the Tk core and therefore it should only be loaded 425 - explicitly when using an earlier Tk version.</p> 426 - 427 - <p>Apart from this and the <code>_tile</code> suffix in the 428 - <code>package require</code> command, the only difference (from the 429 - programmer's point of view) between the packages Tablelist and Tablelist_tile 430 - is related to the supported configuration options: The 431 - <code>-highlightbackground</code>, <code>-highlightcolor</code>, 432 - <code>-highlightthickness</code>, <code>-labelbackground</code>, 433 - <code>-labelactivebackground</code>, <code>-labelactiveforeground</code>, 434 - <code>-labeldisabledforeground</code>, and <code>-labelheight</code> options 435 - (the latter at both widget and column levels), present in the Tablelist 436 - package, are not supported by Tablelist_tile. The first three are 437 - standard Tk widget options that are not available for tile widgets. The 438 - <code>-labelbackground</code> option stands for the <code>-background</code> 439 - option of the column labels, and current versions of the tile engine don't 440 - support setting the background color for these widgets with a special header 441 - layout. The remaining options stand for the 442 - <code>-activebackground</code>, <code>-activeforeground</code>, 443 - <code>-disabledforeground</code>, and <code>-height</code> options of the 444 - column labels, and these configuration options are not supported for tile 445 - label widgets.</p> 446 - 447 - <p>Also, take into account that in some themes, setting the 448 - <code>-labelborderwidth</code> option (at widget or column level) to a value 449 - other than the default might be ignored by tile and thus could cause 450 - alignment problems. This is because the border of tile widgets is drawn 451 - with theme-specific methods, which will not always produce the results known 452 - from Tk widgets.</p> 453 - 454 - <p>Finally, notice that, when using the <code>tileqt</code> theme, the 455 - version number of the <code>tile::theme::tileqt</code> package must be 0.4 or 456 - higher, and <code>tileqt</code> itself won't work with tile versions earlier 457 - than 0.7.</p> 458 - 459 - <div align="center"> 460 - <p><a href="#contents">Contents</a> <a href= 461 - "index.html">Start page</a></p> 462 - </div> 463 - <hr> 464 - 465 - <h2 id="examples">Examples</h2> 466 - 467 - <h3 id="ex_config">A tablelist Widget for Displaying and Editing 468 - Configuration Options</h3> 469 - 470 - <p>The file <code>config.tcl</code> in the <code>demos</code> directory 471 - contains a procedure <code>demo::displayConfig</code> that displays the 472 - configuration options of an arbitrary widget in a tablelist contained in a 473 - newly created top-level widget and allows you to edit these options. 474 - This procedure can prove to be quite useful during interactive GUI 475 - development. To test it, start <code>wish</code> and evaluate the file 476 - by using the <code>source</code> command as follows:</p> 477 - 478 - <ul> 479 - <li>If <code>wish</code> was started in the <code>demos</code> directory 480 - then it is sufficient to enter 481 - 482 - <blockquote> 483 - <pre> 484 -source config.tcl 485 -</pre> 486 - </blockquote> 487 - </li> 488 - 489 - <li>If <code>wish</code> was started in some other directory then you can 490 - use the <code>tablelist::library</code> variable to find the location of 491 - the file. For example, assuming that your Tablelist installation has 492 - the directory structure described in the <a href="#ov_install">How to 493 - install it?</a> section, the required commands are: 494 - 495 - <blockquote> 496 - <pre> 497 -package require tablelist 5.16 498 -source [file join $tablelist::library demos config.tcl] 499 -</pre> 500 - </blockquote> 501 - </li> 502 - </ul> 503 - 504 - <p>In both cases, the script will print the following message to 505 - <code>stdout</code>:</p> 506 - 507 - <blockquote> 508 - <pre> 509 -To display the configuration options of an arbitrary widget, enter 510 - 511 - demo::displayConfig <widgetName> 512 -</pre> 513 - </blockquote> 514 - 515 - <p>The result looks like in the following figure:</p> 516 - 517 - <blockquote> 518 - <img src="config.png" alt="Configuration Options" width="839" height= 519 - "387"> 520 - </blockquote> 521 - 522 - <p>It is assumed that the Tcl command associated with the widget specified by 523 - <code><widgetName></code> has a <code>configure</code> subcommand 524 - which, when invoked without any argument, returns a list describing all of 525 - the available configuration options for the widget, in the common format 526 - known from the standard Tk widgets. The 527 - <code>demo::displayConfig</code> procedure inserts the items of this list 528 - into a scrolled tablelist with 5 dynamic-width columns and interactive sort 529 - capability, and returns the name of the newly created tablelist widget:</p> 530 - 531 - <blockquote> 532 - <pre> 533 -package require tablelist 5.16 534 - 535 -namespace eval demo { 536 - # 537 - # Get the current windowing system ("x11", "win32", "classic", or "aqua") 538 - # and add some entries to the Tk option database for the following 539 - # widget hierarchy within a top-level widget of the class DemoTop: 540 - # 541 - # Name Class 542 - # ----------------------------- 543 - # tf Frame 544 - # tbl Tabellist 545 - # vsb, hsb Scrollbar 546 - # bf Frame 547 - # b1, b2, b3 Button 548 - # 549 - variable winSys 550 - if {[catch {tk windowingsystem} winSys] != 0} { 551 - switch $::tcl_platform(platform) { 552 - unix { set winSys x11 } 553 - windows { set winSys win32 } 554 - macintosh { set winSys classic } 555 - } 556 - } 557 - if {[string compare $winSys "x11"] == 0} { 558 - # 559 - # Create the font TkDefaultFont if not yet present 560 - # 561 - catch {font create TkDefaultFont -family Helvetica -size -12} 562 - 563 - option add *DemoTop*Font TkDefaultFont 564 - option add *DemoTop*selectBackground #678db2 565 - option add *DemoTop*selectForeground white 566 - } else { 567 - option add *DemoTop.tf.borderWidth 1 568 - option add *DemoTop.tf.relief sunken 569 - option add *DemoTop.tf.tbl.borderWidth 0 570 - option add *DemoTop.tf.tbl.highlightThickness 0 571 - } 572 - option add *DemoTop.tf.tbl.background white 573 - option add *DemoTop.tf.tbl.stripeBackground #f0f0f0 574 - option add *DemoTop.tf.tbl.setGrid yes 575 - option add *DemoTop.tf.tbl*Entry.background white 576 - option add *DemoTop.bf.Button.width 10 577 -} 578 - 579 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 580 -# demo::displayConfig 581 -# 582 -# Displays the configuration options of the widget w in a tablelist widget 583 -# contained in a newly created top-level widget. Returns the name of the 584 -# tablelist widget. 585 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 586 -proc demo::displayConfig w { 587 - if {![winfo exists $w]} { 588 - bell 589 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 590 - "Bad window path name \"$w\"" 591 - return "" 592 - } 593 - 594 - # 595 - # Create a top-level widget of the class DemoTop 596 - # 597 - set top .configTop 598 - for {set n 2} {[winfo exists $top]} {incr n} { 599 - set top .configTop$n 600 - } 601 - toplevel $top -class DemoTop 602 - wm title $top "Configuration Options of the [winfo class $w] Widget \"$w\"" 603 - 604 - # 605 - # Create a scrolled tablelist widget with 5 dynamic-width 606 - # columns and interactive sort capability within the top-level 607 - # 608 - set tf $top.tf 609 - frame $tf 610 - set tbl $tf.tbl 611 - set vsb $tf.vsb 612 - set hsb $tf.hsb 613 - tablelist::tablelist $tbl \ 614 - -columns {0 "Command-Line Name" 615 - 0 "Database/Alias Name" 616 - 0 "Database Class" 617 - 0 "Default Value" 618 - 0 "Current Value"} \ 619 - -labelcommand tablelist::sortByColumn -sortcommand demo::compareAsSet \ 620 - -editendcommand demo::applyValue -height 15 -width 100 -stretch all \ 621 - -xscrollcommand [list $hsb set] -yscrollcommand [list $vsb set] 622 - if {[$tbl cget -selectborderwidth] == 0} { 623 - $tbl configure -spacing 1 624 - } 625 - $tbl columnconfigure 3 -maxwidth 30 626 - $tbl columnconfigure 4 -maxwidth 30 -editable yes 627 - scrollbar $vsb -orient vertical -command [list $tbl yview] 628 - scrollbar $hsb -orient horizontal -command [list $tbl xview] 629 - 630 - # 631 - # Create three buttons within a frame child of the top-level widget 632 - # 633 - set bf $top.bf 634 - frame $bf 635 - set b1 $bf.b1 636 - set b2 $bf.b2 637 - set b3 $bf.b3 638 - button $b1 -text "Refresh" -command [list demo::putConfig $w $tbl] 639 - button $b2 -text "Sort as Set" -command [list $tbl sort] 640 - button $b3 -text "Close" -command [list destroy $top] 641 - 642 - # 643 - # Manage the widgets 644 - # 645 - grid $tbl -row 0 -rowspan 2 -column 0 -sticky news 646 - variable winSys 647 - if {[string compare $winSys "aqua"] == 0} { 648 - grid [$tbl cornerpath] -row 0 -column 1 -sticky ew 649 - grid $vsb -row 1 -column 1 -sticky ns 650 - } else { 651 - grid $vsb -row 0 -rowspan 2 -column 1 -sticky ns 652 - } 653 - grid $hsb -row 2 -column 0 -sticky ew 654 - grid rowconfigure $tf 1 -weight 1 655 - grid columnconfigure $tf 0 -weight 1 656 - pack $b1 $b2 $b3 -side left -expand yes -pady 10 657 - pack $bf -side bottom -fill x 658 - pack $tf -side top -expand yes -fill both 659 - 660 - # 661 - # Populate the tablelist with the configuration options of the given widget 662 - # 663 - putConfig $w $tbl 664 - return $tbl 665 -} 666 -</pre> 667 - </blockquote> 668 - 669 - <p>The procedure invokes the <code><a href= 670 - "tablelistWidget.html">tablelist::tablelist</a></code> command to create a 671 - tablelist widget. The value of the <code><a href= 672 - "tablelistWidget.html#columns">-columns</a></code> option passed to this 673 - command specifies the widths, titles, and alignments of the 5 columns. 674 - The width of each column is given as <code>0</code>, specifying that the 675 - column's width is to be made just large enough to hold all the elements in 676 - the column, including its title, which is the string following the 677 - width. We have omitted the alignment specifications (which can 678 - optionally follow the titles), because the columns shall all be 679 - left-justified.</p> 680 - 681 - <p>Since all columns are of dynamic width and left-aligned, instead of 682 - <code>-columns</code> we could have used the <code><a href= 683 - "tablelistWidget.html#columntitles">-columntitles</a></code> option as 684 - follows:</p> 685 - 686 - <blockquote> 687 - <pre> 688 - tablelist::tablelist $tbl \ 689 - -columntitles {"Command-Line Name" 690 - "Database/Alias Name" 691 - "Database Class" 692 - "Default Value" 693 - "Current Value"} \ 694 - . . . 695 -</pre> 696 - </blockquote> 697 - 698 - <p>The command <code><a href= 699 - "tablelistColSort.html#sortByColumn">tablelist::sortByColumn</a></code>, 700 - specified as the value of the <code><a href= 701 - "tablelistWidget.html#labelcommand">-labelcommand</a></code> option, will be 702 - invoked whenever mouse button 1 is released over one of the labels. 703 - This command sorts the items based on the column corresponding to that label, 704 - in the right order, by invoking the <code><a href= 705 - "tablelistWidget.html#sortbycolumn">sortbycolumn</a></code> subcommand of the 706 - Tcl command associated with the tablelist widget.</p> 707 - 708 - <p>As seen from the creation of the button displaying the text 709 - <code>"Sort as Set"</code>, the items will also be sorted by invoking 710 - the <code><a href="tablelistWidget.html#sort">sort</a></code> 711 - subcommand. This makes it necessary to specify a command to be used for 712 - the comparison of the items, as the value of the <code><a href= 713 - "tablelistWidget.html#sortcommand">-sortcommand</a></code> option. In 714 - our example this is the <code>demo::compareAsSet</code> procedure shown 715 - below.</p> 716 - 717 - <p>The <code><a href= 718 - "tablelistWidget.html#editendcommand">-editendcommand</a></code> option 719 - specifies the command to be invoked automatically whenever the interactive 720 - editing of a cell's contents is finished and the final contents of the 721 - temporary embedded entry widget used for the editing are different from its 722 - original one. Per default, the elements of a tablelist widget can only 723 - be edited programmatically, but we enable the interactive editing for the 724 - cells of the last column with the aid of the <code><a href= 725 - "tablelistWidget.html#col_editable">-editable</a></code> column configuration 726 - option.</p> 727 - 728 - <p>By specifying the value <code>all</code> for the <code><a href= 729 - "tablelistWidget.html#stretch">-stretch</a></code> configuration option we 730 - make sure that all of the columns will be stretched to eliminate the blank 731 - space that might appear at the right of the table.</p> 732 - 733 - <p>If the default value of the <code>-selectborderwidth</code> option is 734 - <code>0</code> (this is the case on the Windows and Macintosh platforms, and 735 - also in an X11 envronment with Tk 8.5 or above) then we use the 736 - <code><a href="tablelistWidget.html#spacing">-spacing</a></code> option to 737 - provide some additional space above and below the rows.</p> 738 - 739 - <p>For the last two columns of the tablelist we use the <code><a href= 740 - "tablelistWidget.html#col_maxwidth">-maxwidth</a></code> column configuration 741 - option, to make sure that the dynamic widths of these columns won't exceed 30 742 - average-width characters.</p> 743 - 744 - <p>Besides the options given on the command line, our tablelist widget will 745 - automatically inherit the ones contained in the Tk option database entries 746 - specified in the namespace initialization preceding the 747 - <code>demo::displayConfig</code> procedure. The database name 748 - <code>stripeBackground</code> corresponds to the <code><a href= 749 - "tablelistWidget.html#stripebackground">-stripebackground</a></code> 750 - configuration option. According to this entry, every other row of the 751 - tablelist widget will be displayed in the background color 752 - <code>#f0f0f0</code>, which improves the readability of the items and gives 753 - the widget a nice appearance.</p> 754 - 755 - <p>The option database entries given for the windowing systems other than 756 - <code>x11</code> are implicitly used when managing the tablelist widget and 757 - the two scrollbars with the aid of <code>grid</code>. Notice how the 758 - <code><a href="tablelistWidget.html#cornerpath">cornerpath</a></code> 759 - subcommand enables us to achieve a native look & feel with respect to the 760 - vertical scrollbar on the windowing system <code>aqua</code>.</p> 761 - 762 - <p>We populate the tablelist by invoking the <code>demo::putConfig</code> 763 - procedure discussed below. The same script is associated with the 764 - <b>Refresh</b> button, as the value of its <code>-command</code> 765 - configuration option. This procedure is implemented as follows:</p> 766 - 767 - <blockquote> 768 - <pre> 769 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 770 -# demo::putConfig 771 -# 772 -# Outputs the configuration options of the widget w into the tablelist widget 773 -# tbl. 774 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 775 -proc demo::putConfig {w tbl} { 776 - if {![winfo exists $w]} { 777 - bell 778 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 779 - "Bad window path name \"$w\"" -parent [winfo toplevel $tbl] 780 - return "" 781 - } 782 - 783 - # 784 - # Display the configuration options of w in the tablelist widget tbl 785 - # 786 - $tbl delete 0 end 787 - foreach configSet [$w configure] { 788 - # 789 - # Insert the list configSet into the tablelist widget 790 - # 791 - $tbl insert end $configSet 792 - 793 - if {[llength $configSet] == 2} { 794 - $tbl rowconfigure end -foreground gray50 -selectforeground gray75 795 - $tbl cellconfigure end -editable no 796 - } else { 797 - # 798 - # Change the colors of the first and last cell of the row 799 - # if the current value is different from the default one 800 - # 801 - set default [lindex $configSet 3] 802 - set current [lindex $configSet 4] 803 - if {[string compare $default $current] != 0} { 804 - foreach col {0 4} { 805 - $tbl cellconfigure end,$col \ 806 - -foreground red -selectforeground yellow 807 - } 808 - } 809 - } 810 - } 811 - 812 - $tbl sortbycolumn 0 813 - $tbl activate 0 814 - $tbl attrib widget $w 815 -} 816 -</pre> 817 - </blockquote> 818 - 819 - <p>After deleting the current items of the tablelist widget <code>tbl</code>, 820 - the procedure inserts the items of the list returned by the 821 - <code>configure</code> subcommand of the Tcl command associated with the 822 - widget <code>w</code>. For each option that is merely an abbreviated 823 - form of some other one, we use the <code><a href= 824 - "tablelistWidget.html#rowconfigure">rowconfigure</a></code> tablelist 825 - subcommand to change the normal and selection foreground colors of the item 826 - just appended, and we disable the interactive editing in the last inserted 827 - cell by using the <code><a href= 828 - "tablelistWidget.html#cell_editable">-editable</a></code> cell configuration 829 - option. The <code><a href= 830 - "tablelistWidget.html#cellconfigure">cellconfigure</a></code> tablelist 831 - operation is also invoked for each real option whose current value is 832 - different from the default one, to change the values of the 833 - <code>-foreground</code> and <code>-selectforeground</code> options of the 834 - cells no. 0 and 4, containing the command-line name of the option and its 835 - current value.</p> 836 - 837 - <p>Each tablelist widget may have any number of private <b>attributes</b>, 838 - which can be set and retrieved with the aid of the <code><a href= 839 - "tablelistWidget.html#attrib">attrib</a></code> subcommand of the Tcl command 840 - corresponding to the widget. The <code>demo::putConfig</code> procedure 841 - sets the <code>widget</code> attribute to the name of the widget whose 842 - options are displayed in the tablelist.</p> 843 - 844 - <p>The implementation of the comparison command 845 - <code>demo::compareAsSet</code> mentioned above is quite simple:</p> 846 - 847 - <blockquote> 848 - <pre> 849 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 850 -# demo::compareAsSet 851 -# 852 -# Compares two items of a tablelist widget used to display the configuration 853 -# options of an arbitrary widget. The item in which the current value is 854 -# different from the default one is considered to be less than the other; if 855 -# both items fulfil this condition or its negation then string comparison is 856 -# applied to the two option names. 857 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 858 -proc demo::compareAsSet {item1 item2} { 859 - foreach {opt1 dbName1 dbClass1 default1 current1} $item1 \ 860 - {opt2 dbName2 dbClass2 default2 current2} $item2 { 861 - set changed1 [expr {[string compare $default1 $current1] != 0}] 862 - set changed2 [expr {[string compare $default2 $current2] != 0}] 863 - if {$changed1 == $changed2} { 864 - return [string compare $opt1 $opt2] 865 - } elseif {$changed1} { 866 - return -1 867 - } else { 868 - return 1 869 - } 870 - } 871 -} 872 -</pre> 873 - </blockquote> 874 - 875 - <p>Finally, here is the implementation of the <code>demo::applyValue</code> 876 - procedure, specified as the value of the <code>-editendcommand</code> 877 - option:</p> 878 - 879 - <blockquote> 880 - <pre> 881 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 882 -# demo::applyValue 883 -# 884 -# Applies the new value of the configuraton option contained in the given row 885 -# of the tablelist widget tbl to the widget whose options are displayed in it, 886 -# and updates the colors of the first and last cell of the row. 887 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 888 -proc demo::applyValue {tbl row col text} { 889 - # 890 - # Try to apply the new value of the option contained in 891 - # the given row to the widget whose options are displayed 892 - # in the tablelist; reject the value if the attempt fails 893 - # 894 - set w [$tbl attrib widget] 895 - set opt [$tbl cellcget $row,0 -text] 896 - if {[catch {$w configure $opt $text} result] != 0} { 897 - bell 898 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message $result \ 899 - -parent [winfo toplevel $tbl] 900 - $tbl rejectinput 901 - return "" 902 - } 903 - 904 - # 905 - # Replace the new option value with its canonical form and 906 - # update the colors of the first and last cell of the row 907 - # 908 - set text [$w cget $opt] 909 - set default [$tbl cellcget $row,3 -text] 910 - if {[string compare $default $text] == 0} { 911 - foreach col {0 4} { 912 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,$col \ 913 - -foreground "" -selectforeground "" 914 - } 915 - } else { 916 - foreach col {0 4} { 917 - $tbl cellconfigure $row,$col \ 918 - -foreground red -selectforeground yellow 919 - } 920 - } 921 - 922 - return $text 923 -} 924 -</pre> 925 - </blockquote> 926 - 927 - <p>The procedure retrieves the name of the widget whose options are displayed 928 - in the tablelist, as the value of its <code>widget</code> attribute, and 929 - invokes the <code><a href="tablelistWidget.html#cellcget">cellcget</a></code> 930 - tablelist subcommand to get the name of the option specified in the first 931 - cell of the row whose last element was just edited. Next, it tries to 932 - apply the new value of the option to the widget, and invokes the 933 - <code><a href="tablelistWidget.html#rejectinput">rejectinput</a></code> 934 - subcommand if the attempt fails. Otherwise it replaces the new option 935 - value with its canonical form and updates the normal and selection foreground 936 - colors of the cells no. 0 and 4. The canonical form of the option value 937 - is given by the <code>cget</code> subcommand of the Tcl command associated 938 - with that widget. For example, a boolean value will always be replaced 939 - with <code>1</code> or <code>0</code>, even if the entry contains the string 940 - <code>yes</code> or <code>no</code>. The procedure returns this 941 - canonical option value, thus making sure that the latter will become the new 942 - contents of the cell that was just edited.</p> 943 - 944 - <h3 id="ex_browse">Two Widget Browsers Based on a tablelist</h3> 945 - 946 - <p>The files <code>browse.tcl</code> and <code>browseTree.tcl</code> in the 947 - <code>demos</code> directory contain a procedure 948 - <code>demo::displayChildren</code> that displays information about the 949 - children of an arbitrary widget in a tablelist contained in a newly created 950 - top-level widget. To test it, start <code>wish</code> and evaluate the 951 - chosen file by using the <code>source</code> command, in a similar way as in 952 - the case of the <a href="#ex_config">previous example</a>.</p> 953 - 954 - <p>Both scripts will print the following message to <code>stdout</code>:</p> 955 - 956 - <blockquote> 957 - <pre> 958 -To display information about the children of an arbitrary widget, enter 959 - 960 - demo::displayChildren <widgetName> 961 -</pre> 962 - </blockquote> 963 - 964 - <p>The tablelist created by the procedure <code>demo::displayChildren</code> 965 - in the file <code>browse.tcl</code> is a multi-column listbox:</p> 966 - 967 - <blockquote> 968 - <img src="browse.png" alt="Widget Browser" width="609" height="289"> 969 - </blockquote> 970 - 971 - <p>The tablelist created by the procedure of the same name in the file 972 - <code>browseTree.tcl</code> is a multi-column tree widget:</p> 973 - 974 - <blockquote> 975 - <img src="browseTree.png" alt="Widget Browser" width="627" height="289"> 976 - </blockquote> 977 - 978 - <p>The <code>demo::displayChildren</code> command inserts some data of the 979 - children of the widget specified by <code><widgetName></code> into a 980 - vertically scrolled tablelist with 9 dynamic-width columns and interactive 981 - sort capability, and returns the name of the newly created tablelist 982 - widget. By double-clicking an item or invoking the first entry of a 983 - pop-up menu within the body of the tablelist, you can display the data of the 984 - children of the widget corresponding to the selected item, and with the 985 - second menu entry you can display its configuration options (see the <a href= 986 - "#ex_config">previous example</a> for details). To go one level up, 987 - click on the <b>Parent</b> button.</p> 988 - 989 - <p>There is a lot of code common to the scripts <code>browse.tcl</code> and 990 - <code>browseTree.tcl</code>. We will restrict the description below to 991 - the second one, which requires Tk 8.3 or later, due to the use of several 992 - tree-related tablelist options and subcommands.</p> 993 - 994 - <blockquote> 995 - <pre> 996 -package require Tk 8.3 997 -package require tablelist 5.16 998 - 999 -namespace eval demo { 1000 - variable dir [file dirname [info script]] 1001 - 1002 - # 1003 - # Create two images, needed in the procedure putChildren 1004 - # 1005 - variable leafImg [image create bitmap -file [file join $dir leaf.xbm] \ 1006 - -background coral -foreground gray50] 1007 - variable compImg [image create bitmap -file [file join $dir comp.xbm] \ 1008 - -background yellow -foreground gray50] 1009 -} 1010 - 1011 -source [file join $demo::dir config.tcl] 1012 - 1013 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1014 -# demo::displayChildren 1015 -# 1016 -# Displays information on the children of the widget w in a tablelist widget 1017 -# contained in a newly created top-level widget. Returns the name of the 1018 -# tablelist widget. 1019 -#------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1020 -proc demo::displayChildren w { 1021 - if {![winfo exists $w]} { 1022 - bell 1023 - tk_messageBox -title "Error" -icon error -message \ 1024 - "Bad window path name \"$w\"" 1025 - return "" 1026 - } 1027 - 1028 - # 1029 - # Create a top-level widget of the class DemoTop 1030 - # 1031 - set top .browseTop 1032 - for {set n 2} {[winfo exists $top]} {incr n} { 1033 - set top .browseTop$n 1034 - } 1035 - toplevel $top -class DemoTop 1036 - 1037 - # 1038 - # Create a vertically scrolled tablelist widget with 9 dynamic-width 1039 - # columns and interactive sort capability within the top-level 1040 - # 1041 - set tf $top.tf 1042 - frame $tf 1043 - set tbl $tf.tbl 1044 - set vsb $tf.vsb 1045 - tablelist::tablelist $tbl \ 1046 - -columns {0 "Path Name" left 1047 - 0 "Class" left 1048 - 0 "X" right 1049 - 0 "Y" right 1050 - 0 "Width" right 1051 - 0 "Height" right 1052 - 0 "Mapped" center 1053 - 0 "Viewable" center 1054 - 0 "Manager" left} \ 1055 - -expandcommand demo::expandCmd -labelcommand demo::labelCmd \ 1056 - -yscrollcommand [list $vsb set] -setgrid no -width 0 1057 - if {[$tbl cget -selectborderwidth] == 0} { 1058 - $tbl configure -spacing 1 1059 - } 1060 - foreach col {2 3 4 5} { 1061 - $tbl columnconfigure $col -sortmode integer 1062 - } 1063 - foreach col {6 7} { 1064 - $tbl columnconfigure $col -formatcommand demo::formatBoolean 1065 - } 1066 - scrollbar $vsb -orient vertical -command [list $tbl yview] 1067 - 1068 - # 1069 - # When displaying the information about the children of any 1070 - # ancestor of the label widgets, the widths of some of the 1071 - # labels and thus also the widths and x coordinates of some 1072 - # children may change. For this reason, make sure the items 1073 - # will be updated after any change in the sizes of the labels 1074 - # 1075 - foreach l [$tbl labels] { 1076 - bind $l <Configure> [list demo::updateItemsDelayed $tbl] 1077 - } 1078 - bind $tbl <Configure> [list demo::updateItemsDelayed $tbl] 1079 - 1080 - # 1081 - # Create a pop-up menu with two command entries; bind the script 1082 - # associated with its first entry to the <Double-1> event, too 1083 - # 1084 - set menu $top.menu 1085 - menu $menu -tearoff no 1086 - $menu add command -label "Display Children" \ 1087 - -command [list demo::putChildrenOfSelWidget $tbl] 1088 - $menu add command -label "Display Config" \ 1089 - -command [list demo::dispConfigOfSelWidget $tbl] 1090 - set bodyTag [$tbl bodytag] 1091 - bind $bodyTag <Double-1> [list demo::putChildrenOfSelWidget $tbl] 1092 - bind $bodyTag <<Button3>> [bind TablelistBody <Button-1>] 1093 - bind $bodyTag <<Button3>> +[bind TablelistBody <ButtonRelease-1>] 1094 - bind $bodyTag <<Button3>> +[list demo::postPopupMenu $top %X %Y] 1095 - 1096 - # 1097 - # Create three buttons within a frame child of the top-level widget 1098 - # 1099 - set bf $top.bf 1100 - frame $bf 1101 - set b1 $bf.b1 1102 - set b2 $bf.b2 1103 - set b3 $bf.b3 1104 - button $b1 -text "Refresh" 1105 - button $b2 -text "Parent" 1106 - button $b3 -text "Close" -command [list destroy $top] 1107 - 1108 - # 1109 - # Manage the widgets 1110 - # 1111 - . . . 1112 - 1113 - # 1114 - # Populate the tablelist with the data of the given widget's children 1115 - # 1116 - putChildren $w $tbl root 1117 - return $tbl 1118 -} 1119 -</pre> 1120 - </blockquote> 1121 - 1122 - <p>The procedure invokes the <code><a href= 1123 - "tablelistWidget.html">tablelist::tablelist</a></code> command to create a 1124 - tablelist widget. The value of the <code><a href= 1125 - "tablelistWidget.html#columns">-columns</a></code> option passed to this 1126 - command specifies the widths, titles, and alignments of the 9 columns. 1127 - The width of each column is given as <code>0</code>, specifying that the 1128 - column's width is to be made just large enough to hold all the elements in 1129 - the column, including its title, which is the string following the 1130 - width. Each of the titles is followed by an alignment, which indicates 1131 - how to justify both the elements and the title of the respective column.</p> 1132 - 1133 - <p>We want to display not only the data of the given widget's children, but 1134 - also those of its further descendants. To this end, we need a command 1135 - to be invoked whenever an item corresponding to a widget with children gets 1136 - expanded. This command is specified as the value of the <code><a href= 1137 - "tablelistWidget.html#expandcommand">-expandcommand</a></code> option. 1138 - As discussed later, the <code>demo::expandCmd</code> procedure will insert 1139 - the children of the row that is about to be expanded, if it has no children 1140 - yet.</p> 1141 - 1142 - <p>The command <code>demo::labelCmd</code>, specified as the value of the 1143 - <code><a href="tablelistWidget.html#labelcommand">-labelcommand</a></code> 1144 - option, will be invoked whenever mouse button 1 is released over one of the 1145 - labels. We will discuss this procedure later.</p> 1146 - 1147 - <p>We specify the value <code>0</code> for the widget's <code><a href= 1148 - "tablelistWidget.html#width">-width</a></code> option, meaning that the 1149 - tablelist's width shall be made just large enough to hold all its 1150 - columns.</p> 1151 - 1152 - <p>After creating the tablelist widget, we make sure that the elements of its 1153 - columns 2, 3, 4, and 5 (displaying the x and y coordinates as well as the 1154 - widths and heights of the children) will be compared as integers when sorting 1155 - the items based on one of these columns. We do this with the aid of the 1156 - <code><a href= 1157 - "tablelistWidget.html#columnconfigure">columnconfigure</a></code> tablelist 1158 - operation.</p> 1159 - 1160 - <p>The same <code>columnconfigure</code> subcommand enables us to specify 1161 -